A handbook to modern Greek - Archive

A HANDBOOK

TO

MODERN GREEK

EDGAR VINCENTOOXDSTBEAIi OTTAEDS

AND

T. G. DICKSON07 ATHSN8

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED

MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED

ST. MARTIN'S STREET, LONDON1919

,;

'''*

) PA

018282 i(]icj

MACMILLAN AND CO., LimitedLONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA

MELBOURNE

THE MACMILLAN COMPANYNEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGOATLANTA • SAN FRANCISCO

THE MACMILLAN CO OF CANADA, Ltd.

TORONTO

COPYRIGHT

First Edition {Fcap. Bvo), printed 1879

Second {Crown 8vo) 1881, Reprinted 1887, 1893, 1904, 1910, 1919

PEEFACE.

This book has been written, not to prove a theory, but to

supply the want of a practical work on Modern Greek.

In its present condition, Modern Greek is of the greatest

interest to the classical student and the philologist, but

hitherto it has (in England at least) been strangely neg-

lected. By many it is believed that a corrupt patois of

Turkish and Italian is now spoken in Greece; and few,

even among professed scholars, are aware how small the

difference is between the Greek of the New Testament and

the Greek of a contemporary Athenian newspaper. The

changes in the language during the last 1800 years are

certainly less important than those which took place in

England between the times of Chaucer and of Shakespeare.

To a traveller in the Levant, a knowledge of Modern

Greek is of the greatest advantage, as it enables him to

dispense with the services of an interpreter. Throughout

the East the principal merchants are Greeks, and in Pera,

the principal quarter of Constantinople where Europeans

reside, Modern Greek is as useful as Turkish.

Another circumstance which renders the language inter-

esting is that every year it is becoming more pure and

classical : Turkish and Italian words are eliminated ; old

grammatical forms, which have been lost for centuries,

iv Preface.

are again brought into common use ; while vulgarisms

and foreign constructions are discarded.

This change is not confined, as might be supposed, to

the literary classes. Education is widely diffused in Greece,

and the grammar which is taught in the National Primary

Schools {drjiioTiKa axoikua) differs but little from the " Parry "

which is taught at Eton, while the young Greek is too

proud of his knowledge to use any but the most classical

phraseology he is acquainted with.

The following are the special features of this work :

—

The Exercises are composed of sentences constantly used

in ordinary conversation.

The English and Greek of the Exercises are given side

by side for the convenience of those who wish to gain a

rapid conversational knowledge.

In the Dialogues (Part II) an endeavour has been made

to give reliable information about Greece and the Greeks,

in addition to teaching the requisite phrases. The subjects

mentioned include travelling in the interior, its probable

expense, Greek customs, the pay of dragomen and inter-

preters, the best way of visiting the antiquities, a Greek

lesson, etc.

Some letters have been added to serve as models, com-

prising invitations, applications to have letters forwarded,

orders for rooms, a form of enquiry of the Minister of the

Interior respecting brigands, etc. •

Part III contains examples of the Greek of successive

periods from B.C. 850-A. D. 1821. Passages have been

taken from

Preface.

. B.C.

vi Preface.

In a work of this kind, it is impossible to avoid some

inaccuracies and imperfections; in view of future editions

the authors will therefore be most grateful for any hints

or suggestions, which may help to render the book more

useful or more complete.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

A MOST valuable addition has been made to this edition

in the form of an Appendix by Professor B.. C. Jebb, of

Glasgow, on 'The Relation of Modem to Classical Greek,

especially in regard to Syntax,'

In the University of Glasgow the study of Modem Greek

has now for some years been connected with that of the

ancient language. With a view to illustrating the relations

between tliem, a portion of Xenophon's Anabasis has been

published ^ with a Modern Greek version facing the classical

text ; and the elements of Modem Greek form a regular

subject of instruction. For more advanced students, special

lectures on Modern Greek are given every winter, and at the

close of the course an examination is held in Modem Greek

grammar, translation at sight, and composition. The results

have been most satisfactory in stimulating the interest of

classical students, and in laying the foundation of a practical

acquaintance with a language so widely spoken in Southern

Europe and in many of our large towns.

The authors are indebted to Dr. J. J. Hornby, Head-

master of Eton College, Mr. C. D. Cobham, Commissioner

^ Maclehose, Glasgow.

List of Authorities. vii

of Larnaca, Professor Constantinides, Professor Daniel

Sanders of Alt. Strelitz, who has translated the work

into German, and to many others for encouragement and

valuable suggestions.

The Eev. J. P. Mahaffy has very kindly revised the

proof-sheets of our text.

April, 1881.

LIST OF AUTHORITIES.

The Modern Greek Language, in its relation to Ancient

Greek, by E. M. Geldart, B.A. (Clarendon Press, Oxford,

1870.)

Grammaire Abr^g^e du Grec Actuel, par A. R. Rangab^.

Practical and Easy Method of learning the Modern Greek

Language, by Dr. Ang. Vlachos.

An Elementary Greek Grammar, by Edward St. John

Parry, M.A.

TpafifiariKfj Trjs EWrjviKris T^axrcrrjs, (itto T. Ttwadiov.

TpafifiariKT] tj]s Neas ''EXKr}viK.rjs VKaxrarjs, xnro T. VfpaKrj.

Horse Hellenicse, by John Stuart Blackie, F.R.S.E., etc., etc.

Grammatik der Griechischen Vulgarsprache, by Professor

Mullach.

Modern Greek Grammar, by T. Sopliocles.

History of the Greek Language, by D. Mavrophredes.

(Smyrna, 1871.)

Romaic Greek, by Professor Clyde.

The Pronunciation of the Greek Language, by Constantinus

Oekonomos, (St, Petersburg, 1829.)

Compendium der Vergleichenden Grammatik, by Professor

Schleicher.

Introduction to Greek and Latin Etymology, by John

Peile, M.A.

INTRODUCTORY.

It has always appeared to me a great mistake, and one of

which our British Hellenists have good reason to be ashamed,

that Greek in this country is always talked about as if it

were a dead language, and Modern Greek, if mentioned at

all, thrown aside as a ^>a<ow, an acquaintance with which

would rather hinder than advance the student in his mastery

of the great classical tongue. This notion is both philo-

logically false and practically pernicious. Modern Greek is

not a patois, a mongrel, a hybrid, or degraded dialect in any

legitimate sense of the word : it is the same language in

which St. Paul delivered his discourse to the Athenians from

the hill of Mars in the first century, with only such slight

variations as the course of time naturally brings with it in

the case of all spoken languages which have enjoyed an

imbroken continuity of cultivated usage. No doubt there

do exist in Greece, and always have existed, certain local

perversions of the cultivated speech, which may in a loose

sense be called patois ; just as we have a peculiar local type

of English in Dorsetshire, another in Lancashire, and that

on whichi the genius of Bums has impressed a classical type,

Introductory. J. S, Blackie. ix

commonly called Scotch. This may be called a patois, in the

same sense that the Greek of Pindar might be so called, or

the Italian of Milan or Venice, not otherwise. But upon this

low stratum of purely popular Greek, we have the Greek of

the pulpit, the Greek of the newspapers, and the Greek of

a living literature increasing every day in variety and in

significance. To call this a patois is to shew an ignorance

either of the facts, or of the use of language altogether

inexcusable ; and to throw such a phase of the Greek speech

as is now written and spoken in Greece by all educated

men, altogether out of view in the study of that famous

tongue, can proceed only from a certain limitation of range

and narrowness of sympathy, sometimes observed in per-

sons whose curious familiarity with dead books renders

them averse from the society of living men. The more

natural, obvious, and healthy view of the matter is this,

that a language which has come down to us in an uninter-

rupted stream of vitality, from the time of Homer to the

present hour—nearly 3000 years—and is still spoken ex-

tensively not only in Greece proper, but in various parts of

the Mediterranean, by confessedly the most acute, the best

educated, and the most progressive people in those parts,

has a legitimate claim to be treated and studied as a living

language, and not to be stretched out, as dead bodies are

on an anatomical table, for the purposes of the grammatical

X Introductory. J. S. Blackie.

dissector. Such a method of studying Greek would not only

be a clear gain to the scholar by placing under his eye the

whole process of growth exhibited in the history of the lan-

guage, otherwise artificially curtailed by an arbitrary limit

called the classical period : but it would bring the student

of the Christian scriptures directly into the current from

which the writers of the sacred volume, and the fathers of

the Church drew their peculiar phraseology : for that Modern

Greek is in some of its main features identical with apostolic

and ecclesiastical Greek, is a proposition from which no accu-

rate scholar will allow himself to dissent. But further : to

practical men—as Englishmen and Scotsmen are fond by way

of eminence of being esteemed—it must be a consideration

of the greatest weight that all spoken languages are learned,

by hearing and speaking, in a much shorter space of time

than dead languages by the usual scholastic method : German,

for instance, which to Englishmen is a somewhat difficult

language, is for every practical purpose of understanding

and being understood, acquired perfectly by a young per-

son of ordinary talent, conversing daily with native Ger-

mans in six months or less ; and there is no reason in

the nature of things why Greek should not be acquired the

same way; and even without going to Greece, there are

well-educated Greeks in London, Liverpool, and not a few

other places, from whom Greek could be learned as a living

Introductory. J. S. Blackie. xi

language, with as much facility, and with as much effect as

German, Italian, or French. Nor is there the slightest

danger that the practical hold thus got of the language of

Homer and Plato and St. Paul, as a living organ of expres-

sion, will act as a hindrance to the scientific study of the

language : on the contrary, the familiarity with the language,

which spoken use most readily and most abundantly gives,

!will present more ample and more various materials on

which the generalizing faculty of the philosophical gram-

marian may operate. The present little hook is conceived

upon a plan which I have always recommended as the

only natural and rational plan, not less in the acquisition of

dead languages properly so called than in the more obvious

sphere of spoken tongues. The principle of this plan is

that the ear and the tongue should be exercised largely

from the beginning, and not merely the memory and the

understanding. This implies that no rules should be

learned which are not immediately put in practice, and

that it is wiser to educe the rule from familiar materials

than to inculcate the rule and leave the materials to be

painfully searched for as an after business. Of the prac-

tical utility of such a little book in the present state of

easy and frequent intercourse between people and people

there can be no doubt; and it gives me pleasure to think

that the authors of a volume supplying such an obvious

xii Introductory. J. S. Blackie.

desideratum in our elementary Greek discipline should

have considered my name worthy of being associated with

theirs in a work of such manifest utility. Possibly I may

yet live to see the time when not only young men in the

public service of the country frequenting various parts of

the Mediterranean will, as a matter of course, speak Greek

as readily as French, but when even the professional in-

culcators of scholastic Greek in our great schools and

universities will relax somewhat of the rigidity of their

method, and institute practical exercises in colloquial

Greek, as a most beneficial adjunct to the severity of

their strictly philological drill.^

JOHN" STUART BLACKIE.

College, Edinburgh,

September, 25, 1879.

* As these prefatory remarks are necessarily short, I have to refer

those who may wish to see the proof of my views in detail to the three

papers on the subject of Modern Greek, Greek Accent, and Romaic

Literature in my Horae Mellenicue, London, Macmillan and Co., 1874.

CONTENTS.

Grammar

PART I.PAOB... I

PART 11.

Dialogues •••3Letters

PART III.

[Passages from Ancient Greek Authors, with translations in

I Modern Greek

174

187

PART IV.

Selections from Contemporary Greek Writers . . • .223

PART V.

Vocabulary •• ••57The Written Character . . . • - • • -280

APPENDIX.

The Relation of Modem to Classical Greek, especially in regard to

Syntax, by Prof. R. 0. Jebb 285

PART I.

Introductory.SECT. PAGE1. The Alphabet ........ i

2. Pronunciation of the Vowels 2

3. Pronunciation of the Diphthongs 3

4. Pronunciation of the Consonants ...... 3

5. Observations on Pronunciation of Modern Greek ... 5

6. Accentuation ......... 6

7. The Acute Accent 6

8. The Grave Accent .79. The Circumflex Accent . , 7

10. Special Rules for Accentuation ...... 8

11. Words without an Accent . 8

12. Enclitics , . . . 9

13. Breathings 10

14. Stops II

15. The Article il

Substantives.

16. Remarks on Declension of Nouns 12

1 7. Classification of Substantives 12

18. First Declension 13

19. Remarks on First Declension 16

20. Second Declension . . . . .*

. . .1821. Diminutives in -lov 19

22. Contracted Nouns of Second Declension . . . .2023. Third Declension 23

24. Uncontracted Nouns of Third Declension . . . -2325. Remarks on Uncontracted Nouns 26

26. Third Declension. Contracted '• 27

27. Third Declension. Irregular 31

18. Third Declension. Remarks on Contracted Nouns . . 32

29. Supplementary Declension 32

30. Terminations instead of Prepositions 33

31. Patronymics 34

Contents of Part I. XV

Adjectives and Numerals.

-T.

XVI Contents of Part I,

SECT. PAGE67. Observations on the Tenses. The Aorist . . . .7968. „ „ The Future . . . .8269. „ „ The Perfect and Pluperfect , 83

70. „ „ The Conditional . . . 8471. Contracted Verbs 87

72. T»/x(ia; 88

73. KaXio) . . . .9174. Neuter Verba 55

75. Verbs in -/« 9576. Impersonal Verbs y6

77. Irregiilar ,. .98

Prepositions.

78. Prepositions. Classification of

79. Prepositions governing Genitive

80. „ „ Dative

81. „ „ Accusative

82. „ „ Gen. and Ace.

83. „ „ Gen. Dat. and Ace.

84. Bemarks on Prepositions . . .

107

108

109

nono112

113

85.

86.

90.

Adverbs.

Adverbs . . . . . . . . . .116

„ of Time . .117

„ of Place 118

Miscellaneous Adverbs 118

Conjunctions. . . . . , . . . .119Interjections. .«. ..•..120

Syntax.

91. Peculiarities of Modern Greek Syntax 120

92. Observations on the Article . . . . . , .121

93. „ ,. Cases 121

94. „ „ Adjective 122

95. „ „ Numerals 123

96. „ „ Pronouns , . . . . .12397. „ „ Verb 124

98. Prosody , , , , .129

MODERN GREEK.

§ 1. The Gkeek Alphabet.

The Greek Alphabet is composed of 24 letters, of which 7

axe vowels and 17 consonants.

Character.

2 Modern Greek.

Besides these letters there originally existed the following,

viz. :

—

(i) f, Van, or as it is called from its shape, Dighamma.

(2) ^, ? , Koppa. Latin Q. Used as symbol for 90.

(3) ~^> Sampi, used as symbol for 900.

(4) r', Stigma, originally a form of Vau: in MSS.=(rr,

Symbol for 6.

§ 2. Vowels.

Letter. Name. Pronunciation.

a alpha a, in father ; i] rpdntCa, the table : to arixS-

ttXoiov, the steamer.

* epsilon e, in let, met ; tneira, afterwards ; firpene,

ought, Imperfect of npfntt.

T) eta 6, in the ; 6 KadT]yTiTfjs, the professor.

« eota same as eta, e in the; f] Kpta-is, the crisis,

judgment ; mva, I drink.

omicron o, in not^; v ^0^0, glory; to owXoi', the gun.

V epsilon e in the ; vyf/r]\6s, high,

o) omegha o in hope ^ ; Ka\cos, well.

§ 3. Diphthongs.

01 e, in met ; 7rfnai8fVfifvos, educated ; 6 nais, the boy.

av af, but before /3, 7, 8, C, \ m> "> P and all vowels, soft,

like V ; avBetrriKos, authentic ; fj avyfj, the dawn.

« 6, in the ; t6 el8os, the kind.

(V ef, but subject to the same exceptions as av ; fvxd-

puTTos, pleasant ; evyevrjs, polite, noble.

tp> ef, but subject to the same exceptions, as av ; rjv^rjcra,

I increased ; v^pa, 2 Aor., I found.

«>. e, in the ; avoiya, I open ; koivos, common.

ov 00, in too ; olros, this ; aiSds, nobody.

VI e, in the ; 6 vlos, the son.

* Very little difference is made in rapid conversation between omicron

and omegha.

Consonants. 3

Remarks.

1. When the latter of two vowels composing a diphthong

i? surmounted by a Diairesis (") the two vowels composing it

pronounced separately, xavfievf, poor fellow ; t6 KaiKt, the

f:.i'[ae.

2. The vowels rj, t, v, and the diphthongs ti, oi, vi, have all

the same sound in Modern Greek, that of e, in me or the.

^. In Diphthongs both accent and breathing stand, over

second vowel, except when the first vowel is in large

character.

Letter. Name.

3 veta

y ghamma

d dhelta

C zeta

6 theta

K kappa

X lamvdha

/I me

^ xe

§ 4. Consonants.

Pronunciation.

T ; 6 ^los, life ; dva^aivco, I ascend.

a sound between g and h; t6 yd\a, milk.

Before e, rj, t, v, it has a sound like y in

yes, or the German j in jeder, (yt'yaj,

giant, is pronounced, yeghas) : y-y and yx

like ng nasal, 6 ayyeXo?, the angel,

soft voiced th, as in the, then ; Bida, I give

;

TO SevBpov, the tree,

z, in zebra ; fj^Tco, may he live, hurrah,

breathed th, as in thin and death ; r] Secopia,

the theory,

k; before e, t, v, ij, it has a somewhat softer

sound ; koXos, good ; fj icaKia, wickedness.

1 ; 6 Xetuj/, the lion ; fj av\fj, the court,

m ; TO fifT(cnou, the forehead : for fin see

under double consonants,

n ; 6 vaos, the temple ; k(v6s, empty : for vt

see under double consonants.

X ; 6 ^fvos, the stranger ; to ^evoSoxt'iov, the

hotel.

B 2

4 Modern Greek.

Letter. Name. Pronunciation.

1" pc p ; npcTrei, must ; after /n, as b ; 6 tfXiropos, the

merchant, pronounced emboros.

P rho r, aspirate; ^ piCa, the root ; piuTco, I throw.

a- seghma hard hissing s ; o-woto's, correct : before ^, y,

5, fi, as soft s ; t6 acrp.a, the song.

T taf t ; ToVf, then ; but preceded by v, it is pro-

nounced as d ; (^povTiba, care, pronounced

frondetha.

<^ fe f ; TO 0cof, the light.

X he the most difficult letter : in the middle of

a word like ch in loch, or German doch.

But X is pronounced with the vowel

which follows, and not like ch in German,

with the vowel which precedes. Ex.

the Greeks say €-x«, the Germans fx-w.

At the beginning of a word like the Flo-

rentine c, but soft, as ch in ich, before

h'H)'") o x°P°^y the dance; 17 ;(«<bi/, the snow.

^ pse ps ; TO yj/cofii, the bread ; )} o\}ris, the appearance.

Division of the Consonants.

Smooth. Middle. Aspirate.

r with p sound tt /3 (^

Mutest „ k „ K y Xt „ T 8 6,

Semi- Vowels.

1

A fi V p a:

Aspirated Consonants.

6 <j> Xare considered as the aspirated forms of t, tt, k ; when on<

of the latter is followed by an aspirated vowel it takes it

aspirated form. In the vernacular when two smooth con

sonants meet in the same word, the former is aspirated.

Pronunciation. 5

Double Consonants.

^ kse, is composed of k, or y, or x> and o",

C zeta, „ o- and 8.

^ pse, „ i3, or tt, or ^, and a.

The following combinations of consonants are used, in

words of foreign origin, to represent the sound of letters

which the Greek Alphabet does not contain.

uTT stands for the sound b ; as, 6 /i7rdp/x7raj=barbas, the

uncle ; 6 Mnaipcov, Byron ; o Mnoraapris, Botzaris.

vT represents d; as, to j'Ttj3dw=deevanee, the divan.

§ 5. Pbonunciation.

In addition to the above rules for the pronunciation of

each letter, the following hints may be found useful.

1. The closest attention must be given to the accentuation,

is the syllable on which the accent falls is pronounced with

1 stress, and is further prolonged to the exclusion of any

lifference, in duration, between long and short vowels. For

xample, avdpanos is pronounced dvOpioTros, the first syllable

jeing emphasized and prolonged, while the a> (oraegha) is

pronounced short, like o (omicron).

2. In many words of two or three syllables, the accented

yllable alone is pronounced distinctly. The Greeks clip

iheir words at the beginning as well as at the end (see note

DU p. 122).

3. The rough breathing is written but never pronounced.

A.11 initial vowels and diphthongs are pronounced with a

smooth breathing.

4. Particular attention must be paid to the y (ghamma)

ind to the x (he), which is an entirely diflferent sound from

t (kappa).

6 Modern Greek.

5. When two vowels are linked together by 'Synize-

sis,' they are pronounced as one syllable. Ex. to. x«/>Tia, the

papers.

§ 6. Accentuation.

1. The following rules on Accentuation are such as apply

to all classes of words. To add all the special rules affecting

each particular class (substantives, pronouns, verbs, &c.)

before the words themselves are known, would only cause

confusion; they will be given with the words which they

afiect.

2. The accentuation in Modern Greek is the same as in

Ancient.

3. The accent can never be thrown further back than the

antepenultimate.

4. There are three kinds of accent :

—

(a) Acute ('), o^da, as in ennopos, merchant; iroklrrjs, citizen;

KpiTTis, judge ; which can be placed on any of the last three

syllables,

(6) Grave ('), /Sapela, as in fiadrjTrjs, pupil; which can only

be placed on^he last syllable,

(c) Circumflex ("), irfpiaircofievT}, as in TifxS), I honour;

(Tufia, body ; which can be placed on the last syllable or the

penultimate,

5. No difference is made in pronunciation between the

Acute, the Grave, and the Circumflex.

§ 7. The Acute Accent,

I. The Acute Accent can be placed on the last syllable,

the word is then called oxytone ; on the penultimate, the

word is then called paroxytone; on the antepenultimate,

the word is then called proparoxjiione.

The Circumflex Accent. 7

2. Uncompounded words not oxytone or circumflex, with

the last syllable long, are accented on the penult ; as, ttoXiVj;?

like English conceited.

3. Uncompounded words not oxytone or circumflex, having

tlie last syllable short, are accented on the antepenult ; as,

.'yyfXof, like English dgony.

4. When the last syllable is long and the accent falls on

the penult, it must be acute.

5. The accent can only be on the antepenult when the last

syllable is short ; as, af6pa>Tioi : in the genitive (dvdpdoTTov) the

last syllable is long, and the accent is brought forward to the

penult^. At the end of a word the diphthongs ot, ai, are

considered short, except in adverbs '.

6. Words only take an acute accent on the final syllable,

when they are followed by a stop or an enclitic; tiV, who,

interrogative, forms an exception to this rule, and takes an

acute accent, whether in the middle of a sentence or not.

7. When an oxytone word occurs in the middle of a

sentence, the acute accent is changed into a grave : as, 7 TfXerf]

^PX^arev, the service has begun, but ^pxi-<Tev 17 rtXtrrj. Note

the difference of accent on TtXfTt] in the two sentences.

8. It is conjectured that the Greeks formerly raised their

voices at the end of a clause with completed sense.

§ 8. The Geave Accent.

I. The grave accent can only stand on the last syllable.

For rules respecting use of the grave accent see § 7. 7.

§ 9. The Circumflex Accent.

I. The circumflex accent can be placed on the last syl-

I lable, or, if the last is short, on the penult : in the former

* This may not be a scientific analysis of the proceiiB, but it is the

I clearest way of stating the result.

* There is no Optative.

H Modern Greek.

oase the word is called periepomen, in the latter properi-

spomen.

2. ro fx^\ov, the apple, becomes in the genitive rov htjXov;

the accent being changed from circumflex to acute, because

the last syllable is long.

3. It can never be placed on a short vowel.

4. If, when the penult is long by nature and the last

syllable short, the accent falls on the former, it must be

circumflex ; as, ro crafia.

§ 10. Special Bules for AccENTtTATiON.

The following rules, most of which are taken from Parry,

may assist the student in determining the position of the

accent :

—

{a) Oxytones are

Verbal substantives in n% ixos, rfip, rpis, rpos ; as, aeiafws.

Substantives in fig; as, (iacnXds, lirirds.

Uncompounded Adjectives in t6s, ikos, /xo'j, p6s, ^s, is; as,

pt}ToptK6s, (f)o^ep6s, tipevrjg, fjdus.

(b) Paroxytones are

Substantives in la ; as, 86Kip.aa-ia.

Diminutives (of three syllables) in lop, and in iotkos, /Xoir,

vXoyJ

as, veavioKos, iraiblov.

Adverbs in dw?, Ua, brjv, as, avr'iKa, (TvXkri^brjv, TroXXd/cts.

§ 11. "Words without an Accent.

All words are accented except the following, ten in

number.

The article 6, ^, ol, al, the.

The prepositions tU, in or into ; cV, in ; tK, out of.

The conjunctions d, if; wr, how, that.

The negative ov.

Enclitics.

§ 12. Enclitics.

T. Enclitics are words which throw their accent back on

to the preceding word.

2. The principal are /lov, /toi, /nf, /lar, o-ov, croi, o-e, orSr, mv,

rwy, Ti'y, Ttvor, rives, itoTi,

3. At the beginning of a sentence, they keep their accent,

4. "When the preceding word is accented on the last syl-

able, the accent of the enclitic is absorbed.

ffore )LQv. Never in my life.

6 (coXof /iov iraTTjp. My good father.

5. When the preceding word is paroxytone, a dissyllable

nclitic keeps its accent, while the accent of a monosyllable

£ absorbed.

at npa^ds aov. Your actions.

irpd^eis Tivfs. Some actions.

6. "When the preceding word is proparoxytone or pro-

lerispcmen, the accent of the enclitic is thrown on to the

ast syllable of the preceding word, and becomes acute. Ex.

TO [iddqixd fiov. My lesson.

TO (r!i>ixa fiov. My body.

7. If several enclitics follow one another, each throws its

iccent back on to the preceding one. Ex.

80s fioi TO. Give it me.

This at least is the rule in writing. In conversation a

jlreek would say 86s fioi to.

The following words are given as an exercise to be read

iloud. The greatest care must be taken to accentuate the

proper syllable. The student will be able to form some

lo Modern Greek.

idea how different the intonation of Modem Greek is from

that of Ancient Greek, as taught in England.

Aiytffdor, 'AXeâvbpos, 'Avriyovrf, 'Aaia, *A;(tXXevr.—Botwr/a,

Bopeas.—FajSpiJ^X, Tepfiavia.—AanoKKrjs, ArjfioKpiroi, Aioy/i/?;?.

—

Elpr]vr],''EixTrov<ra,'EiTi8avpos.—ZaKvvdos.—'MpaKKiji, 'Ux^ (Echo),

'H(rlo8os.—Qeava, Q(p.iaTOK\fjs, QeoKpiros, Qtjatvs, Qpaa-vôvXogi

QovuvbiSrii.—'ladpos, 'laoKpaTrjs, ^lavia.— Kakvyj/ô), Kf(paWT]viM

K;;0Kr<rdf, KiKfpayf (Cicero), KXfOTrarpa, K6piv6os, Kptova-a, Kv^(i

(Cybele).

—

AaoKocov, Af(ovi5at, AovKiavosy Avcrlnaxos.—MaiapSpa

MijSeia (Medea), M»jSia (Media).

—

âwiKaa, ^Tjptvs, NiKoS^juos,-

'OSvcraevs, '0\vp.TTia, "OXvp.nos, 'Op<pfis.—n.fKon6vvi](ros, UoXvKpt

TT]s.— Po86ni].—2dkap,is, SffxeXt], 2,ina>vidi)Sf SwKpaTjjr.

—

Teiptaia

TtjtioXe(oj», TuSeus.

—

'YaKivdos.

§ 13. Bbeathings.

1. There are two breathings,

(a) the rough breathing or aspirate (') Baatuu

(6) the smooth breathing (') -îkr).

2. Every vowel and diphthong at the beginning of a word

is written with a rough or smooth breathing.

3. In Modern Greek the rough breathing does not affect

the pronunciation^ of the word on which it is placed, al-

though when preceded by the prepositions dno, ini, vn6, Kara,

fifTa, etc., the final vowel being dropped, it changes the final

mute into the corresponding aspirate. (For examples see

par. 6.)

4. V (epsilon) and p (rho), at the beginning of a word, are

always written with the rough breathing. "When two ps

come together in one word, the former is written with

a smooth, the latter with a rough breathing.

^ Cf. Peile, p. 425.—

' Different as was the origin of h in the two lan-

guages (Greek and Latin), it is quite certain that the letter was rapidly

vanishing in each of them, at the classical period of their literature, or

even earlier.'

Declension of Nouns- It

5. p (rho) is the only consonant which is written with a

breathing.

EoTA Subscript.

The Eota Subscript is not pronounced. It indicates that

the vowel, under which it is placed, was formerly followed by

an eota.

The most ordinary cases in which it is written are the 2nd

and 3rd pers. sing, of the subjunctive {ya Xvi^s, va Xvj]), and the

dative singular of substantives and adjectives.

§ 14. Stops.

1. A full stop, TfXft'a (TTiyiif) (.), has the same force as in

English.

2. The ava Tf\(la ov fifar) anyfir] (') takes the place of our

colon and semi-colon.

3. The comma (wroo-rty^^) and note of exclamation (fVt-

^(our]fjLnTiKni>) are the same as in English.

4. A semi-colon (;) has the force of our point of inter-

rogation (JpUTtjfiaTlKOv).

§ 15. Thk Aeticle.

The definite article (r6 opiarriKov updpov), 6, fj, t6, the, is

declined as follows ;

—

12 Modern Greek.

There is no indefinite article {aopiarov apdpov) : its place is

Bometinies sui)plied by els, p.ia, eu, one, or tlie indefinite pronoun,

Ttf, ri. For example : a man, ds (or euas) wdpoiTtos or iivSpoy

TTOS TIS,

§ 16. Remaeks on the Declension of Nouns.

1. There are two numbers, the Singular and the PluralU

The Dual is no longer used.

2. The Dative is only used in writing. In conversation i

is generally replaced by the preposition us, with the Accusa

tive. Ex.

Adj TO fls rov Ki'piov, and not ra Kvpta.

3. The Genitive Plural of all Nouns ends in mv.

4. In Neuter Nouns, the Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative are the same, in each number. Ex.

Sing., Nom. Voc. Ace. $v\ov. Plural, Nom. Voc. Ace. ^v\a.

5. The lower classes drop v (Ne) at the end of a word

For example, they say, dia to 6(6, for God's sake, instead o;

5ia rov 6f6v : fls nj bv(TTv\ia, in misfortune, for etc T71

bv(rrv)(iav.

§ 17. SUBSTANTIVES.

I. Substantives {ovopLara oixriacniKa) can be classed in thre<

declensions^, viz., two parisyllabic, which do not increase

the genitive, and one imparisyllabic, which does.

The First Declension comprises Masculines in -as, -rjs.

Feminines in -a, -»;,

The Second „ „ Masc. and Fem. in -os, -ovs,

Neuter in -ov, -ow, -i{ov).

The Third „ „ All substantives which in.

crease in the Genitive.

' This claasificatioQ is adopted by the Greeks.

First Declension. ' 13

2. There is a supplementary Declension, used only in the

^;Mlken language, which is not included iu the above classifi-

cation.

3. There are three Genders: Masculine (dpafw/coV), Femi-

nine {6r\KvK6v), and Neuter (ov8tTfpov).

4. Masculine are the names for men who follow certain

professions or trades (o raixlas, the cashier, 6 paTTTTjs, the

tailor), all months, and, with a few exceptions, mountains

and rivers; substantives in eu?, av and first declensions in

ai, T]S,

5. Feminines are the names for women who follow certain

occupations (17 pdirrpia, the seamstress), all arts, handicrafts,

and sciences, the names of towns, trees, islands, and coun-

tries ; terminations in la and first declension in a, rj.

6. Neuter are the letters of the alpliabet, most diminutives,

and verbal substantives ; the second declension in ov and the

tliird declension in fj.a, i, v.

The above enumeration makes no pretence to be complete.

It could not be rendered so without very considerable en-

largement, which would only confuse the student.

§ 18. FiEST Declension.

The First Declension contains

Masculine nouns in os and rjs.

Feminine nouns in a and t].

I. 'O Taplat, the cashier.

Plural.

H Modern Greek.

Like ranias are

6 vfavias, the youDg man. 6 Aco;(Xtaf, the snail.

Some proper names in -as make the Genitive in -a instead

of -ov, as: 6 'hvaviui, 6 Qoifias, 6 Aovkos, k.t.X. (see 6.)

2. 'O iToKiTrjs, the citizen.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. 6 TTokiTTji

Gen. ToC TToXtVou (vernacu-

lar TToXtTIj)

Dat. TW TToKlTrj

Ace. TOI/ TToXlTTjV

VOC. O) TToXlTa

Like TToXiV;;? are

6 vovTj/s, the sailor.

6 TToiTjTTjs, the poet.

ot TToXtrai (vern. iroXtVatf)

rcoi' TToXtrwi*

Tois TToXiruif

rot's TToXiVar (vern. 77oXiTatr)

w rroXtrnt (vern. n-oXiVatiV

6 (caTTvoTTwXjjy, the tobacconii

6 vondpxrjs, the prefect.

3. 'H yXcoacra, the tongue or language.

Plural.Singular.

Nom. fj yXaxraa

Gen. TTJi yXoxrcn;? (yXfocro-ay)

Dat. rfj y\6)(T(TTj

Ace. Tiji/ y\u>(T<rav

VoC. (b yXwtro-a

Like yXwcrcra are

fj SaXacrtrn, the sea.

f) pi^a, the root.

at y\S)(r(rai. (yXcio-ffatj)

Tmj> •yXoxTO'wj'

TaT? yXaxTirais

ras y\a)(Tcras (rals yXaxraaisS

2i yXaxraat (yXoxrcratf),

fl TpdneCa, the table, the ban]

f] povaa, the Muse.

First Declension. 15

4. 'H Sipa, the hour,

Singular.

Noin. r} copa

Gen.

i6 Modern Greek,

Like 'Ejra/uftfwvSa? are

6 ECvâ-ydpay, Pythagoras. 6 'Arav/as, Ananias.

6 A<a)V(Saf, Leonidas.

§ 19. Kemarks on the First Declensiok.

1. Masculine nouns in T?;r, ttt;?, apxr]f, fierpris, 7ra>\r]t, a>VT]tf\

rpi^tjs, "karprjs, and the names of nationalities as Uiparii form

the vocative in a short.

Ex. Uepa-rjs, the Persian, Voc. Uepaa

vofjuip)^r]if the prefect, „ vop-apâ

î^\umd>XT}s, the bookseller, „ i3t/3X»o7rcoXa.

2. In the vernacular all Feminine Substantives of this

declension, in a, form the Genitive in ay. In writing, this

is only done when the final a of the nominative is preceded

by p or a vowel.

3. The Genitive Plural of words of the first declensio^

has a Circumflex Accent on the last syllable. Ex.

Kairvo7ra>\S>v, of the tobacconists. The only exceptions ar

feminine adjectives, of which the masculine ends in or, ar

is paroxytone, proparoxytone, or properispomenon. Ex.

ayios, fj <5yia, Gen. Plur. rav dyia>v.

4. All parisyllabic oxytones take a circumflex in thj

Genitive and Dative.

5. In words like S>pa, j3t^Xio;ra)X»jf, 'Errafieivwvbas, althoug|

the last syllable but one is a long o, it can only take an acut

accent, not a circumflex, because the last syllable is long. Ti\

those cases however where the final syllable is short, it takes

a circumflex : e. g. Nom. Plur. ai apai, ol î^XionSAai. Simi-

larly 6 iro\iTT}s, the citizen, has in Nom. Plur. ol TroXlrai.

6. The Dative Plural originally ended in -aia-i in the first

declension and -oia-i in the second. These forms are found in

poetry, and in Ionic prose.

First Declension. 17

7. The vulgar form of the Accusative Plural

—

rats fidât?

'or TOff boâs—is Aeolic and an acknowledged archaism. It

vas originally racr boâvs. The old v has been dropped, and

he vowel consequently modified.

Vocabulary.

le cheated, rjnaTri<Tf (arraTw).

vas, T)To (fifmi).

le accused, tKaTrjyoprâe (Karrf-

yopaj).

hey do, Kafivow ((cd/iyw), TVfpi-

iroiovv (irfpiTToiS)).

e, she, it is; they are, tlvoL

they asked, fC^rrjcrav {Cvâ>).

between us, ptTa^v pas.

it has been dissolved (broken),

he became, tyeivt (yipofmi),

he has not spoken, bev a>pi-

. XjjcTf (6pi\S>).

for the last hour, irpo pias apas.

Exercise ^

FiEST Declension. iipqth KA1212.

^he cashier has cheated the *0 raplas fjira-njcre t6v TvoKirqv,

citizen,

'he language of Ananias was 'H yKCxrcra rov 'Avavia tjto

false. "^(vbrfs.

ilence more often arises H a-uonf} Trpoepxerai avxporepa

from stupidity than from « ttjs fiXoKtias ^ eK ttjs <to-

wisdom. (}>ics.

'he prefect accused the book- 'o vopdpxrjt fKaTtjyoprjae rov 0t-

seller. ^\iorna\r]v.

irtues do honour to a man. At aptTai irtpinoiovv Tipfjv ds

Tov avOpoiirov.

J\\&i is the price of that Hoia ttvai f) npf] rov î^Xioi,

book 1 rovTov

;

he country is very barren. 'H x'^P'^ eivai ttoXv Syovos,

^ After once reading through the exercise, the student should cover

e Greek, while he translates the English, and vice versd.

Modem Greek.

How loud the voice of Epa*

minondas is

!

The sailors asked the way to

the tobacconist's.

The bank is closed on fete

days.

The sea is a good subject for

a poet.

The agreement between us

was broken.

The memory of that boy is

wonderful.

The hair of Pythagoras turned

white.

Tioaov bwarrj tivai f} (fiavfi rov

'Enafitiva>t'8a !

01 vavrai t^rjTrjaau tov Spofiov

npos TOV Kairyonmkov,

'H rpdne^a fivai KXtiarf] rat

iopras,

'H 6a\a(T(ra (luai KoXof ai^t-

KflfltVOV bia TOV TTOITITTIV.

H fifra^v pas avfjKfxovia tit-

Xvdrj.

*H pvrpiT) avrov tov iTai8iov

fivai BavpafTia.

'H Kopri TOV Uv&ayopa tytivf

§ 20. Second Declension.

The Second Declension contains

Masculine and Feminine Nouns in or. ovt.

Neuter Nouns in ov, ow, and t{ov).

I. 'o avdpamos, the man.

Singular.

Nom. o avdpamos

Gen. TOV avQpaynov

Dat. TW avdpa>ir<f

Acc. TOV avBpatitov

Voc. S avQpamt

Plural.

Like avdpanos are

6 vnrovpyos, the minister,

6 d8t\(f>6s, the brother.

6 irokepoi, the war.

6 avtpos, the wind.

6 ai8i]pos, the iron.

0(

Second Declension. 19

2. 'H 6io9, the road.

Singular.

20 Modern Greek.

3. These words have no diminutive force in ordinary use*.

4. When two syllables are bound together by the syni-

zesis, as in x"P'^i2. the first is pronounced very short, the

second with raised tone and a strong accent.

4. To x^pi"'? the paper.

Singular.

Second Declension. ai

3? Modern Greek.

Exercise.

Second Declension.

He is a man esteemed by the

people.

That man has a clever (wide-

awake) face.

He died of disease of the heart.

Put the roses in the glass.

They often go out shooting

(or hunting).

Iron and lead are the only

metals found in the coun-

try.

Give me some peaches and a

fig.

New year's gifts are generally

useless.

The ship is small;you will

not enjoy the passage.

Go up that street.

You must go straight up the

hill.

Bring me the keys.

Are there any birds about

here %

The current of the stream is

very strong.

The departure of the boat

was delayed.

He has a superior mind.

The crafty man met with his

match.

AEYTEPA KAI2I2.

£(t"7( avdpconos Tifxtafifvos vno

Tov \aov,

O avSpcoTTos ovros ej^fi f^vnvov

TrpocrioiTOP,

Anedavfv dno KnpSiaKfjv vocrov,

BaXf TO. pooa els to norrjpiov.

llrjyaivovv av\va fls ro Kvvrjyiov.

O (rLhrjpos KCLi 6 fiokv^Sos tivat ra

fiova p.fTaWa, ra onoia (irov)

ivpi(TK0VTai (Is rov ronov,

Aos poi (^fiov, fif) oXiya po8aKiva

Koi (V crvKov.

Ta 8S)pa TOV veov erovs (u>ai eV

ytVft (i)^pT](rTa.

To Tr\olov etvai fiiKpnv' Set/ 6a

fv\api(TTT]drjTf fls TO Taêiîov,

Ava^rJTe ttjv obbv Tavrrjv (rov

8p6fJLOV TOXJTOv).

TLpinft va apa^rJTt kot rvOfla

TOP \Q<pov (pa TTOTt lata (r-dvi

fls TO ôvvof.

*<pe ftoi (/[lou, fit) ra ickfiBid.

'Ynapxavcri TTTrjva e8S> jrtpi^;

O povg TOV jrora/toC tlvai jroX

opprjTtKos.

O aTTonXovs tov jrXot'ou efipddw

{^pyr]<re).

'Exd eKTOKTOP VOVP.

'O Kpvy\ripovs (navovpyos) evpt to

op,oi6p TOV (to Vaipi Tov\

Simple Nouns. as

§ 23. Third Declension-.

The Third Declension contains all nouns which increase

the number of their syllables in the genitive.

Terminations a, t, v, w, ^, p,' o-, v, ^.

Nouns of this declension can be divided into two large

classes, Simple and Contracted.

§ 24. Simple or Uncontbacted Nouns,

I. 'o ayitv, the contest.

Singular.

24 Modern Greek.

3. '0 piJTWp,

Simple

26 Modern Greek.

6 kXjjtt/p,

i] v6$,

6 rpiTTovs,

6 ^pcos,

f) 'EXXar,

6 Xifirjv,

6 yiyas,

fi XalXa^,

the policeman,

the night,

the tripod,

the hero,

Greece,

Salamis,

the harbour,

the giant,

the tempest,

the grace (favour).

Gen. Tov kXtjttjpos.

„ Trjs VVKTOi,

,, Tov Tp'mobos,

„ TOV ffpaos.

„ Tr)s 'EXXdSov.

„ Trfs "SfoKapivos.

,, TOV XlfXtVOS.

,, TOV yvyavTQs,

,, Tr]S XaiXaTToy,

„ T?is X^P'^'^os,

ACC. TTjV X'V*"'

§ 25. Remarks on Uncontracted Nouns of the

Third Declension.

1. The common language changes the termination of the

Nominative in this Declension. Thus, with Masculine words

the Accusative Plural form is used for the Nominative Singu-

lar, and the Singular declined after the modern Supplementary

Declension. The Plural is regular. "With Feminine words

the Accusative Singular form is used for the Nominative. The

other cases are regular. Ex. 6 aytbvas, 6 alavas, 6 Saifioms,

6 yfiTovas, f) eiKova, 6 apxovras, fj (ToKmyya, t} eXniSa, fj narpiSa,

1} EXXaSa, t] f/3So/xa5a, f] i>pai6Tr)Ta, etc.

2. The Stem of Substantives of the Third Declension ma;

generally be found by cutting off the termination -os froi

the Genitive. Ex. Xtav, a lion; Gen. Xt'ow-os, Stem, Xtovi

yiyas, a giant ; Gen. ylyavr-os, Stem, yiyavr}

3. The accent remains on the same syllable in all cases,

the quantity of the last syllable allows it. In the Genitiv<

* (Ovos a nation, gen. iQvtos. Stem idve. If the stem ends witl

a consonant, the word is uucoutrsKted ; if it ends with a vowel, it ugenerally contracted.

Contracted Nouns of the Third Declension. 27

Plural the final syllable is long, so that the accent cannot be

iirtlier back than the penult. Ex. npayiia, Gen. Trpdy/xarof,

jlen. Plur. npayfiaTuv.

4. Monosyllables are accented on the last syllable, with a

ii cumflex if it is long, and with an acute if it is short.

5. The S, T, and v sounds are discarded before <ti, in the

Dative Plural.

Ex. Dat. Sing, \afind8i, Dat. Plur. Xafxnaa-i.

„ Xififpi „ Xi/x/<rt.

6. V (Ne) is added to the Dative Plural for euphony when-

ever the following word begins with a vowels

7. The Accusative Singular of all Masculine and Feminine

N^ouns originally ended in -v. This was pronounced after

Consonant Stems by inserting a ; as, 'Xeovr-a-p. In the Plural

;his termination was -vs ; as, Xtovr-a-vs,

§ 26. CONTEACTED NoUNS Or THE ThIBD

Declension.

Several nouns of the third declension are called contracted

because in one or more cases the final vowel of the root and

the vowel of the termination are contracted into one syllable.

They may be divided into three classes.

First Class.

llasc. in »7ff ) --

_ . f bren. ovs,rem. in <u, a>s J

Neut. in 09, ts Gen. ovs.

' Cf. Quintilian, xii. lo. 31, 'Grseci n literam jucundam et in fine

pnecipue quasi tinnientem ponunt.*

28 Modern Greek.

I. 'O ilXij^ijr, the true man.

Singular.

Nom. 6 a\r]6r)s

Gren. Tov (a\r]deos) aXrjSovs

Dat. TW (a\r)6u) aXrjdfl

AcC. TOV (^dXTjOfo) aXtjdi]

Voc. S) d\r]dis

Plural.

ol (a\r]6((s) aXrjdds -,

Tuv (a\T]6€a)v\ aXrjdiov 11

Tois akr]6i(Ti

rovi (aXrjdfai) aXrjdtls

Like dikrjOrjt are declined all proper names ending in (l>dvr)s,

yfvrjs, KpaTTjs, firjbrjs, TTT]6r]s, aOfvrjs, (cXtj;?, and all adjectlves which

form the masculine and feminine in jjs, as

6 'Apt(rTo(})avr]s, Aristophanes.

6 Aioyivrfs, Diogenes.

6 'iTrrroKpdTTjs, Hippocrates.

6 'Apxiiirjbi]s, Archimedes.

6 ATipotrdfyTfe, Demosthenes

6 fVTvxhs, the happy man.

6 ^(vStjs, the false man.

6 fyKpar^s, the temperate man.

Attention should be given to the accentuation of the voca-

tive of these proper names

—

2> Aioyeva, 2>'Apxip.rj8fs, etc.

'O 'UpaKkTjg {-kX(t]s) is declined somewhat differently : Gen.

TOW 'HpoKkfovs, Dat. T^ 'HpoKkf'i, Acc. TOV 'H/jokX^, Voc. S> 'Hpd'

KXetf.

Like 6 'HpoKk^s are declined 6 HfpiicKrjs, AapioKK^s, etc.

2. *H f]x^, the echo.

Singular.

Contracted Nouns of the Third Declenstott. 29

3. To iOvosy the nation.

30 Modern Greek,

Like nokii are

{] npa^is, the act or practice.

^ nioTis, the faith.

17 v/Sptf, the insult.

i) Kiptja-ts, the movement.

3. tA aoTv, the city.

Singular.

Nom. TO aarv

Gen. Tov aartos

Dat. Tw atrTet

ACC. TO aiTTV

Voc. « ao-7-w

ra

tQ>v

TOIS

Ta

Plural.

(na-Tfo.) aarr}

aarfotv

aOTfat

[aorta) aarrf

(aoTca^ atrrq.

Third Class.

Masc. in tvs, vs. Fem. in vt,

I. 'O Uptvs, the priest.

Singular.

Nom. 6

Gen. TOV

Dat. rw

Ace. TOV

Voc. i

lepevs

ieptms

Upfl

lepta

ifpev

0(

Teov

To'is

TOVS

fw

Plural.

{itptes) itpus

Upeav

Itpfvai

(Ifpeas) Itpfls

(tf/)«r) iepds.

Like Itpevs are

6 tjnrfvr, the horseman.

6 /Sao-iXewy, the king.

•6 yovevs, the parent.

6 Kovpds, the harber.

6 Trpaptvs, the pilot.

2. 'o t'x^vj, the fish.

Singular.

Nom. 6

Gen. TOV

Dat. r^

Ace. TOV

Voc. a

Ix^vs

Ix^vos

IxSvl

IxBvv

ixOv

0(

TtOV

To'lS

TOVS

Plural.

(IxQvfs) IxGvs

Ixdvuv

txdlKTl

(Ix^vas) Ix&vs

(Ix^vts) Ix^vs.

Contracted Nouns of the Third Declensiott. 31

Like IxBvs (vern. ro •<f«x/>t) are

6 /ivs ( f>o jtovTiKoi), the mouse.

17 o(^pvr ( „ TO </)pvSt), the eye-brow.

^ 8/jvs ( I, "7 /SaXowSta), the oak.

§ 27. There are several irregular

The following are the principal :

—

Nom.

nouns in common use.

Gen.

6 avr]p,

32 Modern Greek.

the syllable after the stem if it is short ; a circumflex if long.

The other cases are accented regularly.

§ 28. Remarks on Contracted Nouns of the

Thied Declension. IFirst Class. Feminines form the plural like the Second

Declension. Ex. at r]^o\..

All words of this Class have a circumflex on the last syllable

in the Genitive Plural. Ex. rav fjxav.

Words of the Second Class form an exception to the general

rules on accents. Those which are not accented on the last

syllable in the Nominative are accented on the antepenulti-

mate in the Genitive, although the ultimate is long. Ex. rod

Third Class. Substantives in evs form the Accusative it

ta, and are oxytone in the Nominative. Ex. 6 ^aaiXfvs, ra

/Sao'tXeo.

§ 29. Supplementary Declension.

This Declension is only used in the spoken language : it if

composed of nouns which increase in the Plural but not il

the oblique cases of the Singular.

I. 'O nanas, the priest.

Singular.

Contracted Nouns of the Third Declension. 33

2. 'O Ka(/)ef, the coffee.

Singular.

34 Modern Greek.

§ 31. Patronymics.

Patronymics are formed by adding -ahrjs or -tSijs to tl

stem : as, *I&)uw»;f, John ; 'iwawi'Sijf, John's son.

They are also formed by adding the termination ttoCXo

(anc. TT&iXos) : as, KoKoytpos, a monk (of the Greek Church)]

KakoyeponovKoi, son of a monk.

The prefix natra before a name indicates that the person

descended from a iranca, or priest ; as, o Kvpios UairabTjfiTjTpaKd

TTovXos, Mr. P., the son of little DemStrS, the son of the monl

Before the Revolution surnames were seldom used by tl

Greeks. If it was necessary to distinguish between tw|

persons of the same Christian name, it was done by addii

the name of their father or of their native town. Ex. 6 'ladw

6 *AXxt/3*dSou, for 6 vlos toO 'AXxtjStdSov, John the son

Alcibiades.

The surname of a man is used in apposition to his title]

as, 6 Kvpios Uap8a\6s, Mr. Pardalus ; but the surname of

married woman is put in the Genitive ; as, ij Kvpla IlapSaXo^

Mrs. Pardalus (lit. the lady of Pardalus).

Vocabulary.

the last century, ^ TrapeKdovaa

fKaTovTamjpis (o TrapeXOav

alatpj.

did you see ? ttStrt ; (^X«V»).

you forgot to order, fKrja-no-

vr)<T(s (XtjaiJiovai) va rrapay-

yfiKjjs (napayytXKa))

.

he announced, dvrjyyfiXf (dvay-

yeXXo)).

he agreed, crvv^vtaev (^a-waivSt).

he was caught, <Tvvfkri<p6ri {avK-

Xa/ijSdco)).

in the act, iv r^ irpd^ei, orL.

avro(f)a>p(o. 11

escaped, bi.e(pvye (8ia(f)tvya)).

that I may put, va Btra {6fTco,

mod. form of ridrjfu).

she gave, edcoKfv (8iSq>, mod.

form of Si'Sw/xi).

did he complain? Traperroveiro

(jrapanovoifiai^;

he felt pain, inovti, rjo-Odvero

TTOvov (novS), aladdvofuti).

Patronymics. zs

Exercise.

Third and Supplementary

Declensions.

The policeman was the hero

of the contest.

The beauty of night in Greece

is remarkable.

A Greek has always hope for

his country.

l]iirke was an orator of the

last century.

The act was honourable and

brave.

Did you see the fine oak on

the mountain ?

\\)u forgot to order the

coal.

Tlie herald announced their

approach to the guard.

The wall (of the city) is not

well built.

He was caught in the act.

^Xot a word escaped his lips.

\ They have great faith in that

( remedy.

i The master has asked for two

cups of coffee.

KXtVctr.

'O kKtjttjp ^to 6 rjpcts Tov dy«-

*H apaioTTji TTJs vvktos eV 'EXXdSt

(ivai dîoaTjfxdaiTos.

'O "EWrjv TrdvTOTf €^(i eXmSa

8id Trjv narpiba tov,

'O Bovp/ce rjTO pr]T<op T^? TrapeX-

6oi<Tr]s (KarovrafTrjpidos.

'H TTpdîs ^To epTiftos Koi yfv-

vala.

EiSfreT^v (opalav opvv{jr)v tvpiop-

cf)T}v âXaviSiav) fTrlrov opousj

'E\r]<TiJ.6vi](T(s vaTTapayyeiKrjs tovs

avdpaKas (ra Kapôvva^.

'O KTJpv^ dvfjyyeiXe ttjv npoaiy-

yitriv TCiv eir tov (f)vXaKa,

To Telx°^ ^ ^^^ ^^"^'^ 'fa^« i^î-

(Tfiivov.

^vvekri<p6r) iv Trj npa^fi (Jn ai-

TO(}>d)pa).

OvSfpia Xeîs 8ie(pxry(v eK rav

X(I-X.(U>V TOV.

E\ovp TroXkrjv TTfnoidrjaiv tls

TTju dtpaiTdav TuvTrfv.

'O otKoSfcTTTOTTyr (6 «'<^cWijr) €^17-

njo-c bvo Ka(j>€8fs.

* The wall of a city is to tuxos, 3rd decl. : the wall of a house 6' roixoi, 2nd decl.

P 3

36 Modern Greek.

The shoemaker wastes his 'O vnobrjiJiaTOTroibs (iranovra-rji)

time in reading country p^avft t6v Koipdv tov dvayiva.

newspapers. aKav ras iirapxuiKas tcjirjiK-

piSas.

He complained of a pain in Uapfnovelro on to ydi/u tov

his knee. iirovei.

§ 32. ADJECTIVES.

^'EiridtTa,

1. Adjectives may be divided into three classes

:

(a) of three terminations {jptKaTaKriKTa), one for Mascu-

line, one for Feminine, one for Neuter.

(6) of two terminations {biKaraKr]KTa), one for Masculine

and Feminine, another for Neuter.

(c) of one termination (jiovoKaraKr^Kra), for all genders.

2. The Adjective agrees with its Substantive in NumberGender, and Case.

3. Adjectives are declined according to one of the fore^l

going Declensions.

A.

Adjectives with three terminations are declined after the

subjoined types.

Nom. Gen.

KoKos, -fi, -6v, -ov, -ijs, -ov, good.

BiKaios, -a, -ov, -ov, -ay, -ov, just.

Xpva-ovs, -fj, -ovv, -ov, -rjs, -ov, golden.

dpyvpovs, -a, -ovv, -ov, -as, -ov, silvery.

o^vs, -f'la, -V, -f'os, -das, -€os, sharp.

XapUis, -eaa-a, -tv, -evros, -fora-rjs, -tvros, charming or graceful.

Tras, naaa, nav, navros, ndcrrjs, navros, all.

liiXas, -aiva, -av, -avos, -aivrjs, -avos, black.

Adjectives. 2t1

The full declension of xaXo's-, -^j, -oy, and o^ur, -(In, -i5, is as

follows :

—

Singular.

38 Modern Greek.

B.

§ 33. Adjectives with Two Terminations.

To this class belong nearly all Adjectives compounded of

two words, such as fâiperos {f$ -atpw), excellent, Fem. eâi-

peros, Neut. (âiperov ; fmpovos, fnifiovos, eTTtfxovov (eVi -fitvod),

persevering; all adjectives in ijs (for declension see § 26, i),

as akrjOrjs, a\r]6T]s, aiXrÔfs, true ; and a few in os, as ^dpâpos,

âpâpos, âpâpov, barbarous ; rja-vxos, rjavxos, rjavxov, quiet

;

»ci'/3SrjXoj, Ki^brjKos, Kij38T)\ov, false, sham ; wcfieXipos, a)0eXt/xoy,

bXpfXifxov, usefulJ

UKoXovdos, aKoXovdos, dicoXovdov, following.

I. 'Eâiperos, excellent.

Masculine and Feminine.

Singular.

M. F.

Nom. eâipfTOS

Gen. iâiptrov

Dat. iâiptra

Acc. fâiptTov

Voc. iâipfTf

N.

fâlpfTov

eâiperov

iâiptTot

eâiperov

iâipiTov

Plural.

M. P.

fûlpfTOl

fâiptTUV

fâtptTois

fâtpfTovs

tâipeTOi

N.

iâipera

eâiptTcov

fâiptTOis

fâipera

iâiptTa,

c.

§ 34. Adjectives with one termination for the Masculine

and Feminine without a Neuter are few in number. Theyare declined after the Third Declension.

6 Kai t] aptra^, usurper ; Gen. tov kcli Tr^s apirayos.

6 Koi f] /3Xa^, stupid

;

Gen. tov km riJ! /3Aa*cof.

6 Koi f} (f)vyds, fugitive ; Gen. tov koI t^s (pvyddos.

Adjectives. 39

§ 35. Ireegulab Adjectives.

The three following Adjectives are irregular :

—

I. Meyar, great.

Singular.

M.

40 Modern Greek.

Coinpartson of AdjcctiveS' 41

Iceding syllable is short; and the Superlative by changing

ithe terminations to maroi, orarr], orarov, if the preceding

syllable is long ; or araros, (OTaTrj, ararov, if the preceding

syllable is short : Ex. bUaios, just, SiKaiortpos, diKaioTaros;

C0(f)6s, wise, <TO(j)WTfpOS, (TO(f>a>TaTOS.

2. Adjectives in vs form the Comparative and Super-

lative in vTtpos and vtgtos : Ex. BadvSf deep, fiadCrfpos,

1 3. Those in >;? and <*s form the Comparative and Superla-

i tive in toTtpos and fararos : Ex. ciXo/Sijr, devout, eiXa^eartpos,

I

«wAa/3t(rraTos ; xapieis, graceful, xa/'»«<'"'"«por> x^P**''''"'"'****

4. Those in av form the Comparative and Superlative

in ovfOTtpos and ovfararos '. Ex. aa(f)pu>Pf prudent, aaxppov

€(TT(pos, aaxppovforaTos.

I

§ 38. The Comparative is also formed by adding 7rX/oi»

Ior paKXov (more), before the Positive : Ex. anpot, dishonour-

I able, comp. 7rX/oi» anpot, more dishonourable ; tlxapicrroi,

pleasant, comp. TrX/oj/ (vxapta-ros, more pleasant ; and the

Superlative by placing the definite article before the Com-

parative, as raxvs, swift, COmp. TaxOrtpos, SUperl. 6 raxireposy

the swiftest ; anpos, dishonourable, comp. jrXe'oi; anpos, superl.

6 n\tov aripos, the most dishonourable.

Remark.—This form of the Superlative, viz. the Compara-

tive with the definite article, is the one usually employed in

the vernacular.

f 39. The following Adjectives form the Comparative or

Superlative irregularly. Examples :

—

POS.

XfttTTOS.

42 Modern Greek.

POS. COMP. SUPEIOi.

/if'yar, large, fieydXtirfpos, /i/yioroj.

noXvs, much, < ^^'oTtpos,

1

^^Î [TrepKraorepos), J

(f)tXos, dear, îkrepos, ^tXraro?.

oXt'yof, little, oXtytoTfpor, oXtytoroj and iXdxiOTos.

(TTfvos, narrow, arevorepos, orei/orarof.

The Comparative and Superlative are followed by the

Genitive : Ex. 6 ao(})6s eivai 6 tibaifiovfarepoi, or -raros oKwv

rav dvOpoynmv, the Wise man is the happiest of mankind;but napd, or dno with the Accusative, is more generally used

in conversation : Ex. eivai nXiov evxdpia-Tov «V ras ÂBTjvas mipa

els TOP Unpaid, it is more pleasant at Athens than at the

Piraeus ; flade l^rlKoTfpos dno rbv Btiov (ras, you are taller than

your uncle.

§ 40. Adverbs formed from Adjectives'.

Some Adverbs of Manner and of Kind are formed by add-

ing -as to the stem of the Adjective. Ex.

Stem. Adverb.

&n\ovs, simple, djrX- ait\a>i,

a-axppcov, prudent, aa^pov- <Ta>(j)p6vas.

The Comparative of this class of Adverbs is the same as

the Neuter Singular of the Comparative Adjective ; and the

Superlative as the Neuter Plural of the Superlative.

In the spoken language the Neuter Plural is also used for

the Positive and for the Comparative Adverb. Ex.

fieâims, or ^tâui, certainly. Comp. êâiorepov or /Se-

fiaioTtpa. Superl. ^tâioTara,

* For other Adverbs, see § 85.

Adjectives. 43

indisposed, aSta^fro?.

disposed, Siartdfi^tvos (6ta

OfTCo).

the Piraeus, 6 Ilfipateiis.

witty, (v(}>VT]s, TTViVfiaTadrji.

customary, <jvvi]6rjs.

cross, dvfxwfiivos.

Vocabulary.

blue, Kvavovs (fJLa^Ci).

the railway, 6 cnbTipoBpojios.

the company, fj iraipia.

per cent., rdls (Karov.

yearly, per annum, kut eror.

was published, (drjixoaieCdr]

Exercise.

Adjectives.

What a big ship that is ! Ti (xeytiko {noaov fêya) n\oiov

aval I

The fruit is small this year ; Ai dnapat (ra onapiKo) dvitt

last year it was larger.

A short time ago.

What bad weather we are

having.

It is simpler so.

He was very ill.

She was indisposed.

I am not disposed to do it.

Time is the best counsellor.

Most of them came late.

/xiKpai f<peTOs (to eros to{/to)*

irtpvaiv tjaav fxtyaXfiTfpai.

Upo oXiyov Kaipov.

Ti aaxjipov Kaipov eôjxev.

Etfot dnXovoTfpov ovras (tTcri).

'Hto TToXii dadevTji.

Hto dbiddfTOS.

Afv tiftai diaTfdeifiivos va to

KUflU}.

'O ;(pofos flvai 6 KaXXtTcpos

<Tvpôv\os.

Ot TTfpKTaoTfpoi q\9ov dpyd.

Athens has 70,000 inhabit- Ai 'ABrjvai txow cjSSo/x^wa x'

ants. XtdSa? KaTo'.KCiiv.

The Piraeus has 24,000 in- 'O Uetpaifvs fxî fUoai Ttaaa-

habitants. pas x»X«a8as KaTo'iKwv.

II was bought for three francs. 'Hyopaa^jj Sta rpla cf)pdyKa.

44 Modern Greek.

What a thin skin this orange

has.

That young man is stupid.

He is rather witty than

wise.

It is not usual for her to be

so cross.

They are worthy people, but

very simple.

Tlie railway company from

Athens to the Piraeus pays

1 2 per cent, per annum.

The monthly balance-sheet

was published yesterday.

Tt \tTTTov (})\oiov Iri •^ikr]{v\

<}>\ov8a{v) ) e}((i TO Tropro-

KaWiov TovTO,

'O veos ovTos (ivai fuop6s OXd|),

£(cat fiaXkov fv(j}v^s ^ <T0<f}6s.

Afv (Tvv€i6i((i va Tjvai t6(to»

dvft,a)fJL€VT].

Eivai d^iOTiixoi ai>6pa>noi dXXd

TToXii dTrXot.

'H fTaip'ia Tov an 'A6rjva)V (is

Uftpma (Tibrjpodpopov TiKrjpovti

bcabtKa Tols (KUTov Kar' trot

(to €TOi),

'O fiTjvtalos icroXoyioytos c'd^/io*

The Numerals^ 45

§ 41. The Numerals.

Of the Cardinal Numbers i, 3, 4 and from 200 upwards

are declined. The rest are indeclinable.

All the Ordinal Numbers are declined like Adjectives.

I a

2)3'

3 7

48'

6r'

7r8,,'

9^10 C

11 (a

12 ti3'

13 '7

14.8'

15 le'

16 tr

17 'f18 t.;'

19 i&

20 k'

21 KO.

30 X'

40 /i'

50 v

60 f

{i

Cardinal.

«*? {tvai), fiia, )

(«"«) 3

SvoorSu6)(8i;«) tworpds, rpia three

five

six

seven

eight

nine

ten

eleven

twelve

1 trapa

tTrrd

oKra>

eVrca (eVvfo)

S(Ka

SuSeKa

SeAcarpelj {rpiaj thirteen

btKariacrapfs, -a fourteen

SfKanfiTf fifteen

8(Ka(^ sixteen

dtKafirrd seventeen

8(KaoKra> eighteen

hfKaevvia nineteen

( tiKoarifvas, -fiia

( -fv(a), kt\.

(rptaKovra or

fTpiavra

{rfacrapaKovra

1 or crapdvTa

^TTfVTTJICOVTa or

{(^rjKovra or

7 f^fjvra

sixth

seventh

Ordinal.

npaTos, -T], -ov first

dfvTepos, -a, -ov second

rpiTos, -rj, -ov third

TfTapros, -17, -ov fourth

TTffiTrrof, ktX, fifth

(KTOS

f^SoflOS

gySoo. (6yb6r,) l-.^^oyooov \ °

ej'(j')aroff ninth

StKUTos tenth

(vbfKaros eleventh

8o>8(KaTos twelfth

btKUTos rp'iTos thirteenth

dfKaros TfTapTos fourteenth

biKoros nffiTTTos fifteenth

beKUTOi (KTOS sixteenth

bfKaTos f^8ufios seventeenth

bfKaros oySoos eighteenth

SfAcarof ^^^(j/^aToJnineteenth

uKOdTos twentieth

(iKoarbs TTparos twenty-first

TpiaKOOTOS thirtieth

T€<T(rapaK0(TT6s fortieth

TrevTTjKocTTot fiftieth

i^rjKoaTos sixtieth

4^ Modern Greek.

70 o

80 tt'

90 y

100 p'

200 0-'

300 T

400 V

500 ^'

600 x'

800 w'

900 ~^

1,000 a

2,000 ;3

10,000 ,1

50,000 ,x

100,000 p

000,000

000,000

Ieighty

Cardinal.

G'^So^^^ovra or? ^^^^

ioydorjKovra or

\ ivvfvfiKOVTa OT ) . ,

< . - > ninety( fvvfvrjvra

^*'

encardi/

-at(aty), -a

TptaKotrtoi,

ai{ais), -a

I-at(ats), -a

\ -ai(ats), -a

\ -at(aij), -a

€7rra)co(rto»,

ai(«ts), -a

o»cra»cocrtot,

ai(aty), -a

\ fvveaKocrioi,

^ -ai(nts), -a

XtXiot,ot(a(s), -aone thousand8i;o xtXtaSes two thousand

one hundred

two hundred

"three hundred

[four hundred

>five hundred

>six hundred

> seven hundred

eight hundred

nine hundred

8fKa x«XtaSef ten thousand <

[fifty thousand -1

{rrfVTrjKovra

8(s

a hundredthousand

8vo tKarofifiipia two millions <

Ordinal.

f^bonrjKooTos seventieth

oyborjKooTos eightieth

fwevr]KO(TTOs

fKarooTos

SiaKoaiocTTos

ninetieth

one hundre

two hundre

TpiaKoaioaTos three hundi

TtrpaKocTioaTos four hundr(

nevTuKoaioaTos five hundrt

i^aKocnnoTos six hundred

iTTTaKocnoTTos seven hi

oKTaKoaLotTTos eight hi

ivvfaKocrioaTos nine hundrt

tidred

i

thousai

XtXtooTtJff one thousan

8io-x«Xtoo-7of two thousajs

SfKawcTYtXtocr- ) . .

,

^J- ten thousan

TOS

ntvrrjKOVTaKicr-

XlXtOOTOf

eKaTovTUKis x*- a hundred t

XiocTTos sandth

eKaTopfivptO'

(TTOS

^"^""""'^'^^^'Uwomilliont0(TTOS

)

jfifty

a millionth

In Greek the letters of the alphabet are used as figures.

The letters a-0 stand for the units, 1-9.

„ «-ir „ tens, 10-90.

V, p-w „ hundreds, 100-900.

I

Numeral Adverbs. 47

cif, Tpetf, recro-npef, one, three, four, are declined as follows :

Nom. cts (evas) /xt'a (/ita) Iv (fJ'a) T-pety, rpi'a reaaapfs, reaa-apa

(jren. evoff /^tas tVor rpiav rtcrcrapiav

Dat. evi /ita iv\ rpia\ retrcrapai

A.CC. eva fiiav ev («»'«). rpctr, rptia. Tftrcrapas, riatrapa.

SiaKoa-ioi, -ai, -a] x''^'°'> "'"i ""^j ^^^v are declined like the

lural of an adjective of three terminations ; at KfcpoKai

bioKoa-iav dvdpwirav amKonr^crav, the heads of two hundred men

were cut off; 7rapjjyyftX« Tpta^i^t'O- dvTLTVTra tov /3i)3Xiou, he

ordered three thousand copies of the book.

^^tXta; and (KUTopLfivpiov are substantives and are followed

in the written language by the Grenitive : Ex. TreWf x'^'«S*^f

TTparicoTav f]Xfia\(OTia-dt]a-av, five thousand soldiers were taken

prisouers ; iv fKarofifivpiov <f>pdyKo>v, a million francs. But in

conversation they are used as adjectives : rpels x'^'oSfs uv-

9pa)7rot, 3000 men.

The numbers tls, ev, «!, eVrd, tKarov, take the rough breath-

ing. Cp. Latin, sex, septem, centum, simplus. All others

commencing with a vowel take the smooth.

§ 42. NUMEBAL AdVEEBS.

Numeral adverbs are generally formed by changing the

:crmination of the Cardinal into qkis, but the first four num-

jcrs form an exception to this rule.

iirra^, Once.

Siy, twice.

rpis, three times.

rerpaKis, four times.

TTfinaKis, five times.

flKoa-QKis, twenty times.

fKaTovTiiKis, a hundred times.

XiXiaKis, a thousand times,

[But in each of these batclies there are nine figures and only eight letters,' ;hree letters which were originally in the alphabet but have fallen intoiisuse, are therefore made use of to supply the deficiency, viz.,

r', Stigma or Vau= 6 ; {', Koppa= 90 ; ~^', Sampi = 900.

( When used to represent the figures from 1-900 these letters take an' i,cute accent : to represent thousands they t^e a dash on the left side

i below the line. -.

48 Modern Greek.

Numeral adverbs are also expressed with the word 4>op

(vulgar ^oka, cf. Ital, volta), Ace. (^topav, Plur. ^opia, <popo

Ex. fiiav or fuai^v) (})opc'.{v), once ; 8v6 tpopas {(f)opali) twice

;

fha £Karo(i') (^lopais, I said it a hundred times.

§ 43. Pkoportional Numbers.

Proportional Numbers are formed from the Cardinal Nunbers by changing the termination into an\ovs, anXaaioi, bi

the first four numbers are formed from the Numeral Adverb

etKoo-oTrXour, flKoaranXacrtos,anXovs, single.

binXoxJs, 8in\d(j-ioi, double.

rpinXoiii, TpiirXda-ioi, triple.

TfTpanXovs, rerpanXaaios, quad-

ruple.

nfVTaivXovs, nfVTanXatTios, five

fold.

twenty fold.

fKarovranXovs, fKarovraTrXatrioi

a hundred fold.

thousand fold.

§ 44. Abstract Numbers.

Abstract Numbers are formed by changing the terminatic

of the Ordinal Number to as or a8a : as,

^ fiovas {fiovdba), the unit, is formed from /xowy, alon<

eingle.

ai ixovabes, the units.

f] 8vas or 8vd8a, the couple.

ai SfKaSes, the tens.

at fKarovrdSts, the hundreds.

17 8<o8eKds, ^ vToviiva, the dozen, and 1} dKoaas, or (iKocrapi

the score.

§ 45. Fractional Numbers.

'WfiKTVS, fiplaeia, rjpiav (vulgar fxicr-os, -fi, -6v), half. Ex. ij/iito

(jua-os) xpoyos, a half-year ; fipiafia {fjucrrj), &pa, half an hourj

Dates. 49

th fjfiKTv {fxta-6) fvi)s xpovov, ^las <opav, the half of a year, of an

hour. Mia &pa Ka\ fxia-f), an hour and a' half; evafitavs xpopoj,

a year and a half, yuaiuav &pa, an hour and a half.

The other Fractional Numbers are expressed by the defi-

nite Article and the neuter of the Ordinal Number, as,

T} bfKarr], the tithe.

8vo Tpira, two thirds.

Tpla TfTapTa, three fourths.

TO Tp'nov, the third.

ri rirapTov, the fourth.

TO btKOTov, the tenth.

H av^TjTrjaii Sit]pkf(Te 8vo wpas Koi fifiiaetaVf

The debate lasted two hours and a half.

iva 8vo or 8vo-8vo, two by two

or by twos.

dva T((T(rap(s, by fourS,

dva ftp, one by one.

Eemarks.—Per Cent, is expressed by the Dative ; as Five

per cent, per annum, mpTt roh eKarov kot ero? {to eros). Theailway pays 8 per cent., 6 aiBrjpoSpofios nXtjpovu okto) vols

Korov,

§ 46. Dates.

To express a date the cardinal numbers are used, those

hat are declinable being put in the neuter, as—In 1879,[is TO x«^«a OKTOKoaia f^8op.TjK0VTa ivvea. A longer form is also

raployed as— Kara to xiKioo-tov oKTOKoauxTTov f^SofiqKoarov (vva-

OV €TOS,

In speaking of the time, the substantives «pa, hour, and(Trr6v, minute, are generally left out. Ex. :

—

[VTiat o'clock is it ?

it is one, — two, — three

o'clock,

t is half-past five.

t is a quarter-past seven.

t is five minutes to ten.

-t five o'clock,

^efore noon.

i.fter noon.

Tt &pa fipai;

Eivat /it'a, 8uo, Tpetp, ac.t.X.

Eii/at nevre Koi paai].

Eivm cnra Koi Tfraprov.

Eivai 8(Ka napa irivTt (XiirraS.

Etf Tas trevre.

Upo fiearipi^piae,

Mera fitoTjfi^plav,

50 Modern Greek.

Seasons.

The four seasons of the year, ax rea-a-apts S>pai tov frnvv.

Spring, f] avoi^is, TO tap.

Summer, to. KoKoKoipi, to 6epos.

The

January, ^lavovapio^.

February, ^e^povapios.

March, MapTLos.

April, 'ATTpikios.

May, Maios.

June, 'lovvios.

On the fifteenth of July,

nepinriv 'lovXt'ov.

Autumn, to (l)6iv6napop.

Winter, 6 x"M''"'« •

Months.

July, 'loiiXtof.

August, Avyovaros.

September, ^fiTTfp3pios.

October, 'OKrci/Spioj.

November, Noep^pios.

December, /\fic4p^pios.

Eli Tus bfKaufvTi or ets r»ji/ SejtaTijv

The Days of the "Week.

Sunday, KvpiaKri.

Monday, Aeurepa.

Tuesday, TpiVr;.

Wednesday, TerdpTT).

Thursday, UfpnTrj.

Friday, Ilapaa-Kevr].

Saturday, So/S/SaTov.

Holidays.

Christmas, to. Xpia-Tovyewa.

New Year's Day, fj npoiTt] tov

fTOVi, TO VeOV (TOS.

Carnival, at dnoKpft^.

Lent, ij (jfa)<rapaKO(TT^.

Good Friday, f) Mfyakr] Ilap

(TKfVr].

Easter, t6 Ilacrxa, v Aapnpd.

The Holy Trinity, f] ayla Tpias.

St. George's Day, {f] fipipa)

TOV ayiov T((Opyiov,

Vocabulary.

the full moon, f/ 7rava-{\r]vos.

in full leaf, ivTf\a>s fjvdiapeva,

on the thirteenth, ttjv deKdrrjv

Tpirrjv.

the bathing, to \ovea6ai.

of the Protestants, tu>v Ata-

papTvpop,fvcov,

I

Dates. 51

Exercise.

• Tuesday is a day which the

Greeks regard as unlucky.

Last Wednesday we went to

Aegina.

Next Saturday there will be

a full-moon.

At Athens all the Sundays of

the Carnival are lively if

the day is fine.

iln Greece January is generally

bright and fine.

The trees are in full leaf by

the middle of March.

rhe Greek Easter is April

I -13 this year.

iJverybody in Athens spends

May-day in the country.

H TpiTTj (ivai fj^fpa, rfjv onoiap

01 EWrjvfs Oiapoiicnv us dno-

<f)pd8a.

Tr)v TtapikBovaav TtrdpTi]!) vtttj-

yaptv (la rfjv Aiyivav.

To epjôptvov 2o'/3/3aTOi' 6a ^vai

iravaeXrjvos.

Els Tas 'ABrjvas oXai at KvpiaKoi

T&v airSKpeco (ivai ûrjpai, iav

fj ^fitpa ^vai wpala,

O lavovapios iv 'EXXdSt fti'ai

crvvTjOais Xapnpos Kal apdlos.

Ta dfvdpa €ivai eWeXw? T]v6i,(Tptva

Kara to peaa rov MapTiov,

To 'EWijvikou UncTxn (Aa/i.7rpa)

TO fTos rovro flvat ttju I— 1

3

ÂnpiKiov.

ndvTfS fv 'ABfjvais hUpxovrai

{hidyovcTi) TTjv irpwTTjv Muiov

(Is T^V f$0)(TIV.

rune, July, and August are 'O 'lovvios, 6 'lovXtoy rat 6 Av-

intensely hot. yovaTos flvai acf)68pa Gtpfxol,

)ctober and November are 'o '0/cT&)/3ptoy Ka\ 6 Koep^pios

very pleasant,

.^he Protestant Church at-

tracts many spectators at

Christmas and Easter.

t is not customary to con-

f sider Wednesday as a half-

holiday.

[e was born on July 11,

fivat TToXxi (I'xdpiaToi.

H (KKKrfaia rSiv Aiafiaprvpo-

pevcov irpoaeXKVd noWovs

Gfaras to. XpiaTOvyevva /cat

TO Udaxâ,

Aev aval avvrjdna va Btatpaxn to

uTToytvpa T^t TfrdpTTjs cos

axoXdaipov.

'EyevvfjdTj Ttjv ivbeKaTrfv 'lovviov

£ 2

52 Modern Greek.

1852, and died on April

21, 1874.

I shall go down by the half-

past two train. It is only-

ten minutes to Phalerum

by rail, so that we can

come back to Athens by

the four o'clock train.

«if TO xiKux oKTaKoaia nt

TTjKovra 8vo (flio'v^) koi dm/Si'oxre TTju (iKO(TTi)v jrpwri]

'AnpiXiov (Is TO \i\ia okto

Koaia ejSSo/ijjKoira reaaapt

)(fias Tcov 8vo Koi fjjXKrda

fi. fi. Mfxpi- ^aXrjpov 8ia to

aiSTjpoSpofiov (ipai fi6vop S/d

XeTrrd, SxTTf Swapeda va fire

veXdupev els 'Adquas 8ia ri

&pLa^o(iTOi\elas toiv Tfcrardpa

II. fM.

§47. PRONOUNS.

The Pronouns may be divided into Substantive Pronouni

and Adjective Pronouns.

Substantive pronouns are: i. Personal, 2. Eeflexive, 3. R«

ciprocal.

Adjective Pronouns are : 4. Possessive, 5. Interrogativ(

6. Demonstrative, 7. Relative, 8. Indefinite. •

Substantive Pbonouns.

§ 48. I. Personal Pronouns.

First Person—^*Eyta, I.

Singular.

Nom. cyw

Gen. ffxov—pov

Dat. €p.oi—poi

Ace. fp-i—iii or ffxfva

Plural.

fjpiv \ pas.

fjpds]

Pronouns* hi

Nom.

54 Modern Greek.

Adjective Peonouns.

§ 51. 4. Possessive Pronouns.

The Possessive Pronouns are formed by the Genitiv

(abbreviated form) of the Personal Pronouns, placed after th

noun, and, if emphasis is to be expressed, by the addition

IbiKos, I81KT], IbiKov, which answers to the English ' own.'

Ex. My horse, to nKoyou ftov.

Whose horse did you ride 1 rlvos aXoyov InnexxraTe;

My own, to 18ik6v fiov.

How did you pay for it ? ITwr enXr^paxraTf Si' avro;

I paid for it with my own money, fnXrjpaaa /ixe to. Ibn

(xov ;(p)7/iara.

My garden, 6 ktjttos fiov, or, 6 18ik6s fiov kjjttos.

Our house, fj oiKia fias, or, f] ISikt] fias otKia.

Thy book, t6 ^i^Xiov a-ov, or, to 18ik6v <tov ^i^\iov.

Your hat, 6 jrtXds o-ay, or, 6 IhiKos acts mXos.

His letter, to ypdnfia Tov, or, to 18ik6v tov ypdfifjia.

Their ideas, at tSeat tiov, or, at IdiKai Tcov tSeai.

In writing, the Ancient Greek forms, tfios, <t6s, fjniTtp

vperepos are sometimes used.

Remark.—The article is used with Demonstrative an|

Possessive Pronouns, as—This good young man, airos 6 KoKi

vioi. Their possessions, to. KTrniara twv.

§ 52. 5. Interrogative Pronouns.

Two Interrogative Pronouns are used in Modern Greek,

(a) TiV, Ti, who, what (lit.).

(6) TToIoff, 770(a, ITo'lQV, who, wliat.

5^ Modern Greek,

I. QvTOi is declined as follows :

—

Singular.

Nom, ovToy, avTT], rovTO

Gen, TOVTOV, Tavrrjs, tovtov

Dat. rovT(o, Tairr), Tovrto

AcC. ToxiTov, ravrqv, tovto

Plural.

ovrot, avrai, ravra

TOVTdV

TovTois, ravrais, roirrots

TovTovs, ravTas, Taira,

2. Êkuvos is declined regularly.

§ 54. 7. Relative Pronouns.

There are two Relative, just as there are two Interroga-

tive Pronouns, one used in literary style, the other in common

language :

—

(a) o(ms, fJTis, o, ti, who, which (lit.).

(6) onolos, oTToia, onoiov, who, which (common).

Nom.

Singular.

0(TTIS, ^TIS, 0,TI

Gen. ovTivos, ârivos, ovtivos

Dat. OJTtl't, JJTIVI, (drtCt

Ace. ovTiva^ {jvTiva^ o,Ti

Plural.

oiTivfs, alrivfs, ariva

olarTKTi, aloTKTi, oiaruri

ovarivaSf darivas, driva.

Nom,

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Plural.

6noioi, ondlaif ottoui

onoiois, onolais, oiroiois

OTTOIOVS, OTToiaS, OTTOia,

Singular.

OTTotoy, onoia, onoiov

OTToiov, OTToiay, onoiov

onoLO), onola, onoia

ono'iov, onoiav, onoiov

The Ancient Relative, or, rj, 5, is used rarely even

writing.

The people use 6nov and noi for all cases of the Relative

Pronoun.

Ex. The child that cries, t6 naiBl noD Kkaiti. I receive(

the book you sent me, tXafia t6 îlUXiov nov ix fcrrfikft.

Pronouns. $7

(TTis, TfTit, o,

^^

I

g^^^^^I

^jjosoever, whatsoever,'Orroiof, onoia, onoiov

| J

are declined regularly as above.

Ex. Whoever does it will be punished, oariabfjTroTt or onoiocr-

8t]iroT€ TO KdfjLvti 6a Tinapqdrj. Come at whatever hour you

like, (\6f (*^") *** onoiavSrjTTOTe &pav d(\(ts,

3. Tocror, 17, ov, as much.

'Oaos, t), ov, as.

Ex. I bring you as much money as you gave me, (ras ^«p(a

ToVa xpfjjjiaTa oaa (lov fdwaare.

§ 55. 8. Indefinite Pronouns.

I. Ttf, Interrogative, is accented with an acute and is

paroxytone in the two-syllable cases throughout. Tu, In-

definite, is accented on the last syllable and is enclitic It

is declined as follows :

—

Singular.

Nom. t\s Ti

Gen. Tivhs

Dat. Tiv\

Ace. Tiva tI

Plural.

Tives Tiva

TivS>v

Tivas TWO,

Strengthened by the addition of kSv •

Kciv Tis, someone, anyone.

KoTi, something.

Bos ixoi {fiov) KOTi Ti va (j)dy(o, give me something to eat.

2. "AXXor, aXXt], aXXo, the other or next ; frtpus, irepa, hfpov,

the other of two, are declined regularly.

Ex. The other party, t6 a\\o Koppa,

Next month, tov SKKov prjva.

The one—the other, 6 els—6 trfpos.

3. "OXos, 17, ov, all or every, is declined regularly.

Ex. All agreed, oXot orvv((pciiVT}<Tav.

Plural.

Toinvroi, ToiavTM, Toiavra

TOIOVTOJV

ToiovTois, Toiavrais, toiovtois

ToiovTovs, Toiavras, Toiavra.

58 Modern Greek.

4. MfpjKot', at, a, some, a few.

Ex. Some went away and some stayed, fiepiKoi ei^uyov koI

fitpiKoi fjifivav,

5. Kdnoios, a, ov, some one.

Ex. Some one told it me, Kairoios not to ffTTf.

6. Ka/iTTotrof, r], ov, a good number, a good deal.

Ex. There were a good many people at the concert, ^ro

KdfiTTOO'os Koafios fls Ti)v (TVvavXiav.

'J.ToiovTos, Toiavrr}, toiovtov, such a one, IS declined as

follows :

—

Singular.

N. roiovTOs, ToiavTT], roiovrofv^

G. roiovrov, ToiauTTjs, roiovrov

D. Toiovrco, ToiavTi], ToiovTa

A. TOIOVTOP, TOiaVTtjV, TOlOVTo(v)

The common form is rtToios, rtToia, Thoiov, declined regu

larly.

Ex. It is impossible to work with such tools, tlvai dSCvau

va epyaaOfi ris /ue Toiavra or Teroia ipyaKila,

8. 'O cStos, o, ov, \ ,, ^ ^„^„, , , / , (

the same.o avTos, 7], o, )

Ex. He died the same day, dneffave TfjV IBiav or rfiv airi

Tjpepav. Come at the same hour to-morrow, A^e ttjv Idiav

T^v avTr}v Sipav avpiov. I went myself, virrfya 6 iStoy.

9. TtVoTf, anything or nothing.

Ex. Have you bought anything] 'Hyo'pacray nVoTf or koti nNothing, TOTOTf.

10. Kamf, Kaupia, Kavev, nobody, supplies the place of ov8fu

ov8(pla, ouS«V, in the common language. It is declined as fol

lows :—Singular.

Nom. Kuveis, Kapfiia, KavfV

Gen. Kav€v6s, Koppids, Kavtvos

Acc. KavfVQf Kapplav, Kavev.

Pronouns. r>9

Ex. Is any one there? tival ns t'/cel; There is nobody,

^€V fivai Kavfis.

II. Kadds, Kadffita, Ka6ev, each, every, is the common form

of (Kaa-Tos, t), ov. It is declined like Kaveis.

Ex. Every one did as he wished, 6 Kadeis (eKaaros) (Koftev

Ct7u:s r^Bekf, He told it to each one, t6 flirev els top Kadiva,

12. 'O btlva, n duva, to bflva, ) ,,-/,., ,. > suchO TaO€, T] Taof, TO Taoe, )

'O Tabe and o helva are not declined.

Ex. Give it to Mr. (name forgotten), Ao's to (U tov Kvpiov

Vocabulary.

pleased (fern.), TfvxapiaTtjfifvr]

((vxapio'Tovfiai^.

lend (Imp.), Sdveia-ov (JbavtlCeo).

they belong, dv^Kova-t (av^Ktei).

I leave, d(îVo).

they are wrong, fxpvanv a8iKov.

Exercise.

Do not give me all the flowers

;

give me a few only and give

the rest to my sister.

Give me that book.

"Which one shall I give you 1

Xot this one, the other.

I have a horse of my own.

It is my turn to play.

Lend me this.

A friend of mine gave it me.

Speak to her about it.

This pencil is mine.

Did anybody see you 1

M17 ftov Sa)077? oXa (navTa^ ra

\ov\ov8ui, 86s fJLOV fiOVOV fl€-

piKo. (fvia),, 86s ra . aXXa els

TTjv dSeXîjj' pov.

Aoy pov €Kfivo TO ^(.^Xiov,

UOIOV Va (TOt 8oi(T(0f

0;^t TovrOf to oXXo.

E)(co oKoyov IbiKov pov.

Eij/at fj treipd pov va naiû),

Aaveicrov poi tovto.

Mot to eboxfv eis Tci)v <f)iXa>v pov,

'Opi\T](T€ TT]S (tT)v) JTfpt aVTOV.

To po\v^8ok6v8v\ov tovto tivai

ibiKov pov.

2as fi8f icdvfis (jis)J

5o Modern Greek.

Nobody saw me, and I saw

nobody.

Are these your gloves %

Yes, they belong to me.

I leave something for you.

Put each book in its place.

It is yours.

Who called me 1

Whose hat is this %

What kind of man is he ?

What weather is it %

Anybody can do it.

Someone passed here a mi-

nute ago.

I should prefersomething else.

Kawts hkv fif (i8e, Koi ryw Sei;

€i8ov Kavtva,

Avra (ivai. to ydvTid (^xtipoKua)

eras',

MaXtora, fioi dvfjKovtri,

Ac^iVo) Ti 8i iifias,

BdXf tKacTTov ^i^Xiou ds r,

Seaiv rot).

Eivai ISiKov crag.

Uaiios /*' f(f)a>va^t;

Twos fivai TO KantWov (6 ttiXoi

TOVTOJ

UoLOveiSovs SvOpatiroseivai oUtos

Tt Kaipos fivaiJ

naff rtff BvvuTai va to KapT},

Kanoios inepatrfv an e8S> np

eWff XfTTTOV.

Qa eV/)ort/i«j'(7rpo€T«|i(Bj/)aXXo ri

Vocabiilary.

the mediation, ^ praoXd^rjaK.

shall you go ; 6a xmdyryrf

;

(xnrdym, present in use, ni)-

yalv(o).

for your sake, irpbs x^P*" <'''?•

every day, Kaff fKaiTTTjv (Jiptpav

say it, (Inf TO,

Exercise.

The neutral powers offered

their mediation.

She went there herself.

I saw them fall.

It was he who did it.

At olSeTepai Svvdpeis iTpo(Tf(}>tpoi

TTjV pf(ro\d^r](Tiv T<tiv.

'YjTTJytv tKtl Tj Idla.

Toi/s ei8ov va jrccr«<r».

AvTos (ivai ooTis TO fKape,

Pronouns. 6i

There were a great many

ladies at the ball.

. I saw the man who heat the

horse so cruelly.

Which way shall you go 1

Some one has left his coat.

I will do it for your sake.

1 1 would not have done it for

anybody else.

I want both.

I go there every day.

Give me as much as you

can.

He has as many as you.

There are a good many chil-

dren.

What is the matter with you 1

Nothing, thanks.

I never saw such a man.

Ho-aK TrXetorat KVpiai tls t6v

)(op6v,

Eidof rbv avdpanou oortr iicnma

TO akoyov Toaov (rK\T}pa>s

ydnapdpwTTas).

Anb TToiov bpopov 6a vnar/riTe;

KaTTOios a(pi]iTf TO (fjopepd tov.

Qa TO Kapa TTpos X'^P"' O'T*'

Aej; 6a to enpaTTov di aWov

Tivd,

Xptid^opai KOI Ta dvo (^dp(f)6Tepa\

Ilrjyaiva fKfi Kaff (KdaTTjv,

Aos poi oaov Bvvaaai irtpurao-

Tfpov.

E^fi Toaa oaa vpets.

'YTrdpxov<Ti KapiToaa naiSia.

Ti tx^Te ;('Atto Ti ndaxfTe ;)

TiVore, fiixapioTa.

OvdeiroTt ctdoi/roiovrov dv6pwTrov

62 Modern Greek.

VERBS.

Pjj/xaTa.

§ 56. The Verb.

r. The Modern Greek Verb has two Voices {biadio-ds to

p^naros), the Active {(iêpyrjTiKov) and the Passive (nadrjTiKou).

There is no Middle Voice ; its place is supplied by th

Passive, which is used with a Middle Sense. The only reli

of the Middle is the Aor. Imp. Pass., Xixrov for XvOrjTi (se(

under Aorist).

2. The Verb Finite has four Moods {iyKXta-ns) ; the Indica

tive [opiariKrj), the Subjunctive {xmoTaKTiKr)), the Conditiona

{inroBfTiKrj), the Imperative (Tvpoa-ranTiKrj).

3. The Verb Infinite comprises the Infinitive {anapffiâToi

and the Participles [peroxdi).

4. There are seven Tenses (xpovoi) : the Present {ivftrrus

Imperfect {naparaTiKos), First Future, Second Future (peXXav

Aorist (aopia-Tos) (ist or 2nd), Perfect {napuKfifievos or avfTfXi

Kos), and Pluperfect {inrepa-vvTeXiKos).

§ 57. There are two principal conjugations of the Gree'

Verb (i) in tu, where a connecting vowel joins the tense ster

to the personal suffix {Xv-u for Xv-o-pi), and (2) in pi, wher

no such vowel is used.

Verbs in <o can be further subdivided into two classes

:

(a) TJncontracted or Paroxytone Verbs.

(6) Contracted or Circumflex Verbs.

(a) TJncontracted or Paroxytone Verbs take the accent 01

the penult in the first person Singular Present Indicati\

Active (Xap^dva, fvpLaKca), and throw the accent back as faâs the quantity of the last syllable will allow, througliout

I

Verbs. 6^

the Conjugation (\an^dpov(Ti, eAo'îSafoi/). There are five

exceptions to this rule, viz. : the Subjunctive, Infinitive, and

Participle of the Aorist Passive, and the Perfect Participle

Passive, and the oblique cases of the 2nd Aorist Part.

:

Ex. va \vdS), XvO^vat or \v6fj, \v6(is, XfXu/xe'j/os, tvxovtos.

(h) In the Present, Contracted Verbs take the accent on the

'contracted syllable, except the second Singular Imperative.

I It is circumflex, if in the uncontracted form the accent was

on the first of the contracted vowels, if not, it is acute.

Ex. <pi\ffTff <f>iX(lT€ y <pi.\e€Ta>, îXeiVcDJ cf)iX(€, 0iXei.

In the uncontracted tenses the accentuation follows the

same rules as in the uncontracted or paroxytone verbs.

§ 58. The Augment.

1. In the Indicative Mood there is a prefix to the Im-

perfect and Aorist. This prefix is called the Augment \

2. There are two kinds of Augment

:

(tt) The Syllabic, which prefixes <- to verbs beginning

with a consonant, as

—

Present. Imperfect. Aorist.

ypd<l)a>, I write, (ypa(j)ov typaâ.

Xw<a, I loose, fkvovy eXvaa.

Note. ^<Xo) takes ^ instead of e.

' If the stem begins with p it is doubled after the f, for

example

—

plnra, I throw, tppiiTTov, tppiâ.

(6) The Temporal (so called because it increases the

length of the first syllable, but does not, like the Syllabic,

^ The Augment was originally a word consisting of the letter o-.

It is surmised that it was an Instrument il case of a DemonstrativePronoun and meant 'there.' At first a separate word, it by degrees

coale<*ced with the Verb.

64 Modern Greek.

increase the number of syllables) is employed with words

commencing with a vowel or diphthong, as

Present. Imperfect. Aorist.

apx'Cw, I begin, W'f""* 7PX*<^«-

3. The rules respecting the change of vowel or diphthong

are as follows

:

Present. Imperfect,

a changes to 1;, aXXdcro-o), I change, ^Kkavauv,

*»» »?> ^PX°H^h I come, VRX^H-l^'

e sometimes to «, ?x^> I have, fl\ov.

at. changes to ?/, aladdvofjiai, I feel, jjaSavofirjv.

av „ Tjv, av^dva, I increase, i]v^avov.

fv „ r]v, fvKaipo), I have time, rjvKaipovv.

„ o, ofiiXo), I speak, afiiXow.

01 „ w, oiKretpo), I pity, aKveipov.

t, V, become t, v. This has no effect on the modern pr(

nunciation.

ou, f«, and the long vowels do not change.

4. Verbs compounded of Nouns take the Augment at tl

beginning ; as, otKoSo/zaj, I build a house, aKobopow.

5. Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Augmei

between the Preposition and the Verb ; as, irepipeva, I awai

TTfpiffifvoyJ but in the vernacular the Augment is often plac

before the Preposition ; as, (nfpiptvov.

6. Verbs of more than two syllables, or beginning with

vowel, do not in the vernacular take an Augment.

§ 59. Reduplication.

1. In Modem Greek the Reduplication is only found 1

the Perfect Participle Passive. (See § 69.)

2. Reduplication is used in Verbs beginning with a single

Verbs. 6^

consonant, or with a mute followed by a liquid; as, Xu«,

XcXv/icvor ; ypd<l>(o, yfypafifjifvos.

3. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, a vowel, or p,

take the Augment instead of the Reduplication.

4. Verbs beginning with an aspirated consonant take the

corresponding hard consonant in the Reduplication.

5. Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Redupli-

cation after the Preposition : in the spoken language these

Verbs do not take a Reduplication.

§ 60. Auxiliary Verbs.

1. There are three Auxiliaiy Verbs in Modern Greek, viz.,

j«;(a), I have ; ufiai, I am ; 6iXa, I wish or will.

2. All the tenses are given below, but the Present and

Imperfect only are used in the Conjugation of other Verbs.

3. "ExcD is used in the Perfect and Pluperfect ; eiixai in the

Perfect Passive ; 6f\co in the Second Forms of the First and

Second Futures.

They are conjugated as follows :

—

VerbS' 67

Sing. fx«

listxil

Imperative Mood.

Present.

I Plur. (xfTt

Infinitive Mood.

(Xft^, usually written txtu

Participle Present.

Singular.

H.

Nom. ex<t>p {fxovTas)

u.-

Nom. Xa^av

P.

(Xov(Ta

(See Xva.)

68 Modern Greek.

Imperfect.

Sing.

Sing.

^/ijji/ (jjixovv)

VerbS' 6q

Sing.

&s ^vai

Imperative Mood.

Present.

IPlur. tare

as ^vai.

Infinitive Mood.

fla6ai or (ivai.

Particijyh

]\Iasc.

Nom. cov (ovras)

Modern Greek.

Sing. 6a GiKr^trw

6a 6fKri(Tri

Second Future.

Plur. 6a 6f\f](T(oiitp

6a 6fkr]<TT)T(

6a 6(\ri<Ta(n.

Subjunctive Mood.

Fresent.

Sing, va dfXco Plur. va 6(Xa>fxfv

vd 6i\rjs va 6(kr}T(

va diKji va BiKaari, (la ^/Xovi),

Aorist.

Sing, va 6f\T](Ta> Plur. va 6f\fia-a)fi(v

vd 6i\rj(TT]s vd df\r](rr}T€

yd 6iKr^(Trj vd deXfjaaai (fo df^ffaov

Conditional Mood.

Present and Imperfect.

Sing. 6d rj6t\ov

6d fj6(\ts

ed i}6i\i

Plur. 6d r]6f\ofitw

6d r]6(ktTt

6^ iiOfkov,

Sing. 6(\*

as 6(Xp

Imperative Mood.

Present.

Plur. 6€\fTt

&s 6(\(o(ri (&i BtKovp)

Verbs, 71

Infinitive Mood.

Prtsent.

72 Modern Greek.

Veris. 73

§/<Ol

b '^

74 Modern Greek.

7<5 Modern Greek.

Verbs. 77

78 Modern Greek.

§ 65. Obsekvations on the Tenses, and on thk

Formation of the Stem. The Peesent.

The Tenses of Verbs are formed from the Root or the

Present Stem.

The Present Stem is itself formed from the Root by

—

1. Lengthening the Vowel or -changing it into a Diph-

thong ; as.

Root. Present Stem,

rpay rpwy^, I eat.

<pvy <j>evy-u>, I flee.

2. By strengthening the characteristic letter j as,

rvn TUTTT-o), I strike.

3. By inserting a syllable between the Root and the ter-

mination ; and at the same time in many cases strengthening

the Root; as,

(vp tvp-i<TK-a, I find.

Xaj3 Xafi^-dp-m, I receive.

4. By prefixing a Reduplication to the Root ; as,

Of Tl-drj-fu (Mod. 6(Tw), 1 place.

5. The Present Stem is sometimes the same as the Root,

as m Xv-«, Xry-».

6. The peculiar forms of the vernacular in the Present

are

—

\iovfif{v) for Xvopfv, \iovv(f) for Xvovai ; and in the

Passive, \if<rai for Xvjj, Xv6fi(a-6a, Xvofiacrde for XvopfSa, and

'kvovvToi for Xiovrai. Some of these forms are certainly

archaisms, which have been preserved in the vernacular,

while they have died out from the cultivated language.

7. The final v of the Present Infinitive is generally dropped;

as, Biko) Xvei, for 6f\(o Xvfw.

8. The Present Subjunctive changes the t, ft, o, ov of the

Veris. 79

Indicative into >?, 17, a : in all other respects the Subjunctive

and Indicative terminations are identical ; as,

Indicative. Subjunctive.

Xvft, va \vjj,

Xv«r€, va. \vrjTe,

\vofi(v, va \va)fitv.

9. The Present Participle Active is formed by adding v

to the Present Stem ; as, Xv«, Xvcbi* (originally Xvovts, con-

sonants dropped, vowel lengthened by compensation). In

the Passive it is formed by changing fiai to fitvos; as, \vonat,

\v6fitvos. The Participles are declined regularly.

§ 66. The iMPEKrECT.

1. The Imperfect only exists in the Indicative. It is

formed from the Present by adding the Augment and chang-

ing the termination -a> to -ov in the Active, and -ofxai to -6^r)v

in the Passive. The vernacular changes the -ov to -a, as eXva

for IXvoi', and •ofirjv to -ovfiow, as (J)\i!ovfiovv for iKvofajv.

2. In uncontracted verbs the accent is thrown back to the

antepenultimate in the Imperfect Active ; as, )3X«7r«, t^Xtnov\

\va, (kvov,

§ 67. The Aorist.

1. Modem Greek has retained both the First and Second

Aorist, but in no one verb are both forms in use.

2. The First Aorist is generally employed. The follow-

ing verbs are the chief exceptions, and employ the Second

Aorist :

—

Pies.

8o Modern Greek.

Pres. Aor.

TTtVo), to drink, IWiov.

tpxo^Mi, to come, ^Xdov.

Xan^dva, to take, eXaôv,

^dW<o, to place, fâkov.

rpexoo, to run, fbpaixov.

^XeVa), to see, (Ibov.

dnodvrja-Ka), to die, dnedavov.

The common language joins a First Aorist termination to

a Second Aorist stem, as, elna, I said, for etnov.

3. In the Indicative the Second Aorist has the same ter-

minations as the Imperfect ; in the other moods as the Pre-

sent, with the following exceptions :

—

(a) The Infinitive is accented with a circumflex, as etn-etf.

(6) The Second Singular Imperative of fpxoyMi, evpla-Ko

Xe'yo) is accented on the last syllable, as, firre.

4. The Second Aorist Passive is formed from the Acti\

by changing ov into iji*.

5. The First Aorist Active is formed from the True Ste

by prefixing the Augment, and adding -a-a, as, Xv, eXvaa ; rv

sTvâ. The First Aorist Passive from the First Aorii

Active by changing -aa into -6r]v.

6. The Greeks avoid such combinations as 6a; etc. ; the

of the First Aor. Act. therefore coalesces with and modifies tl

preceding consonant in the following ways. The of the Ac]

Pass, likewise changes a foregoing tenuis into an aspirate

—

dental into a sibilant. Thus if the Root ends in

—

/3, TT,(f),

the First Aor. Act. and Pass, end in \ira and (pdrjv.

y, «, X, » i> „ ^« and x^l"-

8, 6, T, p, „ „ „ a-a and a6T]v.

TT, c7-(r, „ „ „ a-a or |a and x^l

(For Contracted Verbs see § 71.)

Verbs. 8

1

Ex. First Aor. Act Pass.

rpi'/So), to rub, tTpiyjra, irplcfidriv.

avvdya>, to collect, eavvaâ, iavvdx&rjv.

KoranfiOui, to pei'SUade, KaTtTrdtra, (€)KaTan(ia0ijv.

Taaao), to arrange, eraâ, eraxOlv.

7T\fKu>, to weave, orXfâ, inXtx^lf'

7. The Aorist of Liquid Verbs does not end in -a-«, but -a;

while the vowel of the stem is lengthened as follows :

—

a, ai=^d; f=et; t= t; i=:v; as, otAXw, to send, e<TTfi\a.

8. Liquids which have a«, ft, XX, in the stem throw away

the second of these letters in the Aorist, as napaLvu), to wither,

ifxapava ; âXXa), to put, €/3aXa.

9. If t occurs in the stem of a monosyllabic liquid, it is

changed to a in the Aorist Passive, as, (TTiXXa, fo-TaXrfv.

10. The vernacular uses (Xva-es, eXva-tre, for eXvcrar,

iXva-oTt, and fXvdrjKo, K.T.\. (perhaps a vestige of the Perfect),

for (\vdTjV, K.T.\,

11. The Aorist Subjunctive is formed from the Aorist

Indicative by dropping the Augment and by changing the

termination a into a in the Active, and rjv into co in the

Passive. The second and third persons singular take an eota

subscript in both voices.

12. The Aorist Imperative Active is formed from the

Aorist Indicative by dropping the Augment, and changing a

uto ov (high style) and e (common) : fXva-a, Xva-ov, or Xva-f.

11 the Passive the vernacular uses Xva-ov for XvdrjTt. This

urm is the classical Aorist Imperative Middle of verbs in

fu. Compare to-rao-o with the modem forms (TTaaov, beôv.

13. The Aorist Infinitive Active is formed from the Indi-

ative by dropping the Augment and changing the termina-

iion a into at, as, tXvaa, Xvaat. But when the Aorist Infini-

live is used with the auxiliary verbs, exw, BeXa, it is written

I'instead of ai, as OeXco Xvaet, ex*" Xvafi.

[ 14. The Aorist Infinitive Passive is formed by dropping

> 6

82 Modern Greek.

the Augment and changing Gr\v into 6r\vcu. (lit.) or 6ri (com-

mon), as, i\v6r]v, Xvd^vai, or \v6rj.

15. The Aorist Participle Active is formed from the Indi

cative by dropping the Augment, and changing a into at

as, eAvo-a, Xvcraj. It is declined regularly, like nat, iraora, n-Si

16. In the Passive the Participle is formed by droppinj

the Augment and changing 6r)v into Beis, with accent on the lasi

17. In the higher style an Aorist Middle is sometimei

though rarely used. It bears an active (reflexive) meaninj

It is formed from the active by changing -a into -aiir}v and i;

the participle into -afitvos. Ex. e\v(r-anT}v, -to, -aro ; -dfifda,

-aaOf, -avTO;

partic. Xvadnevos ; thus eKpv^dfvrjv, Kpv^dufvoi, etC.

§ 68. The Future.

1. The Ancient Form of the Future is very rarely used

it may be considered as lost, and is replaced by compounde

tenses.

2. There are two Futures in Modern Greek:

(a) The First (or Imperfect) Future (MeXXcoj' napaTaTiKos)!

(b) The Second (or Perfect) Future (MtX\a>v avvreXiKos).

(a) The First Future, expressing a continued or repeate

action, is formed by 6d (see § 67, 5) and the Present Sulj

junctive; or by ^«Xw and the Present Infinitive, as,

6a nr}yaiva> Ka& iKaarrjv (jca^e f]fxepav), I shall go every daj

Bikoa trepinara} Ka&e Trpwt, I will walk every morning.

' The usual method is to form the Future from the Present and the

First Aorist from the Future. But in Modem Greek the Ancient

Future has been lost. The Second Future, which might be mistaken

for it, is nothing but the Aorist Subjunctive preceded by 6d. 6d is

perhaps a contraction of OfKti ii/a. Thus 9(\a iva = 0i\fi va = 6i va = Od.

Other writers maintain that this contraction is quite without analogy,

and regard Od as a particle or a fragment of rdxa- Mr. Geldart thinks

that we have this very particle 6f or 6d in the optative interjection (t6(

and alOf : ei9e tXdoi is in Modern Greek (X9( vd eKOr/, which might also

be written ti 01 vd eXOij. He is the more inclined to regard Sd as a

simple particle, because its use with the Subjunctive corresponds to

the use of «e in Homer with the same word, while its employmer'

Ferds, 83

(h) The Second Future is used when reference is made to

an action to be performed once, without prolongation or re-

petition, and is formed by 0d and the Aorist Subjunctive, or

by 6(\ci) and the Aorist Infinitive, as,

6a xmayw a-f]fiepov, I shall go to-day.

6f\(i) ufpinaTTjcrei^ anoylre, I will walk this evening. &

3. In the Passive the two Futures are compounded in

precisely the same way as in the Active.

§ 69. The Pebfect and Pluperfect.

1. The Ancient Form of the Perfect is found only in

the Participle Passive, which is formed from the Aorist

Indicative Passive by changing 6r]P into ixtvos, and the Aug-

ment into the Reduplication, as, iickridrjv, Ke/cAjj/xej/or (accent

on penultimate).

2. The Modern Perfect is formed by the Present of e^o)

and the Aorist Infinitive (both in the Active and Passive),

ex« Xvo-ft, ex<i) 'Xvdrj. Some writers assert that Xvo-et, \v6^ are

mutilated forms of the Aorist Participle, and that the origin

of this tense is to be founded in phrases like the following :

—

liovKaa-as ex^is (Herodotus) ; Oavnaaas ex^ (Sophocles). Asecond form of the Perfect Passive is formed by the Perfect

Participle Passive and the Present of diiai, as, XeXu/ixtVor tlfmi.

The Perfect Active is occasionally formed in a similar way,

as, fx"^ \f\vix(vop, -T}u, -Of, -ovs, -as, -a.

Ex. e^fo (yejypafxpevTjv rrjv fTriaroXfiv, I have Written the letter.

with the Imperfect, as, 6ci lirtOvfiovv, answers precisely to the classical

iwf6vfiox/v dv.

* The Second Form of both Futures is frequently written with an y^nstead of a, as, 5«Acu Trriyaivri, 0(\aj tnTayr). This is done on the sup-position that the word is in reality the third person of the Subjunctive,Bod that ya has been elided. It also supposes that the form of thelibird person singular has come to be used for all the persons, singular(Old plural> Ex. Original Form, 9(\u va irrjyaivTi ; Modern, OeKei rrrjyaiypi

'tkUf -(IS, -ti, etc., injyaivrj.

6 9

84 Modern Greek.

3. The Pluperfect is formed with the Imperfect of ex<*>.

the Perfect is formed with the Present, as, ilxov Xvo-ei ; e?x«

4. The Perfect and Pluperfect are very seldom employe^

All degrees of past time are expressed by the Imperfect o

Aorist.

§ 70. The Conbitional.

1. There is no Optative Mood in Modern Greek ; it

replaced by the Conditional.

2. The First Conditional is formed by (a) 6a. and the

Imperfect ; or by (6) the Imperfect of Qikta and the Present

Infinitive ; as, 6a fXvov, or rjBiKov \v(i,, I would lose.

3. The Second Conditional is formed by the Imperfect of

6t\a and the Aorist Infinitive, as, ^de\ov Xvo-et. There is

the same difference in sense between the First and Second

Conditional as between the First and Second Future, namely,

that the former is used to express a continued or repeated

action, the latter with reference to an action performed once

without prolongation or repetition. Ex. If I wrote to-da

he would receive my letter to-morrow, iav eypacfiov afjixepo

^de\e Xa/3ei ttju eniaroXrjv fiov avpiov. If visits did not preve^j

me, I would learn my lessons, iav 8eu fie ennodtCov at e'lrtaK

^eiSy rj6f\ov fiavdavfi to. fia6f]iiaTa fiov.

4. The Pluperfect Conditional is formed by the PlupevfeU

Indicative preceded by 6a, as, 6a tlxov Xvaei, I should have

loosed.

It is generally replaced by the First or Second Condi-

tional. Ex. If visits had not prevented me, I should have

learned my lessons, eav 8ev fie elxov efinobia-ei al e7n(TKe\lAeis,i

ij6t\ov fiav6dvei Or fia6ei (very rarely 6a. elxov fia6ei) ra fia6f]fiaTa fiov.

The fact is that, in Modern Greek, ^6eXov fiav6avei can

answer either to (i) fiav6avoifii av, I would (repeatedly or

continuously) learn (in a supposed case), or to (2) efidvdavov

Verbs. 85

av in either of its two classical senses, viz. (a) I should now

he learning [if something were now happening which is not

liappening], (6) I should then have been learning [if something

had then been happening which was not happening]. In old

Greek it is only the sense of the context which determines

whether tfiavdavov av refers to the present or to a continued

act in the past : and just the same ambiguity attaches to

^BfXov fiavdduft.

Similarly fj6f\ov fiddti can answer either to (i) (fxadov Su,

I should have learned (at some definite past moment— if

something had happened which did not happen) or (2) /xdô»/i«

uv, ' I should learn' [at some one moment—not repeatedly or

continuously] in a supposed case.

The structure of the Conditional sentence is one of the

points in which the discriminating power of the Modern

language is strikingly inferior to that of the Old. It is here

that the loss of the optative is most felt.

Vocabulary.

tried, irpoacirdSritTf (npoanaBo)),

tainted, iXiiTo6vfxi](Tf (Xitto-

dvfjuoS,

something, K<Trt n,

I am weary, bored, âpvvofitu,

the excursion, ^ fK8ponrj.

Exercise.

If I was rich, I should

travel.

If you had heard Mrs. R. B.,

you would have fainted

with pleasure.

The gardener in vain endea-

voured to undo the rope,

and was obliged to cut

it.

Ai* ^prjv nXoiKTios, rjOtkov ntpi-

Tjyfla-dat (6a eVa^f/Sfuoi').

Av rJKovei ttjv Kvp'iav P. B.

ijdfkfs XiTrodvjirjafi tK rrjs

^Sovjjs.

O KTiTTovpbi (Is p.aTr)v TTpotrdrd-

6r]<T( (ê'Sokifiaaf) va Xva-jj to

(Txoiviov Ka\ T]vayKda6r] va t6

86 Modern Greek.

She fainted when she cut her

finger.

He succeeded in loosening

his chains.

If you find that anything is

•wanting to make the room

pretty, say it at once (freely).

They were absent, (they failed)

when they weremostwanted.

The aide-de-camp was not at

the Te Deum : something

must have happened to

him.

The seeds of these plants

should be collected when

they are ripe.

"We thoughthe had announced

to you the news.

"We thought that perhaps you

would come this way.

The last hard winter was

foretold by the shep-

herds.

They generally forecast the

weather accurately.

He wrote such nonsense in

the magazine, that he could

not be admired.

They are delighted with the

town, so that they are never

tired of praising and ad-

miring it.

I admire your picture (por-

'£KvKo6v[ir](Ttv ore txo\//'f tov

SaKTvXov rrjs.

KarapOcoaf va \v(r]] ra dfcrfxa

TOV.

*Eav <To\ (crov) (f>aLvr]Tai ort!

Xeinet rt 8ia va KaracrTad^

TO BcolJUlTtOV KOffÔVf filTf ToJ

fKcvQtpai.

"FXdirov ore irepiaaoTepov tovs^

fi)ôv dvayKt]!/.

O v7ra<nri(TTr]s TKinfv dno ttjv

boôKoyiav' irptntt va Tea

(TVVe^T] Kan Tl.

Ot anopoi tS)v (jivrav Tovrav^

irpeTTft va auXKeyavrat orav

apifidaaa-i,

''Evop.iôp.fv oTi eras dvfjyyfikt

(fiXf dvayytiXfi) Ta via.

*Evop.!(nfxfv OTi «ra)s Tjdekeri

TTtpdafi air eSco.

'O TfXeuraiof Spiiivs ;(«/za)v jrp<H

tXe'xdr] vno rSiv TTOifiivav (dffi

Toiii Troififvas).

2vvfjda)s TvpoXfyovai tov Kaipov

dKpi^w.

Eypaê Tocras avorjaiai (is to

TTfpioSiKov, axTTe ^To d8vvaTov

va Oavfiaadp.

Tols dpeaKfi noXi) ff nokts odev

bev âpvvovTai va Trjv firaivaxTi

Ka\ va TrjV Savpdâxri.

Qavfidô) TTjv (iKQva eras* tivai

Verbs. 87

trait) : it is above all

praise.

I admire his courage and

foretell a brilliant future

for him.

1 bought the paper ruled.

I cannot write Greek cor-

rectly.

Tell me why you knit stock-

ings, when you can very

easily find a woman to

knit them for you.

They made an excursion (pic-

nic) to Eleusis, but when

they began luncheon, they

found that the knives and

forks were missing.

They were disheartened when

they found how many

things were missing.

avcoTtpa naPTos eiraivov.

Qavfid^a Tfju dvbpeiav tov koi

7rpo\eya> 81 avrov Xa/x7rp6v

fteWov.

'Hy6pa(Ta to x^'P^' {,'^^)x°P^~

KOiflfVOV.

Afv fipnopSt pa ypdcfxo opdas ra

EWrjviKa.

EtTre pov 8ia ri TrKfKus KaXraas,

d<fi' oS Svvaaai noXv evKoka

va (vpr]s yvvaiKa va ras TrXe^j/.

'E^eBpapov fts Trjv EXevtrtj/a Kai

fv a> ^pxi-(TUP TO yeiipA Tav

ti8ou on (XfiTTOP TO paxaipia

Koi TO nfpovvia,

H.(Tav aTrrfKntape vol ore tvpov

nova irpdypaTa eXfinop.

§ 71. CONTRACTED VERBS.

1. In Ancient Greek there were three classes of Contracted

Verbs, those in aa, ea, and oa, but the Modern language

changes oa into ova and conjugates it as a simple verb.

There are therefore only two classes

—

(a) In aa>, as Tipdm, I esteem, I honour.

(b) In CO), as KoKfoo, I call.

Both of which contract into S>, npS), xaXw.

2. The contractions only occur in the Present and Im-

88 Modern Greek.

perfect of both voices, which are given below. The other

tenses ai-e conjugated like those of simple verbs.

2. The following are the Rules of Contraction :

—

First Class. Second Class.

an,= a fo, (ov= ow

aov=:o) or ov *'?= '?

Those verbs (Sii/rao), TTfti/ao), etc.) which in Ancient Greekformed an exception in contracting 6m into

fi are nowregular.

3. In the common language the Imperfect Active (gener-

ally without the Augment) employs the following forms :

—

-ovaa, -oicFii, -ovcf \ -ovcrafiep, -ovo-ere, -ovaav,

4. Schleicher observes that all contracted verbs formerly

ended in aw. It is noticeable that the common language

has returned to this in many instances, viz. n-c/jin-araTe for

TitpiTraTflTf, (rjTatt for fijret.

5. The Aorist of Contracted Verbs is formed regularly it

aa and 6t]v; but the vowel of the stem is generally lengthened,

as, KTvirda, fKTvmja-af 0(Xeo>, ((ptXrja-a,

First Class.

§ 72. Tifidw, -w, I honour.

Active Voice.

Indicative Mood.

Present.

Sing. Ttudoi -S) Plur. nfiaontv -Zfiep ,

Tifjtafis -as rifidfTf -are

Tifiati -a Ttfxdovai -Sxri (TifiovvY,

Slug.

Verbs.

Imiwrfect.

(Tifiaov -0)1/

(TifULti -as

fTifxaf -a

(^Common)

-ovaa

-ovate

-ovae

Plur.

fTi[xaofjLfv -(Ofjifv

fTlftdfTf -UT(

irifiaov -a>v

Aorist, «Vi'/iJj(ra.

Future, 6a rtfiqaa, or ^e'Xo) rt/i^ffei.

89

(Common)

-ovaa/Jifv

-ovatTf

-oiauv.

Subjunctive Mood.

Sil)g. va ri/iao) -a

va Tifidijs -as

va Tifiarj -a

Present.

Plur. va Tifxaatjifv -Zfifv

va Tifxdr]T€ -are

vaTifiditicri-Siai (varifiovv).

Imperative Mood.

Present.

Sing. Tifiae -a Plur.

as Tifia ^Ttyxa/ro) -aro))

TifiafTt -arf

as Tifiovv {rifiaiTOiaav

-drwcraj').

Infinitive Mood.

Present, rifiauv -av (ti/z^I in compounded tenses).

Participle Present.

Singular*.

go Modern Greek.

Plural.

Nom. Ti\ia.ovr(i -S>VTfs riixdovaai -Sxrat

Gen. TifJtaoirrov -a)VT<ov Tifiaovcrav -axrav

Dat. Tifxdo<Ti -a}(Ti Tifiaoia-ais -dxrais

Acc. Tiixdovras -mvras Tifiaovaas -axras

Tijiaovra -wvra

TlflaOUTCOV -doVTOiV

Tifidovat -Stai

Tifidovra -mvra.

Passive Voice.

Indicative Mood.

Verbs. 9

1

Imperative Mood.

Sing. Tiftaov -w, -oD, -lov

in Tifxarai (rifiatado)

Plur. Tifideade -acrQt -Uade

Ar TificovTai (TLft.a(cr6aicrav

-aa-daxravy Commou&s Tiixiovvrai.

Infinitive Mood.

Present, nixdeadat, -aadat.

Participle Present.

Singular.

M. p. N.

^OXH. Tiixa6fifvos-oi>fj,(vos TifiaofiiVT] -afxivrj ruiaofievov -atfievov

Gen. Tifiaofifvov -coufvov Tifiaoixevrjs-cofxevrjs Tifiaojiepov -afxevov, etC.

Plural.

Nom. Ttfia6{ifvoi -afifvoi Tifiao^fvai -afifvai rifiaoneva -ayuva

Geo. Ti.yMOfj.ivav Tifitonevuv, etc.

«

Second Class.

§ 73. KaX^u, -w, I call.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Indicative Mood.

Present.

Sing. KaXco) 'U>

Ka\e€is -eif

KoXUi -d

Plur. KoktOflfV -OVfl€V

Kokeere -etre

Kokfovffi -ovai (koXovv).

92 Modern Greek.

Imperfect.

Sing.

(KoKtOV -ovv

(KoKtfi -(IS

(KciXef -ft

(Common)

(J^KaXovara

-ovafs

riur.

eKoXenfifv -ovfifv

(KokeeTf -tire

eKoKiov -ovv

(Common)

-ovaafifv

-ovatrf

-ovcrav.

A orist, (KuKeaa, of f»?rea) {CnTa>), to seek, f'Cn^W"-

Future, 6a KoXtaa or 6(Xo) KaXeaei, da (^tjTtja-a) or 6(X(o fijr^fffi.

Sinor. va KaX((o -S>

pa KaXfTjs -fjS

va KdXei; -5

Subjunctive Mood.

Fresent.

Plur. va KaX((t>fifv -a/ifv

va KdXfrjre -^re

va KoXeaxri -aai.

Imperative Mood.

Sing. KoiXft -ft

Verbs. 93

Plural.

Nom. KaXfovTts -ovvT(s KoXtovcrai -ovcrat KoKiovra -ovvra

Gen. Ka\(6vT0)V -ovvrav Ka\(ovaS)V -ovaav KoXeovrtov -ovvrcov

Dat. Kokfovai -ovai KoXtovcrais -ovcrais KoXeovcri -ovcri

Acc. KoXfovras -ovprai KoXeovvas -ovaas KoKiovra -ovvra.

PASSIVE VOICE.

Indicative Mood.

Present.

Plur. KaXfOfifda -ovfifdaSing. KoKeofiat -ovfiai

Ka\e(i -et

KokefTat -tirai

KoKitaBf -flaGe

Kokiovrai -ovvrai.

Imperfect.

Sing.

(Common)

«»caX*o/xTji/ -ovfiT]v -ovfxovv

fKoKfov -ov 'ovaovv

€Ka\f(TO -eiro -ovvrav

Plur.

fKaK(6fi(6a -ovfifda

fKoXifade -tlaSf

fKoXeOVTO -oCl/TO

(Common)

-ovfiacrde

-ov<r6av

Aorist, (K\r]di]v: f^rjTrjdrjv.

Future, 6a kKt]6S> or diXa K\r]6rj : 6a CnTT]6a) or ^eXw fijTJj^^.

Subjunctive Mood.

Present.

Sing, va KokfCifiai -QOfioi

va KaXerj -fj

va KdkerjTai -ijTai

Plur. va KaKeafifda •afieda

va KaXf'rjarde •rfade

va KoKiavrai -wvrat.

Imperative Mood.

Present.

Sing. Kokeov -ov

as Kokrirai (^KoKftirda

Plur. KaXeeade -fiade

&.S KoXStvrai (Ka\eea6(c-

(Tov -fiadoxrav^.

94 Modern Greek.

Infinitive Mood.

Present, KokteaBai -eiadai,

Particijile Present.

Singular.

M. F. N.

Nom. KaKf6fxevo<: -ovfifvos Koktonevrj -ovfievrj KoKeSfitvov -ovfitvot

Gen. KokfOfievov -ovfievou KoKeofievrii -ovfxipr]! KoXfOfitvov -ov/jLtvox

Vocabulary.

hold ! tparfjcraTe (^Kpar-eat -w).

she washes, nXvpei.

the linen, ra aanpoppovxa.

I would that ! €nf6vp.ovv va,

tl.6( vu.

warm the plates, Cârave ra

invaKia (jnaTa).

the boys sing, ra naibla ^//aX-

Xovtri (rpayaSovp).

at the concert, ds -n^v a-wavXlav.

orange, to nopTOKaXiov.

they smell sweet, fvabidôvn,

he was appointed, diwpia-dij.

Prime minister, 6 npcoBvirovf

yos.

the foreign minister, 6 inrovf

yoi tS)v fâyrepiKup.

the minister of war, 6 vnovpyh

tS)V (TTpaTiaTlK&V.

meeting, awebpLaa-is ((tuXXoXij

TTipiov).

he made a speech, i^t^cavriat

\6yov.

eloquent, tvyKmrros.

the troops, to. (rTpaTflp-ara.

feelings, to. ala-dfjiiaTa.

Exercise.

Avvaade va poi bavfiarjTf tv (ppdyKOV va nKrjpixrai rov ipa^rfKaTqv^

*E6avpxiôv vTTfppoXiKa rfjv 6iav (K rov AvKa^TjTOv. "EKpvê ttjv

i(f>T]pepi8a. 'Pi'\|/'oj/ TO Ttpdxîa ravra rov xdpTov fls to Kaviarpov

(top KaXadop). 0* dKkdâ ro bmpArioP pov' (ipai rroKv yjrvxpop,

Kparure ttjp opTrpeWap pov plap (TTiyprjP ; 4>atV«Tat on 6a

^pi^l). Upend va paKpvvtjTe to (p6pep.d eras. UKvpei ra av

Verbs. 95

•npoppovâ TToXv KoKd. Upenei va liKvvoi iraKiv ras X"P"5 /ôw.

Ênfdvpovv (fi^f) va ^crav (pwevpfva ds tov KrJ7T6i> (to Trtpt/SoXt) yuou ra

avOrj (XovXovdia) (Keiva. Ziarave ttjv arovnau (tov fw/toj') Koi elne

fls TOV pdyfipov va ^fO-Tavr) to. jrivaKia. Ta naMa ^dWovv ttoXu mpaia

(Is TTjv 'PcocrcriKrjv (KKKrjaiav, Tfjv tJKov(Ta va "^dXrj (rpayovbrj^ fls Tfjv

avvavKiav tov 'QSciov. Ta nvdr] tuvtu ttjs TTopTOKoXfas fvaSidôvai.

Afv divavrai va <ras /SXai^wtrt ttoXv. AKopladrj npaOxmovpyos. 'O

inovpyos tSiv (^coTfpiKwv naptjTTjdi] (has resigned). *0 vnovpyos

t5)v (TTpaTiaTiKCdv & dvTiKaTaoTadfj (will be replaced). 'H 7rpa>TT)

(TWfBpiaaig iytv€T0 X^^^' E^fcftavrja-e [xaKpov Ka\ €vy\a)TTov "Koyov.

'O 0aai\(vs fVf^fwpijtrc to (TTpaTeiifxaTa ttjv TrapfXdovaav e^So/LtdSa.

'E^fâiaxrav tov Trpta^fVT^v Trepi tcov (f)ikiKS)v alaStjpaTav tuv irpos

TrjV 'EXXdSa. Ei6e pa ^to dwuTov.

§ 74. Neuter Veebs.

Neuter Verbs are either Active or Passive in form : as,

mjyaiva, I go ; \vnovpai, I grieve. They are conjugated like

Active and Passive Verbs of similar terminations.

§ 75. Veebs in -pi.

Verbs in -pi are still used in the higher style, but in

ordinary writing and conversation a second form in -« 13

employed : as,

crraiva), aT^vcii= lOTTjpi, I set up.

ffero) =Ti6-qpi, I place.

S/Sco z=8[d(opt, I give.

8fiKvv(o =8eiKwpi, I show.

(evya =^fvywpi, I yoke or harness.

96 Modern Greek.

§ 76. Impeesonaii Veebs.

The following verbs are used impersonally:

—

Present.

Verbs. 97

Vocabiilary.

it grieves me, iit \vn(1.

lame, ;ô)\oy.

dressed, ivbtbvfifvos {ivhvofxai).

during the clay, Kara ttjv ^fxfpav.

fresh, cool, 8poa(p6s.

even in summer, koI Kara t6

dfpos (^KoXoKoipi),

the frost, 6 Trayeroj, fj nayatvia.

is setting (of the sun), 8v(i.,

âaiKfVfi.

the evening, rA /SpaSu.

it is very stormy, flvat jxcydKr)

Karaiyls,

besides, iicrhf rovrov,

Hymettus, 6 'Yprji-ros.

is covered, dvai KeKokvpiifvos

{KaXvTrTa),

the base (of a mountain), ol

irpOTTobfS,

there was a hailstorm, en-fo-e

xd\aâ (TTiTrrw).

dead, vtKpos j of animals, yj/o-

<f>ios.

seldom, oTravtag.

to expose yourself, va tKTfdrJTe

(eKêVo)).

Exercise.

Me XuTTft (\virovpm) va ae /3Xen-« \iaKaivovTa rScrov. âlvtrat

Srt fKrinr)a'a rov ttoSo fxov irepiaaorepov d<p' o, rt evopiôp rfjv

ariyfirjp (Ktivqv. âiverai OTt eiaOe \iau d8id<popqs irfpl ttjs virodi-

trtati. Bpateid^ti' eôpev 5e ttoKvv hpqpov va KdpafxfV, Eivai roarf

{^fOTTi Kara rfjv f/p^pav' ai vvKTfs o/iwf ivravOa elvai TrdvTore Spoaepal

Koi Kara to KoXoKalpi (6(pos). Tfjv napfKQovuav vvKra ^to irayoavid,

dkXa voplô) oTi oi ndyoi BifXidrjaav. 'O rjXios 8vei (/SatrtXevft)* 6

fjXios e8v(T( irpo pids &pai. 2as iretpaêt va f^fpxT}(Tde orav ^ptXH t

TLptttei va Tvpo(T(XJ)T€ orav rjvat. vypbs Kaipos. Uperrtt va ptivrjre

ioSt TO ppdbv, (ivai peydXtj Karaiyis. Aev <f)oôvpai va f^fpxapxit

orav ^povra Kai dcrrpdiTTd, 'O oiipavos (ivai Kadapwrepos' dWa Btv

€irava€ aKOfit] va ^pe^V' Xtoi/ifft ds to. povvd, 'O 'YfiryrTos tivai

KtKciXvppfvos (TX(86v pfXP'- "^^^ irpon68a>v, 'H X'^'^C'^ fOTraaf

^Bpavae) oXa (tx^ôv ra jrapdBvpa iroWav oiKirnv, Koi fKorovTabts

ftucpuv 7rov\iS>v (nTrjvwv^ (vpeOrjaav yjrocfita (veicpo) tig tovs k^ttovs.

3mavu)s avpîvn tovto 81s koto, tijv avrf/v &pav tov eirovf, Aci*

98 Modern Greek.

eirpeirt va eKTtd^e ovra. A(v titpfnt va vndyrj rrjv vvKra ravrrjv'

§ 77. Irregular Verbs.

The Vernacular in the case of verbs ending in dya, tya

(a/yw), myoa leaves out in the Plural and in the second person

Sing, not only the y but the vowel which follows it. Thus

Xeyw, I say, Xeyftf or X«f, X«(y)et ; Xe(yo)/xf (i/), Xf(yf)rf , Xe'youfft

or \i{yov)v. Similarly, 7ra(y)ci), Tray, irdfi ; Ttufxtv, Trare, ndv{t).

The following are the principal verbs, which form their

tenses irregularly. There is no Middle Voice, the Perfect

and Pluperfect are formed from the Aorist; the Second

Future is the same as the Aorist Subjunctive, thus the

Aorist is the only tense which in most cases need be given

here.

Present.

Verbs. 99

by loss of the f and metathesis become (J)^ya(oi>, (e)/3yaV(o,

(f)3yaXXa), to take out, ifx^dâ, (fj-QdWco, to bring in.

Present. English. Aorist.

îv(o, chiefly used to go, f^rjv.

compounded, as

dvaîva, Kara-

âivu), e^yatVo),

fiapivofxai (papeiov- to be weary,

A*at), to be bored,

/SXeTTO), to

j3oc7-(ca) {poaKfa -aY to

^pfX<^t to

yrjpda-Ka, to

yivofjuu to

Sayjcai/a) (Anc. SoKvo), to

cf. Tvyxdva),

hipva (Anc. S/pca, to

f to play),.

. BdKVVd), to

, di8dcrKWy to

i dtxopat, to

t'So), to

Bivapaiy to

(âpvv6r]v (eâpf6r]i>), Fut â

iSape^co, Partic. Perf. (/3«)/i;(t-

pf/xeVof.

see, fldop.

pasture, f^6<TKT)aa.

moisten, t^peâ.

grow old, (yrjpaaa.

become, fyeiva or eytva,

bite, fddyKoaa (PasS. e8^;^î»).

beat, eSeipa, Pass. f8dpi}v, Part. Perf.

(Sf^Sap/xeôf.

show, c8ft|a.

teach, tdidaâ,

receive, fdex^rjv.

give, tB(oaa or eSwKa.

be able, rjdvvTjdtjp (i8vv^dr]v).

Exercise.

Have you seen Paul? he has Ei8«t< tov llavXov; iyrjpaat iroKv

grown old very fast, and raxôis koL 6i\u va ytivrj Ka-

wants to become a monk. \6yepos.

What a fearful day ! I am Ti rpopeph fjixepa I i^pdxnv oXor,

^wet through, and the dog 6 6e ctkuXos /** eSayKao-e.

li has bitten me.

n 2

lOO Modern Greek.

He beat me because I showed M* %h(ipt 8t<Jrt tov tbeiâ t^v

him his caricature and said ytXoioypacjilav tov, koI /** etn-t,

to me, ' I will teach you to * 6a ai 8i8aâ va /** ffinai(r}s'

laugh at me.'

At what o'clock did you give Kara Trotav &pav tSwo-are rfiv

the letter to the messenger 1 cTrto-roXijv dg tov KOfuoTTjv;

because I did not get it till

eight in the evening, and he

could not take more than

twenty minutes coming.

Start 8(v TTjv TKaôv npb r^f

6yb6j)i TO ecriTfpas, Koi 8(v 6a

fKupf ntpta-a-oTtpov dno (iKoat

XfTrrd va fX6i}.

Aorist.

(^t)0yrJKa, Fut, 6a e/Syo).

Present. English.

(f)j3yati'<o (e/c/SaiKw), to gO OUt,

[()8ydCoo {fK^dXXco), to take out, f^yaXa.

iyeipopiai, to rise, Or to fiyfp6r]v,

get up,

fWXô/iat, to be aston- (^cnXayrjv.

ished,

fvrpeiTopai, to beashamed, iverpd-rrr^v (sc. to tui-n inward

on oneself).

iittTvyxavfOf to succeed, to (irtTvxpv,

hit,

epxopai, to come, ^X6ov, Imper. fX6f, TXdtTe, com-

monly TXa, fXare, Fut. dd (X6o},

fvpi(TK<a, to find, rjlpa (fvpov^.

fX<o, to have, elx^v (Imp.),

fw, ^s, Cti ') C^ffj to live, t^r](Ta\ Imperf. iôva-a; Impe

f^Tf, fwo-t {ôvv), Cfj6i, (rjTa; (^re, {^Tjraa-av,

tipiropS> ^ (e//7ropw), to be able, r}fnt6pf<Ta,

T}^(vp(i> (f^fipw), to know, tj^tvpa.

6iXa>, to wish, T}6fXt]a-a.

dera, to place, f6taa.

' In Anc. Greek dnopfoi, to be at a loss, and (v-nopiw, to succeed, pros-

per, are found, ^ftvopw is probably a corruption of the latter.

I

Verbs. lOI

Present.

102 Modern Greek.

Very well, thanks, but I want

to sit down.

Do you know where Colonel

R. lives? Near the Cafd

Solon, I think.

Let us sit down here ; it is

very hotwalking about; the

sun has burnt up the trees.

How do you do ? What are

you doing ]

I go every day to Phalerum.

I go out in a boat and

bathe.

A capital plan, but take care

you are not drowned. The

wind blows tremendously

sometimes.

Let us walk a little; you

need not go far without

sitting down.

IIoXi) Kaka, fixâptara)^ aX\i

6f\<i) va Ka6qaat,

Tvatp'i^tTf trov KaroiKel 6 avvray

fiaTdp)(i]S P ; I]\r](TLOV to\

Ka(f)evfioV ^6\(ovos, vopiûi.

As KaB-qaapfV e'So)' eivai ttoXi

^(orq va TTfpmaTi] ris' 6 ijXiai

fKovae TO. 8fv8pa.

Tl KdpVfT€J

Ilrjyaivai Kaff fKadTTjv els Ti

^dXrjpov' nrjyalvat fxe rr)

"Xfpôp Koi Kopvio \ovTp6v.

IIoXv KoKa KapvfTf, aWa Trpoa

târe (jltj TVViyTJTt. 'O avepo

TTveei, (KôhpoTara iviore.

As TrfpiTraTTjcraipfV oXiyoV de

f;^6Te dvdyKTiy va {rtrdyqi

paKpav X^P'^ ''" iia6r]crT}T€,

Present. English. Aorist.

itXaici), to cry, eK\av(Ta.

Kptpva, Kpepu) -do, to hang up, (Kptpaira,

Xap^va, to take, re- fXaôv.

ceive,

XavSdvoftai (com- to be mis- i\av6dar6T)Vt

mon \a6fva>, to taken,

err, eXaêv<ra)^

Xf'-yoj, to say,

vddp to learn,

tmov, Subj. va (et)7ra), Imperat.

(ft)7r/ or {fl)n(s, Pass, (in

high style) eppedrjv. Part, pc

6(U, Perf. I'art. dprjpevos.

(padov.

Verbs. 103

Present.

104 Modern Greek.

pulled my hair. Be quiet,

or you shall both suffer for

this.

Go straight through the town,

and take the road to the

left, which will bring you

to the railway station. Youcannot make a mistake.

How much do you get a

month? Only 300 francs

a month as Professor, but

I make something more by

writing for the papers.

Get up, or I will send the

master with a stick. Doyou think I care for him %

The boat has stopped; will

they put us ashore 1

j8;;£f ra \x.ah\ia.—Ka^^(rnr«

fia-u\a I aXXojf 6a nddtjTf ko

oi 8vo aas 8i avro,

nr/yaivt Kur fxiBdav tia r^t

7t6K«os Koi, Triipe tiji/ irpos ra

aptartpa oSov, iJTis 6a ui <f>tps

(h TOP aTa6fi6u tow criSi;

Spofiov. Atv Tjpnopfls va ko-

ptjs Xddos.

Tt pia6bv Xap^dvfTf Kara prjva;

Movov 300 (jipdyKa Kara

prjva COS KadrjyrjTrjs, dWa Ktp-

8i(a> uKoprj Kan Ti ypd(j)a>v di

rets ((prjptpidas.

Si^KO), aXXa>f 6d <TT([\a> tov hi-

SdcTKaXov pi rfjv pd^buv.—'

'Sopi^fts OTi TOP (jio^oipai

;

'H Xtp^os (<rrd6t]' 6a pas dno-

$i^da<oaiv tls ttjv ^rjpdvf

Present. English.

Verbs. 105

Present.

io6 Modern Greek.

tired, Kovpaajjitvos,

the siege, fj TroXiopKia.

a year ago, irph iv6s trovs.

the parcel, t6 dtpa.

the interests, ra <rvft(f)fpovTa,

tiresome, evoxKrjriKdg.

wet, ^ptypfpog.

silly, fixopoi.

the post office, r6 Taxyhpofidov,

Exercise.

Atv inidiipo) V avc^S) rhv \6(f)ov arjpepop fitra p.trrr)ix^piav' fifiat

Kovpacrpfvos, "ETrpcTre va tov avayKaar^re v dpaipftrj) o, ti tin€,

'H TToXtopjcta ^p6r} (bifXvdr]) rrpo fvos fruvs. *E7^^rp«^âTe poi »

d(f)fj<rci TO bepa pov (vravda' 6a e\da> va to irapa els rf/v (iTi(rTpo(f)i]t

pov, *A(})fj(raTf pt va (ftpovricra dvd vpav 8ia to. (rvp<f)epovra pov,

BaXtre to KaOiapd eras irKrjaiov tov irapaBvpov. Ilrjyaivoi €X« aira{

TTJt f^8opa8oe. 'Yirdytre t/cei octoj' bvvacrOe avxvoTtpov, Tivtcra

isoKv ivo)(\T)TiK6s, Eipai ^ptyptvos. 'EyrjpacraTe noXv Koi fiadt

pcopos. 'Pirjft Tan fnidroXas Tavras fls to TaxySpopdoy, AtiôV

poi Ti dvaywaaKeis,

Vocabtilary.

I can, I could, bivapai : Aor.

T]dvvrj6r]v (Lit.). fjpnopS) :

Aor. fjpnopea-a (Com.).

I will, I would, ^cXo), rjQekov or

r]6fkr]<Ta.

I ought, 6(f)ti\(0, TrpeTTti,

I must, irpenfi, dvayKaôpai.

I should, firperrf.

information ^, «* 7r\r}po(f)opiai,

the affair, ^ vnodtais,

the decision, ^ dn6(f)a(ns,

to yield, give in, eVSi'So).

to sing, Tpayovba.

to accompany, avvoSfva.

exactly, just, lata taia, dxpiâs,

to refuse, dnonoiovpai.

to deny, refuse, dpvovpau

the country, rj iôxh-

to use, treat, peraxeipiôpai.

the duty, to Kad^Kov.

however that may be, owwi

Ka\ &v fXU-

to understand, Karakap^dva.

to allow, firiTpenai.

' Found in the New Testament, with meaning, fulness of assurance

certainty, cf. i Thess. i. 5, Coloss. 2. 2, Heb. 6. 11. The verb w\Tjpo<f>opft

has in 2 Ep. Tim. 4. 5 the sense of ' to fulfil,' and in the Pass, of thing• to be fully believed,' Luke 1. 1.

Prepositions. io7

to catch (a train), Trpo(f>ddvci>.

the misunderstanding, ^ naptv-

what can have hecome of? H

Exercise.

Uoioi arrh <Tas hvvarai va }xoi daxrrj nXrjpocfiopias n(p\ ttJs

inodia-fMS ; 9a pot ^to itoXv XvTrrjpov va (TvvairavTTjdmpfV. Twpa

nptiTfi va T« ««7ra> Trjv diT6<f}a<riv pov. Ets parrfv irpoa-fnaBrjcra va

ohiXtjo-o), 8iv fjSvvfjdrjv va 7rpo(})epc» Xtîv. 'ETrpfTTC va fkdrjs («'a

(iXês f\6fi) pa(v pas fls ttjv 'Pa>pr)v. "Enpfne va (vbacra). 2v

f/pTopt'is va (pyaa6r]s' to (vplaKca (ixapioTortpov va ae ffXtnto ep-

yaôpfvov, 0a erpayovbovcraTe tav 6 8i8d(TKa\6s eras r/ro foS> Ota va

aas <Tvvo8fvaTj • Go. ^to T]vxapi<TTT]pfvos f'av tjSvvuto va idrj top

<f>l\ov Tov OKoprf piav (popdv. Tt 6a fXfyef fav ijpxfTO arjpepov

;

'HBfXopev vjrdyei fls t^v fôxrjv avpiov, iav r} d8f\(})r] pas 8ev rjadfvei.

"EKapfs io-ia taia to ivavriov d(f)^ o, ti enptTTf va Kaprjs. IlpeVet va

p( d(f>T}<Tj]s va Kpiva nepi atrrov. KadrjKov fX^Tt va p^ d^t'j/jjrt tovs

avdpanovs va pfTaxfipl^fi^VTat to. ^Sm toctov aiCKripSas. Hpnopfi va

Xtyrj o, Tt ^f'Xff Kav(\s bev tov niaTfiifi. "Otto)? koi hv fxjj, 8iv

€ivai ISiKTi aov bovXfid (it's no business of your's). Aiv bvvapai

va KaToXdâ) Ti ivvofi ypdffxov TOiavTrjv iiTKTToXijv. Aei/ Trpenei va to

«7rirpe\^)7. "Eirpfire va virdyrjs oTav crov fina' Ta>pa eivat dpya i:\fov.

'Eav 8ev iTpo(f)6d<T(opfv tov cn8r}p68popov 8vvdpe6a va vTrdyci)p,(v f(f>

apd^r]S. UpfTTfi va xnrdpxjl Kappia TTcpfvvorjais ptra^v twj/. Tt va

tytvf rh irathlov', eirpttrt va ^to «8w vpit pias Stpas. Eyw ff

dn(iroi6vpT]v, aXX' avTr) 8fv 8vvaTai v dpvTjdg TinoTf, Ti's 6a to

iniaTtvtI

{tIs fjdtXe to irurrevcTti ;)

PARTICLES.

§ 78. Prepositions.

I. In Modern Greek many Prepositions govern other cases

than in the Ancient language.

io8 Modern Greek.

2. The Accusative is often used instead of the Genitive

and Dative.

3. There are 18 Prepositions, which may be divided into

5 classes :

—

(i) 4 Prepositions which govern the Genitive.

(2) 2 „ „ Dative.

(3) 3 »> „ Accusative.

(4)6 „ „ Accusative or Gen-

itive.

(5) 3 » n Accusative, Geni-

tive, or Dative.

§ 70. Prepositions which govern the Genitive : irpo, dvri,

fK, airo,

1. "irpi (does not drop the omicron before a vowel) :

(a) of Time—before : ^\6ov ds ras 'A6r]vas irp6 rpimv (tS>v,

I came to Athens three years ago ; (larjKdt rrpo e/xoO, he entered

before me ; npb ttoXXoO, a long time ago.

(6) of Place—in front of, before : 17 Atyiva KtWai. npo tov

ntipaias, Aegina lies in front of the Piraeus.

2. dm—instead of, in exchange for: poi eSuKf yaierras

{x(^Kov)dvT\ dpyvpav vopiarpdrcov, he gave me coppers in exchange

for silver coins ; vTrrj-yt dvr tpov, he went instead of me. In

composition dvrl has also the force of 'against'; as dtnUtipai,

to be opposed to, to be set against. Followed by vd and the

Subjunctive it means—instead of; as, dvri va imaTpeyjrD fidCs,

instead of returning at once.

3. ^K, before a vowel e'l

:

(a) out of, from (of place) : as, f^^Xdtv (tV) tov Btdrpov, he

came out of the theatre.

(6) made of, of : as, rb haKTvkibi dvai (K xpvaov, the ring

is made of gold.

(c) from (cause, origin, agent) : as, dirtdavtv tK nvptrov, he

died from fever.

Prepositions. 109

((?) from (of time), since: as, i^ (K(ivf}g ttjs &pas, from

that hour.

4. diro

:

(a) from, since (of time) : as, dvat «8« an6 rpimv i^Bo/iddav,

he has been here tliree weeks (since three weeks).

(6) from (of place) : as, (({)vy(v duo ttjs olKtas rov, he fled

from his house.

ano is frequently used with the Accusative : as, t6 rJKovtra

dir avTov, I heard it from him ; dno ^v\ov, made of wood

(^uXivor) ; dno rov 'lavovdpiov, 1 833, from January, 1833.

5. The following Adverbs can be used like Prepositions

with the Genitive case : fvtKa, on account of; avev, 8(';^a, 8ix<os,

without ; irXfjp, irdp($, except ; ptxPh ^XPh so f**" ^.s, until

;

xdpiv, for the sake of; ikto^v, dpdpta-a, among, in the middle

of, between ; 8ikt}v, like, as ; indva, over, upon ; vn-oKaro), below,

under; (pwpoaBtv or tfjurpos, before, in front of; oTrlaa, KaroTnv,

behind; Kovrd (from Byz. kovtos, short, cf. Kovrovpos, short-tailed,

Achmes. I53)» nXrjo-lov, near; 6 Xoyvpa, Tpiyipw, round about;

dvTiKpi (vern. dyvdvria), opposite to ; /xnft, with ; npiu, before.

These words are generally followed by tls or dno with the

Accusative, and bear the meaning of the above-mentioned

prepositions—upon, under, before, etc. Ex. : 'EKadtfro ttXtjo-Iov

fls TovTov TOP aphpa, he sat near this man. Before the mono-

syllable pronouns, the demonstrative pronouns, and a few

other cases, they can however be followed by the Genitive,

without any intermediate preposition. Ex. fKadrjTo irXrjaiov

fiov, he sat near me ;p.a^v /iov, with me ; irp\p toC ;(e(/ioM'or,

before the winter.

§ 80. Prepositions which govern the Dative : eV, avp.

iv, in : as, cV avTjj rfj x^P9y ^^ this country. Replaced in

common language by tls with Accusative.

aok, with (lit.) : (generally replaced by fitrd or pt), as,

dptx^pw^ ^^ ''iloiKoyfveia tov, he went away with his family

;

vvy e«w, by the help of God.

no Modern Greek.

§ 81. Prepositions which govern the Accusative : «<$•,

ova, fie.

1. CIS :

to, towards, in, into, at : as, 6a xmdya tls Tfjv IloXiv, I shall

go to Constantinople (Stamboul) : 6a ^fxai tU ttjv oIkiop ivros

fvos TfTaprov, I shall be at home in a quarter of an hour.

Used in an elliptical construction with the Genitive : as,

6a (TVVaTTavTr)6a>fjL(v tls tov vnovpyov, for, 6a avvanavTT)6a)fi(v (Is rfjv

oiKiav TOV vnovpyov, we shall meet at the minister's.

2. avd

:

(a) up, upstream : as, 7rXe« dva (t6v) norapov, I sail upthe river.

(b) by (signifying divisions): as, abtvaav dva Tfaa-npas,

they marched by fours.

3. (ic, the common form of utrd, is always followed by the

Accusative—with, together with : as, fie Trjv 6vyaTepa tov, with

his daughter ; eKrinrja-e to SXoyov fie ttjp pd^bov tov, he struck

the horse with his stick.

§ 82. Prepositions which govern the Genitive and Accu-

sative : p-eTd, nepi, 8ta, vtto, KaTd, xmep,

1. (icrd :

(a) With Genitive—with, together with: as, fieTo. tUv

dbe\(f)(bu tov, (or, fui(\ pe tovs dbiKcfioiis tov), with his brothers.

(6) With Accusative—after (of time) : as, ptTo. ravra, after

this ; pera Tpels prfvas, after three months.

2. irepi (does not drop the eota before a vowel)

:

(a) With Genitive—about, regarding : as, opiXovptp ntpl

TOV ^aaiKecDs, we are talking about the king.

(6) WithA ccusative—round, about (of time and place) : as,

vnriyov ecfji-mros Ttepl ttjv 'AKponoXiv, I rode round the Acropolis.

3. Bid (vulgar form yid) :

(a) With Genitive—through, by means of: as, ^Xenopei,

biu tS)v 6(f)ddXp.S>v, we see with our eyes.

Prepositions. 1 11

(J) Of place, motion : as, hva t^j TroXeaj, thi-ough the

city; hia BahaatTTjs, by sea ; 8ia r^s yiaa-araXias, via Marseilles,

(c) With Accusative—on account of, for the sake of: as,

eraf dyaTTw 8ia ttju fxryrepa aas (or X^P'" ''^^ firjTpos craj), I love you

for your mother's sake ; iparci 8id nva, I ask for some one

;

Tov inaivSi hia ttjv diaycoyrjv tov, I |)raise him for his conduct

;

fiia Ti ; Why 1 On what account ]

(d) In the direction, for : as, 6a dvaxatpfjcra) avpiov Sia ttjv

TaK\lav, I shall start to-morrow for France.

(e) Followed by va and the Subjunctive—for the purpose

of, in order to : as, (ptpert poi vepbv feoToj» bia va ^vpiaOw, bring

me hot water that I may shave.

4. uTTo

:

(a) With Genitive—by (agent) : as, to fii^Xlov elvat ytypap.-

fifvov vno TOV Ka6r)yr]Tov, the book is written by the professor.

(6) With Accusative—under (of place) : as, t6 Biarpov tov

Aiovva-ov ('BdK)(Ov) dvai invo Ttjv 'AKpoTToXiv, or, vno Kara dno ttjv

'AKp6no\iv, the theatre of Dionysus (Bacchus) is under the

Acropolis.

(c) Under (of rule or sovereignty) : as, at 'IvStut tivai Inb

TT}v BaaiXia-aav ttjs 'AyyXias, India is Under the Queen of

England.

[d) Upon, on (of conditions) : inh tovs Spovs tovtovs, on

these conditions.

5. Kord :

(a) With Genitive—against : as, S dpxriyos t^? dvTino\iT(v-

a-(ats fKap.( \6yov kuto tov inovpyflov, the leader of the opposition

made a speech against the ministry.

(6) Down to, down on : as, enfat koto yrjs, he fell to the

ground.

(c) With A ccusative—according to : as, dvai dpiarovpyrfpa

KOTa Tfjv yraprju pov, or, Kar ipf, it is a masterpiece to mymind ; KaTa Tag ntpiaTdaus, according to circumstances.

II

a

Modern Greek.

(d) With Accusative—at (in point of time) : &s,€ytvvTi6r]

KOT fKfivov Tov xp^vov, liG was born at that time.

6. uTT^p

:

(a) With Genitive—for, in favour of (opposed to Kara) :

as, «a/xf \6yov iirtp rfjs 'AyyXiai, he spoke in favour of Eng-land ; vnfp irarplSos, for his country,

(6) With Accusative—over (motion) : ix'^PW^*' ^^^p 'ra

f(rKafifi€Pa, he exceeded the bounds of decency ^.

(c) Over, more than : as, firj Siafifivtjrf virep ras rptts Stpm,

do not stay more than three hours.

§ 83. Prepositions, which govern the Genitive, Dative,

and Accusative : irapa, tm, npos.

I. irapd

:

(a) With Genitive—from, by (agent) : as, eXadov Sapov

nap' aiiTov or an avrop, I received a present from him ; eypdcpr)

Trap' aiirov, it was written by him.

(6) With Dative—by, with, and at the house of : as, ij

apert) Kadtarq f/pas dyanrjTovs napa dea Kal dvBpwnois, virtue

renders us beloved both by God and by men.

(c) With Accusative—near: as, napa rfip BoKacraav, near

the sea.

(d) With Accusative—against, in contravention of: as,

enpa^f napa rrjv ovvdfjKijv, he acted in contravention of the

treaty.

(e) With Accusative—less, minus : as, tig ras oicrm napa

8€Ka Xenrd, at ten minutes to eight.

' This expression is interesting. In A no. Greek tnrip rcL fffKanpevaaWecrOai, meant to overleap the mark (Plato, Cratylus), tcL tOKapfiiva is

generally interpreted 'a trench as the limit of the leap of the irtvraexoi'

but the Modem Greek phrase would rather sug^'est that the meaningwas the same as t6 cxdnfta,—a place dug out and made soft for theleapers tc slight on.

I

Prepositions. 113

2. litl'.

(a) Wi(h Genitive—upon, (rest) : as, ^ ((fuj^fpis Ktlrai fVi

TTJs Tpane(T]tf the newspaper lies upon the table.

(6) In the time of, under (of government, or king) : as,

^ fj.fyd\r] iravmKrjs Tov Aov8ivov crvvf^r) tVi KapuXov B', the great

plague of London occurred in the time of Charles II.

(c) With Dative—on account of, for, on : as, Xwrrov/Ltai r/rl

Tji da-Btvfia eras, I grieve on account of your illness ; eVt toutw,

whereupon, upon tliis.

{d) With Accusative—on, upon, down on (implying

motion) : as, tppi^t t6 nui8\ tm to tdacftos, he dashed the child

on the ground.

(e) During : as, fVl uapavra rjjxtpas Sec ((payf Kptas, during

forty days he did not eat meat.

3. irpos:

(a) With Genitive—(elliptical construction) for the sake

of, by : as, npbs Qtov, for God's sake.

(6) With Dative—in addition to : as, npbs toIs aWois pds

tint, in addition to other things, he told us.

(c) With Accusative—to, or towards: as, dnerddrj irpos

tfif, he addressed himself to me ; dirjvdvvdr] npos ttjv BovXrjv,

he went towards the Chamber

§ 84. Remakks on the Prepositions.

. Prepositions (except tv, tls, «) are oxytone before their

after their case many are paroxytone, but in Modern

k they are seldom found in this position.

2. All Prepositions may be compounded with Verbs.

3. "When followed or compounded with a word beginning

writh a vowel, prepositions drop their final vowel. IIpo and

irtpi are exceptions to this rule. If the word has a rough

breathing, t and n final are changed to 6 and ^.

I

114 Modern Greek.

4. In composition :—«V and aiiv change their final i» to ^

before 3, tt, <^, \^, to y before y, »e, Xi I, aiid before X, /x, p, o-

to these letters. N.B. "When avv precedes f, or o- followed

by another consonant, the final v is dropped : but with iv the

final V is retained. Ex. ^ o-vfijrô-tr, the debate ; (vantipa, to I

instil.

I lean against the wall.

Close to the sea.

From what illness did

die ? From fever.

I know him by his voice.

he

On November 12.

I do not care about that.

They borrowed money at 30

per cent, on their monthly

wages.

I rely upon you and your

promise.

After the rain, the sun ap-

pears.

For three weeks, two months.

In Ancient Greek aud Mo-

dern Greek.

A quarter to eight.

I come from England.

Outside the town.

Nobody except you.

Exercise.

'S.Trfpiôfiai (Is Tov Tolxov.

Kovra (nXrjcrlov, <nfia\ fls rfjp

6aka<T<Tav.

Ano itoiav d<r6iveiav dmdavt;

E(C nvperov.

Tov yvapi^co ano rrfv (Jxovtjv

Tr/p 8ct>8(KaTr}u roi) 'Noep^plov,

Aev pi /ie'Xet Si' avTO.

E.bav(ia6rj(Tav ^fjpara irpos rpv

cLKovra Tots eKarov Trpo(ô(piX.r}'

(Tames tov ptjvialov purBov twi^

Baffiôpai els eVe /cat (Is rr/i

imocrxfo'iv aov.

Y(jT(pa ano rqv ^po^riv <f>(ti

v(Tai 6 ^los.

Aia rpfis (^8opd8as, 8va pijvas.

'Apxaia 'EXXijwfca Koi N/a 'EXXij-

viKa /cat v(o('KKr}viKa (vemar

cular, Pcu/xau/ca).

0/cro) napa rirapTov.

Epxopai dnb rfiv 'AyyXlav (h

T^s 'AyyXt'aj).

E^w ano r^v noXiv or (ktos ryi

TToXecof.

Kavfvas (ktos crov.

Prepositions* 115

Yesterday I was at your

brother's.

r have not my watch with

me.

Be took him by the hair.

Death for the fatherland.

For the present .... for the

future however.

His love towards me.

^bout 9 o'clock.

Inside the town.

On the table.

wonder at that.

Che money changers asked a

draclime too much for

every gold piece.

Cvery two days,

iefore the door.

•"ive minutes to twelve.

k.t that time.

!liey sell the oka (about

3 lbs.) at I o drachmae.

*X^<f TJflOVV fls TOV d8t\(f)0V (TOV,

(high style) rrapa r^ ddcX^^

<rov.

Afu €)((i> TO i>po\6yi6v iiov /tnî'

fiov.

Top (TTtaa-fv arrh ra fiaXXtd.

'0 VTTfp narplbos Qavaros.

Kara to napov . . . , tov XoiwoC Or

tlTTO TOvbf Koi fls TO f^qS, .

H npos ffJif aydnr] tov.

Hepl Tas ivvia,

*Ewos TTjs TToXco); {jj.io'a tts rifv

TToXip).

'ETrdvo) (Is TO Tpani^t (ejri t^s

Tpan(Cls)'

AnopSt St* airro,

Mlau 8pa)(pf]v ittpiiiKfOv f^rfrovv

01 dpyvpapoiôl did Kadf XP^~

aovv vopurpa.

Kddf dvo) fiptpcts,

Upo Trig 6vpas, fpiirpos els ttjU

Ovpav.

Am8(Ka napa nivTt (XeTrrd).

Etf or Kara tov Kaipov (K(Ivov.

To iTdiKovv or TrwXctrot npos btKa

dpaxpMs TT^v oKav,

Vocabulary.

) run, Tp(x<i».

le wisdom, fj aro<f>ia.

16 integrity, fj tipiottjs.

pright, honest, Tipios,

W prison, fj (f>v\aKrj,

the East, ^ *AvaToK^.

marble, t6 pAppapov,

the shop, TO payaêiov, to fp~

yaaTTjpiov.

the cage, 6 kX«]36s (to kXw/Si'oi').

I 2

1

1

6 Modern Greek.

to draw caricatures, (cd/xv«

mind your own business, kvt-

Ta^f TTjiv'^ bovKfia(v) <tov.

the police, 17 darvvonia.

to wipe out, (|aXe(</>(u.

the sponge, 6 (nroyyof.

be quick, ypfjyopa.

the corner, 17 yavia,

the chain, ij aXuo-tt.

my wife, ^ av^vyos fioo.

Exercise.

He ran up the hill, "Why are you always speaking against

me and in favour of my rival] Because in my opinion

(according to me) he is far above you in wisdom and in-

tegrity. What do you know about wisdom 1 In two years'

time, you shall be in prison with your wise and upright

friend. Go through the town, and look towards the East

;

on the hill you will see a house with marble walls. In the

shop was a man in a cage, and beside it two black slaves.

It is against the law to draw caricatures on the wall. Mind

your own business ; the house was built by me, and I shall

put anything I like upon the walls or inside it, on the top

or underneath it. The police are coming. Quick 1 give me

something to wipe it out. Come and stand in front of it to

hide it from the eye of the law. Throw me a sponge out of

the window. For goodness' sake, be quick, or they will be

round the corner. I shall be bound with chains and torn

from my wife and family.

§ 85. ADVERBS.

I. Adverbs of Manner and of Kind.

Those Adverbs of Manner and of Kind which are formed

from Adjectives have already been mentioned in § 40. Of

the rest the following are the most important.

Adverbs. 11

7

aXXccdf, otherwise.

Xaa, straight ; Ex. Go straight up, Ujjyaivt to-a inava.

taa, itra, or tana, lo-tn, exactly.

(Tai, thus (ovTui).

fTai K fTtrt, pretty well, so so. Ex. How are you ? ns>s

flvOf ; Pretty well, ero-t < frai.

ncos, how.

Kadas, «f, on-cos, thus, as.

§ 86. Adverbs of Time.

x6(s, yesterday.

(TTjiMfpov, to-day.

avpiov, to-morrow.

npoxSis, the day before yesterday (used for any recent

day).

fudavpiov, the day after to-morrow (used for any inter-

mediate future day).

ajrd^e, this evening.

e^eVof, this year.

irtpva-i, last year.

Tov xpoyov, next year.

iTore, never. Ex. -noTe p.ov, never in my life.

TTOTt ; when ?

irdvTore, always. *

Tore, then.

Tapa, or Topa, now.

(Is TO f^TJs, for the future.

€i6vs, immediately.

uptaas, immediately, at once.

aKopr], yet.

ciXoefa, oXovev^ Continually, incessantly.

liS Modern Greek.

§ 87. Aiverhi of Place.

oirov, TTov, where.

navTov, everywhere.

fSco, (VTfiOfv, here, hence.

cKfi, fKfidev, there, thence.

ava, tnava, up, above.

Kara, down. Under, below.

ftfra^v, between, among.

fioKpav, far.

fftTipos, forward, before.

oTTtVo), behind.

eWo'y, ;xe(ra, inside, within.

tKTQs, besides, outside, without.

Tikqcrlov, near.

Adverbs of place have the following terminations •—

-

(a) 6i, rest in a place, avr66i, there.

(6) 6(v, motion from, 'HX^of (KfWtv, I came thence,

(c) a-f, and 8f, motion towards, 'YTrrjya (Ktlcrt, (trnevaa

oi(caS«, I went thither, I hurried towards home.

§ 88. Miseellaneotts Adverbs,

vat, yes.

fiakia-ra, certainly.

Sxi, no ; oxt 8a, no indeed.

bfv, not (with Indicative).

(ifi, not (with other moods and the Verb Infinite).

TToXv, napa ttoXv, much, too much,

(Txf^ov, nearly.

trcos, perhaps.

Kav, for Koi au, at least, even.

Conjunctions. 119

frX/oi/, more. Ex. AtV fjfinopco 7r\(ov va npoxap^a-u), I can

go on no more.

troAtj', again.

\iav, very.

£x. 'Yirfiyfre ; have you been ? Nat', yes. AivaaSe va TO

KafiTjTf ; can you do it 1 MaXia-ra, certainly. t6 eKofiert ; did

you do it 1 "Oxi, no. Aiv to fKafta, I did not do it. M^ to

Kdfir)s, do not do it. Uapa TToXw oKpi^d, too dear. 'Iiras 6a

(K0rj, perhaps he will come. Eivat \iav oTrXovs, he is very simple.

OiiBf Kav ((}>dvTi, he did not even appear.

§ 89. Conjunctions.

Kal, and.

if Kai, though, although.

ovT(—ovTf, neither—nor.

ov8f, neither, nor (emphatic).

nrjTf—fif)Tt, neither—nor.

Hfu—be, indeed—but.

6 nev—6 fit, the one—the other.

aX\a, but.

ofi(os, however ; olx ^ttov Sfiws, nevertheless.

(dv, nv, if. 'Edv and orav with both Indicative and

Subjunctive in Modern Greek.

$

—

^, either—or.

etTf

—

f'tre, either—or.

oTav, when.

ore, when (with the Indicative),

ciuf, until.

irpiv, before (always followed by the Subjunctive).

d(p^ ov, d(})ov, since.

tV «, fvcp, whilst.

a^.a, as soon as.

iioTi, because.

120 Modern Greek,

SxTTf, so that.

iva, that.

va, that (followed hy Subjunctive).

Ex. de\a> va Xva (Anc. 6(\<o Xiitiv), I whh to loose.

With the Imperfect it expresses a desire. Ex. Sa tKOfi^tp

ainro, Oh, that he would do that.

oTi, that.

ona>s, in order that.

fiTj, lest, that not.

The particles ydp and oSv are now never used in con-

versation.

§ 90. Intekjections.

Tt Kpifia, what a pity.

fia Tov Aw, by Jupiter.

Kuvfiivf, poor fellow.

av6f]Tf, you fool.

"Xafinpa, splendid.

tvyt, well done.

finpa^o, bravo.

ZfjTca, hurrah.

ZfiTcaaav ot Baa-iXels, long live the King and Queen.

W apaia nov thai, how beautiful it is.

§ 01. Remarks on the Peculiaeities of Modern

Greek Syntax.

The cultivated language for the most part preserves the

grammatical forms of the classical period. The relation of

Modern to Classical Greek is most ably treated of in Ap-pendix II. Only the more ordinary cases, where the Modein

form differs from the Ancient, will be noted below.

The Cases. 121

§ 02. The Article.

1. There is no indefinite Article. In conversation its

place is sometimes filled by ««, \i\.a, ev, or by the indefinite

Pronoun, tIs. * Some ' (partitive) is not translated : as, give

me some bread, 8dr /xot ^/rw/ii, or boi fwi okiyov ^ufiL I have no

bread, otv ?)(ci) i^co/xi.

2. If the Adjective precedes the Substantive, the definite

article is placed before the two ; if the Adjective follows the

Substantive, the definite article is repeated before each : as,

17 i)pala yvvT] or r) yvvr] t] (opala (emphatic), the beautiful woman.

3. If a demonstrative Pronoun {alroi, eKtivos) precedes the

Substantive, the definite Article stands between the two : as,

(Kflvos 6 av6pumoi, that man. *OXov and nas when used in tlie

sense of ' all ' follow the same rule.

4. Names of Persons, Cities, Countries, are generally

preceded by the definite Article : as, 6 Kvpior OidbbiyKTutv,

Monsieur Waddington; ^ Kvnpos, Cyprus ; t6 Aovdlvov, Lon-

don 3 6 (TviTayflorap\i]s OvaiT, Colonel White.

5. In writing, all the words which depend upon a sub-

stantive can be inserted between it and the Article : as, rj

iT(p\ ^s 6 Xoyor fniTponTj, the commission in question.

In the same manner dependent words can be inserted

between a substantive and a participle : as, yvvaiKo {yvvrj)

iv Ttj xr)p(ia biareXovaa, a woman continuing in widowhood.

6. The Article is often used in the place of airor, oit^, avro,

he, she, it : as, to (^6ptfx.d tov, his coat ; roij fina, I told him.

In these cases the Article is properly a curtailed form of airos,

but no sign is used to denote this

§ 93. The Cases.

I. In Modern Greek the Prepositions are often used to

express the force of the Genitive or Dative. The Genitive

[23 Modern Greek.

is replaced by ano or /ê with the Accusative, and the Dative

by ets with the Accusative : as, tXni ro <»? rov vTrqpfTriv, tell it

to the servant.

2. The Accusative* sometimes stands in the place of the

Dative : as, /i« (he, he told me, for fxol eint. The Genitive

fiov is also employed in the vernacular; as, fxov fine.

3. The Nominative is sometimes employed, where we use

the Genitive : as, eva ôvKuXt Kpaai, a bottle of wine ; tva

^(vydpi ydvTia, a pair of gloves.

4. The Genitive Absolute is used in writing but not in

conversation.

§ 94. The Adjective.

1. The Adjective stands before the Substantive, with which

it agrees, except when the two together form the Predicate.

Even then, the Adjective usually stands first, as, 6 icaXof

avdpcoTTOS, the good manJ

6 xmripirrji flvM KoKos avdpconos, or

avdpairos Ka\6s.

2. If an Adjective stands without a Substantive, avSpanos,

a man, is understood if it is Masculine ; npaypa, a thing, if

it is Neuter. Ex. ot irXoiaioi, the rich men ; eivai Svo-koXov,

it is a difficult thing.

3. In the written language the Comparative is followed by

the Genitive or by napd ; as, eipai KaXlîrepos eKeivov, I am

better than that man. In the spoken language the Com-

parative is generally followed by otto, with the Accusative,

as, o (fiiKos aas fivai v-^j^rjXorepos air eKeivov, your friend is taller

than that man.

4. The Comparative is joined to Verbs by the words, nap

* A very common phrase is, N<i aas flwai, Let me tell you. The tra-

veller will hear this, whenever a Greek ia going to begin a story or

wishes to attract his hearer's attention. (It is pronounced 'Nasspo'

or ' Nashpo,' quickly, as if one word.

The Pronouns. 123

o rt, nap otrov, a(ji* o ri, d(f> oa-ov, as, tiuai KaWlrrpog avdpconos

nap' o Ti aroxdCtaBf, he is a better man than you imagine.

§ 95. The Numerals

1. When Numerals (up to 12) are employed in the Femi-

nine, cipa, hour, o'clock, is understood, as, ds rfjv plav {copav),

at one o'clock ; fls rag 6kto> (&pas), at eight o'clock.

2. To denote a date they are put in the Neuter Plural

(fTT), years, understood), as fls ra ;f/Xta oKTOKoaia Trfvfjvra enrd

{fTTj), in 1857 ; or, in more elevated language, kuto. to ;^tXto<7Tow

OKTaKocriocrrop irtvrqKoarov t^bopov eros.

3. x'^'<»f> ft thousand, is properly a Substantive, and

governs the Genitive, as, rpfts x*^'"^*f dvdpcmcov, but it is

frequently used as a Numeral Adjective, as, rp«s :t»XtaSer

avdpanoi, three thousand men.

§ 06. The Pronouns.

1. The Personal Pronouns are only used before the Verb,

when special emphasis has to be laid on the person, as,

ryot) TO (Kapa o^t fKflvos, I did it, not that man.

2. Tlie monosyllabic Personal Pronouns {pov, pi, etc.) are

placed before the Verb, unless it is in the Imperative, as, o-e

f?5e, he saw you ; but n^jjo-c pt, let me alone.

3. If two such Pronouns are employed in the same sen-

tence, one in the Accusative and the other in the Genitive or

Dative, the one in the Accusative is placed last, as, bos pol to,

give it me.

4. In the Compound Tenses these Pronouns are placed

before €x<". but between ffeXo) and the Verb, as, tov fx<^ tlnti, I

have told him ; 6fKa> tov fXnfi, I will tell him. They are also

placed between the Particles, 6d, av, pi), hev, as, vd, and the

Verb, as, 6a to Kapa, I will do it; &s t6 Xd^rj, let him take it.

134 Modern Greek.

5. The Possessive Pronouns can either follow the Substan-

tive they depend on, or stand between the Adjective and the

Substantive, as, 6 navpos (tkvXos fxov, or, 6 fiavpoi fiov (tkvXos,

my black dog.

6. The Relative Pronoun agrees in Gender, Number, and

Person with its antecedent, but in Case it belongs to its own

clause, as, 6 avdpanos, top ottoIov (hioi^av, the man whom they

sent away ; iya, oarn fKapa Toxiro, I, who did this,

7. What ! How ! are expressed by ri (indecl.), as, ri iapaia

6ia ! "What a beautiful view ! t» \ap.np6v ! How splendid !

8. Some one (indef.) can be rendered by rls (indef.), as,

pLoi tme Tis, some one told me, I was told. The more usual

rendering is by the third person singular passive, as, Xeyerat,

it is said, or, the third person plural active, as, \eyovai, they

say.

9. As in French, the Negative Pronouns, Kavtts (contrac-

tion of Koi-av-fls), nobody, somebody, norf, never, rlnort,

nothing, require a second negation with the Verb, as, biv

tKapxi rinoTf, I did nothing; Kavtis 8ev Bvvarai, no one can.

I o. ' None,' * no,' have not an exact equivalent in Greek.

The sentence must be turned ; as, I have no money, SeV exa

II. It is worthy of notice that in the Modern Forms

(fieva for ffjif and eVeVa for ae the original p of the Accusa-

tive is preserved. This v may represent the Sanscrit m, as,

mam, tvdm ; but it is more probably a false analogy from

ovSeva.

§ 97. The Veeb.

1. In Modem Greek there is no Middle Voice, but the

Passive has in some cases a Reflexive and in others a Reci-

procal force, as (l) viirrofiai, I wash myself; (2) dyan<s3^6a,

we love one another.

2. Neuter Verbs are both Active and Passive in form, but

The Verb. 125

cannot govern an object in the Accusative, tpxcfiai, I come

;

irqyaivo), I go.

3. The Ancient Infinitive is rendered by vd and the Sub-

junctive, or by oTt and the Indicative. Thus GeXa ekfftlv is

rendered 6f\<o va fXBm ; ma-rfva aKovfiv is rendered nurrtva on

aKova.

Only monosyllables can stand between vd, 6a, as, biv, n^,

and the Verb.

4. The Participles are much less frequently used. The

language is more analytic. Thus (pxofj.(vos fl8op is rendered

orav f)px6nT}v (ibov ; but in some phrases the relative Pronoun

and the Indicative in English is rendered by the Participle

in Greek. The man who bears this letter, 6 (f}€p<ov t^k

fniarokrjv rairrrjp.

5. The distinction between the Tenses formed from the

Present Stem (viz. the Imperfect, First Future, and First

Conditional) and those formed from the Aorist Stem (viz.

the Aorist, Second Future, and Second Conditional) must be

carefully observed. The former have reference to repeated

or continued action, the latter to an action to be performed

once.

Ex. da Trrjyaiva (First Future) (Is rfjv 'A/cpojroXti' Kaff fKaa-Trjp,

I shall go to the Acropolis every day ; 6a im-oya (Second

Future) arjpepov tls tijj/ Tpdnt^av, I shall go to the Bank to-

day (once) ; typa^ov (Imp.) orav flafi\6t, I was writing when

he came in ; rjyip6r}v (Aor.) orav fla-ri\6t, I rose when he

came in.

6. The Perfect is very seldom employed. The Aorist and

Imperfect denote all stages of past time, thus, I have been

four times, and, I went four times, are both translated by

the Aorist, vTtTJya rerpoKis.

7

.

The negative ttv is only used with the Indicative ; p.^

with the other Moods and with the Participles.

126 Modern Greek,

Exercises on the Foregoing Rules of Syntax.

TO APGPON.

©f'Xo) okiyo '^dpi, tfp divaral rn va (fxiyrj fitpiSa ins avT'^P,

Atv Bvvajxai pa aov doxra avfiôvXrjv riva. Tipos fipcu to apdlop

fKtiPO fiaipov akoyop, to mroiop ^XtTTti tis Kaff fKacTTrjp (Jjpfpap) fls

TOP bpopop tS)p llaTtjcriatv ' To ylâpop^ akoyop dpijKfi fls fpa dîa>fia-

TiKOP Tov nvpo^qXiKov, * aWd Sep (i8op to /xavpop, Aiari dtp dyopd-

fcTe T^v oIkiov fKfiptfPJ

'O (}>i\os e8S> 6a ttjp fjyopa^fp tap fix* to

XptjfiaTa aras. 'O k, Kovp,ovp8ovpos (ipai npudvTrovpyos, Ka\ 6 k, ArjXi-

yidpprjs vnovpyos t5>p fâTtptKap^ (1879). 'O Bopvôs T^f 6aXdavr]S.

'O av6p(x)TTOs 6 OTTolos /i^vft tls TTjP otKiaf fipai avp^das fvrvxris.

'H fPfpyfia Tfjs TovpKias Ka\ r) tcop Avpdpewp ttrxop fnippoijv inX

TovTov, O (rv^vyos ttjs (j)fp(Tai iroXv aaxfjpa.* ivpbs ra TfKva tov.

II.

HAPATHPHSEIS EDI TON lIT02Ei2N.

H X«/i/3os^ TjTO yf/idnj {jiXrjprjs^ VfpoVy axTTf tbaKa fiiap irorca-

ovpa^ {fp pdKTpopf fls TOP xmripfTTjp koI tov tinop pa ttjp cTToyyiajj.

Ta p,dXXipa <f)op(paTa tivai to bpotrtparfpa'' kutu to depos. Tov

iipiXrjaa, dXXd Stp fjdfXrjaf p dnoKpidrj fls ipf. 'YTTTjpeTrjaf rpia

fTTf fls TOP OTpaTOP Koi TOTf fifTfTfdr]^ fls TTIP ((fifbpfiau. UXrjpaat

TOP dpa^dp 8vo (f>pdyKa Ka\ pjxro t^v mpav. O difpprjptvs* f^Tft f$

(fipdyKa rT)P rjfifpap. Hoias fjXiKias fiuai 6 Aidboxos ] Eifat fphtKa

fToip. E;^€Te fpa êvydpi vnobrjpaTa^* pa fit Sapfiatyrtl

' Grey. " Artillery oflBcer. • Minister of Foreign Affairs. * Be-haves very badly. * The boat. • A mop (Turkish). ' Coolest.* Was transferred. • The interpreter, cicerone.. *• A pair of boots.

Exercises on Rules of Syntax, 127

ni,

EniGETA.

'O \LtyaKoi jxavpos tricvKog tlvai Kakos (f)v\a§. OJ apxcuoi Kpl*

vovrai ^ imo Tti/av ort iiTTJpâv fjpideoi. . Ot <f)p6vipoi avdpamoi

KOfivovv pupias fPiore. EiVcu noXv fxaKpvrtpa dno Bpfintcriov fis

'AXf^dvBpfiav fj UTT 'Adrjvav. Eifat KoXkiTfpov va vndyj] Tis 8ia

^rjpas* fj 8ia BaXdairrjs. Ta drponXota ttjs TaKXiKrjs eVatpi'as' eivai

KoXXiTtpa tS)v aXXav (Taipiap. Oi 6po/iot Ttjs KiovaTavTivovTroXfus

tlvai voXv Ppanepoi* (âKuOapToi).

IV.

APieMHTIKA.

Tt &pa fivatJ

"Eivai TeVcrapey. 'ExrvTr/jaei' 1^ Ka\ fua^ (^pttrtiav)J

MaXtara jrpo fjfuafias (opas. Kara iroiov tros fyfPVTjdr] 6 Hirr',

Ets TO \iXia inraKocria irev^vra ivvia Koi eyeive TrpaBimovpyos (Is ra

;(iXia (irraKocria oyborjKovTa reaaapa, Ei/cocri piîXidfies cTpaTov

tjbvvcuno va bia^Sxn ra aivopa,

V.

ANTQNYMIAL

las X/yo), Kvpif, on ey« irptnti, va XajSca to xpfjpara^ kcu oxt fKelvos.

'Oî, d(f)fVTr],' eya (Kapa oXt]v ttjv fpyaaiav, Avros poi (vntv ort

trii TO *ix^s 8ft)<ret els avTov. KrvnTjae p( &v ToXpas koi 6a ai

^vaKTvnf](Ta).'' ©a tov (paxaipcova,^ dXXd pe (paxaipaxTfv avros

irpcoTos. To pavpov (ôpfpd pov fivai atcoviapfvov.* To SaicruXt'St,

TO OTTOioi' eSoxra fls ttjv d8(X(f>rjv pov ftckdirr}.^^ *E/xt, 6 onolos eicapa

t6 itdv hC avTovs, ptraxdpiôvraL TocovTorpoirasI

Ti apaia irpaia !

Tt KoXos avdpmnos irov eii'ai ! OibiiroTf "êCdfTai, aXX' al irXrjpo-

(fwpiai^^ TOV fivai aTfXtls. Aev TXaôv tiriaToXas urjpfpov.

* Are regarded. ' By land (literally, dry). ' Messageries Mari-times. * Dirty, foul. * That I ought to receive the money, • Master

;

a corruption of aiOfVTrjs ; adopted by the Turks as a title and re-intro-

dnced by them into Greece. ^ I will hit you back. • To stab with akiufe. * Dusty. ^ Has been stolen. ^^ His information is incomplete.

128 Modern Greek.

VI.

PHMATA.

'Ew-VTr^^v' iv w tnaiâ (or Trat'fw*') to cricket. 'H/xTropov^fv â

fior)0a>iifp dWr)\ovs (por]da>fif6a) tav <7V fifivrjS ttkttos. IlTjyaLvei

vii (TVfiôvkfvdfi Tov larpov. "HKovcra on biu tivai KoKd, axrvf rjkOov

va fptoTTja-oi TTfpl aiiTov. Qa nrjyaivrfre^ tts to Btarpov rov ^fipmva

TovTovi *0x' ''ôXii frvx^d, 0a rwayto' avpiov ro fcmtpas va iSw

' II TrOVatore' kot fâipfo-tv.* AiapKova-ris rrjs tnavatTrdtTtas'^ oi

*E\X»;i'«r firoXtprjcrav ytwaicos. 'O nv6pa>nos, 6 onolos (kr]<TT((i$T),

(Ivai 6 TpantCiTrjs pov. Aupxcrai rtr tov Kmpov rov evx'^piarcos

rrat'fwv iridvo (KktiboKvpâiXov). "E^w ypdyj/d (ey/iatâ) (Is tov iv

AofSt'fO) vpdKTopd'' pov. "Eypayf/a ar]pfpov fr/roii' irfpiaaoTfpa

XP^poTO. hiyovcriv oTt 6a o-vp^rj noXiTiKr) Kpiais. AtaSt'Sfrat * oti

6 npecr^vs iv KcovcrTavTivovnoKfi TraprjTTjdrj Ka\ on avriKaTfarddq

VTTO TOV A. Kanoios po\ dnev on â6e els tov x^pov ttjv napeXBovcrav

vvKTa, 'A<p' ov rjyopdaaTf to /3i/3Xio»' itpfTtd va to dvayvaxnjfrt.

VII.

nPOGESEIS.

Uriyawe tts rh BiaTpov dvr ipov. *0;î, (vxapia-Tto, t(v 6a ff(\6co

eK Trjs oIkios tvtKa tov yj/îxovs. 'Earddrj irpo tov (piroptKOv (ot/cou)'

KoL fTpdfiriê to. pdK\id tov, ftrfiTa St Tptâs koto, tov toixov f<f)ovfv6r].

Atari Ct^*^^ TtepifrcroTtpa dno ipiva Trap oaa ^6fX(s (rjT-qatt (av

^prjv "EWijv ; Miav Tiprjv, Kvpit, fxopfv St' oXovs. KaXa, No/xtfa)

on 1 2 <^pdyKa ttjv fjpfpav 8t o\a ^^ elvai apKerd. Aev irXrjpovoi

irepteraoTtpa. BaX« rd wpdypaTa ^^ pov tU ttjv apaâv.

^ I was struck. ' Faithful. ' Note the force of the two tenses.

* As an exception. ' During the Revolution. Genitive Absolute.

• Who was robbed. '' My agent. * It is reported. * Shop. '• Than

you would ask. " For all. " Put my things.

Prosody. i'29

§ 98. Prosody.

T. In speaking, the Greeks emphasize and prolong the

accented syllable, to the exclusion of any diflference in dura-

tion between long and short vowels. The Prosody of Modern

Greek is founded upon this practice.

2. Accented syllables are treated as long, with the ex-

ception of a few monosyllables, where the accent is not

pronounced.

Unaccented syllables are treated as short.

Thus avTo? is considered an iambus (*-»-).

^<X(i3 is considered a trochee (-^).

avdpanos is considered a dactyl (-"îv^).

fvyfvf]i is considered an anapaest (^v.^).

3. The principal and more simple ancient metres are used

by the Greek ])oets of to-day. Perhaps the most con mon

metre in tlie longer poems is that called the ' political/ of

which the following lines will serve as examples,

—

Aristophanes, T/ie Wasps, 244:

r 2 3 4 __ 5 6 7

) eVIavTov

I

as k6\|afxev \ovs a>v

||^6i/c|ô-eV

|aK\a

Jquantitative.

On p. 189:

1 ,^ ^ 3 4 5 ^7

1) kCI

OTuPf I iTftoliaX\

T] avy\ij, ae|j86â ! 6puiLaa\\ievfj

jaccentual.

All 1234 5 67ii{J) A I captatn

|bold 6f

jHalijfax whS \\ lived In

(country

|

quarters.

'be metre is trochaic tetrameter catalectic, with anacrusis,

e. with a syllable at the beginning of the verse which is not

e'ckoned in the metre, but serves as a ' back-stroke ' {avuKpov

[)lii»|w)> preparatory to getting the metre under weigh. In (i)

'lis syllable is in, in (2) kC , in (3) 'A.' A trochee is — o :

E

130 Modern Greek.

a trochaic * metre ' = a trochaic dipodia = two trochees (or

their substitutes) : a trochaic tetrameter ought therefore to

contain 8 trochees. The above verses contain only 7 : they

are therefore called ' catalectic/ ' imperfect ' : though this

term is more commonly applied to a trochaic tetrameter

which lacks only one syllable.

As to caesura, the rule requires that the first pair of

dipodise should terminate without caesura : thus, e. g., in

(i) the rule would have been broken if, instead of ovi sZv\\tj^Xk.\

fjaev we had oiJs oi\\6Sv tJTraerp^ej/.

The scheme of the trochaic tetrameter catalectic metre is

as follows,

—

lacru

PAKT II.

DIALOGUES AND LETTERa

CONTENTS.

Dialogues.

PAOV

1. Ordinary Phrases 133

2. Travelling by Steamer (Corfu to the Pii-seus) . • .13+3. Arrival at an Hotel ........ 139

4. With a Greek Master 142

5. With a Guide 145

6. Asking the Way 146

7. Presenting a Letter of Introduction 147

8. At the PostOfSce 149

9. Athens 151

10. About a Family in which to Reside . . . . • 155

11. With the Head of a Family (Terms, etc.) . . . .15712 Arrival in a Family ........ 159

13. Meeting in the Street ...*.... 161

14. In a Cafi£ 161

15. With a Washerwoman........ 163

16. In a Bookseller's 164

17. In a Stationer's . . ., . , . , .166I 18, Travelling in the Interior ....... 167

19. Shooting . . ...• •.•.171£ 2

132 Modern Greek.

Lettees.

PAGE

1. Invitations. Answers . . 174

2. To the Director of the Post-OflSice . ^ . . . .1763. To a Greek Master 1 76

4. To Engage Rooms at an Hotel , . . . . ,1785. To a Doctor 178

6. Requesting a Letter of Introduction 180

7' To the Minister of the Interior, asking whether it is safe

to travel in the Interior . . , , . . iSo

8. Reply to No. 7 182

9. Information about Athena . , 1S2

PART II.

DIALOGUES.

(1) Ordinary Phrases.

Good morning. How do you

do 1 How are you 1

Good bye. Au revoir. Good

night.

Excuse me. It is mine. Give

me that, please.

I cannot understand you.

Please repeat. Please speak

slowly.

Can you talk English, French,

German, or Italian ]

Write it down. What do you

mean ] I do not know.

Very well. Splendid. Thank

you.

I am much obliged to you.

You are most kind.

Never mind. I do not care

about that.

I am very sorry.

Please tell me your name.

Where do you live 1

What o'clock is it 1

KaXfju ^fiepav (pronounced koX*

Tjfjifpa), Ti KcifivfTf', UwsfLcrde;

XaiptTt, Kdkrjv dvrdiicoiTtv,

KaXfjv PVKTa (pr. KaXtjvvicTa}.

SvyyvwixTjp, Eivai IBikop fjiov,

Aos (boTf) fioi fiidvoy napa-

Ka\S>,

Aep bvpafiai va <raf ivporjcrco,

'E7ravaKd^eT€ napaKokS). Op.i-

Xijo-are dpya, napaKoXci.

'O/itXeiTf 'AyyXtKo, FaXXtKa, Tep-

HapiKa TJ IrdkiKa ',

Tpa^ari to, Ti ivvoureJ

Atv

rj^fvpoi.

rioXv Koka. Aafinpa, Kv)(apurToi>.

25? (ifjuu TToXu vTr6)(p(a)s.

Eiadf TToXv KoKos.

Aev TTfipdCti. Aev [Xf fifXei St*

avTO.

AvTTovfiai noKv.

Etn^«(Te) poi TO ovop.d aov irapa,'

KciKai,

Uov KaTOlKflTtJ

Tt S)pa (Ivoi f

134 Dialogues.

When do you leave for Con-

stantinople ?

Take care. Go faster. Stop,

coachman. Turn to the

right—left.

Go on. Wait. Return at

II p.m.

How far is it %

Ilore ai'a;â)peTrf 5*a n]v Kcov-

VTavrwoxmoKw;

Tlpoaeê. Ufjyaivt yprjyopuTfpa

(pyXrjyopaTepa). ^Tacrov ajiaâ.

STpfyjre 8tîd— apiarepd,

Upoxapeij or ffjLwpos. Ileptpfve.

EiriarpeyJAt els ras fv8(Ka p.. p.

(jifra pecrrip^plav),

Il6(rov paKpav (ivai\

(2) Tkavellino by

Steamer.

Corfu to the Piraeus.

Has the steamer from Trieste

arrived ?

It will be late to-day, on ac-

count of the bad weather.

When does the steamer for

Pirseus sail 1

In two hours.

Is the captain on board ? I

want to speak to liim.

Yes, sir ; I will take you to

him.

AVhere is my cabin ]

For how many persons, sir ?

I am alone.

"What luggage will you have

in the cabin 1

I want all my luggage in.

TASEIAION (nEPmrHSIS) Al'

ATMOnAOIOY.

'Atto Kfpicipas (Is Ileipaia,

''E(f)da(Tf rb dTp,67T\oiov (k Tep-

y((TTr)s ;

9* dpyrjo-rj (rfjpepov tvfKa t^s

KaKOKaipiag.

XIoTf d.va)(()>p(i TO urpoTiKoiov Bia

Tov Jldpaid

;

MiTci 8vo &pas,

*0 Tfkoiapxos fivai tig t& dr/mJ-

ttKoiuu^ ©eXo) va tov 6piX^(Ta>.

MdXtora, Kvpie' 6a ads oSijyjJtrw

irpos avTov.

Uov tivai 6 daKapiaKos pov j

Ata TTOcra a.Top.a, KvpitJ

"Eipai povos.

Uo'ia irpdypuTa (jrolas dnoaK(vas)

6f\eT€ va exr}T€ fls tov Qakapiv

Kov aas'f

GcAci) Ska Ta Trpdy/iaTa p.ov.

Corfti to the Pirceus. -^^^

You are not allowed, sir, to

have the large box iu the

cabin.

Well, bring the bag and hat

box.

Steward, bring some water

and a towel.

At what o'clock is dinner %

There will be no dinner on

board to-day, sir.

I must have something. Give

me an omelette, some beef,

and a bottle of Corinthian

wine.

When will you have it, sir %

At once. As soon as we start.

Let me be aloue in the cabin

if possible.

There is only one sheet on the

bed.

That is the custom here, sir.

I do not care what the custom

is: I insist upon having

two.

Give me a glass of water

Wake me to-morrow before

we reach Cephalonia.

Wake me to-morrow at six.

Are we iu sight of Cepha-

lonia ?

Yes, sir; we shall arrive in

half- an-hour.

Aei* firirpeTTfTai, Kvpie, va e^'/''"*

TO fitya K10UITIOU tls tov 6aXa-

fltCTKOV.

KaXd' (pfpf TOV aaKKOv Koi t^v

KaneXitpav (niXodr'jKTjv),

Tpocf)o86Ta, <pepf pov oXiyov vepov

Kal p'lav piTokiav.

TLolav a>pav fivai rb yevpa (to

delnvov^J

AtV 6a fxn yfvpa iv t» dr/xo-

nko'm (rrjpfpov, Kvpie.

Upentt va (ftdyca kuti Tt. Aor

pot {hoae pov) piav opfXtrrav,

oXiyov IBcoBivov Kal piau (f>iuXi]v

KoptpdiaKov Kpacri.

ndre Ta deXere, KvpW,

IlapavTa. "Evdiis dpa dvax<>>p']0'a-

p(v.

QeXa va ^pai povos, tl bvvarov, iv

T(S 6aXapi(TKa,

'Yndpxfi ev povov vivbovt fts to

Kpf^^dri.

OvTa avveid'L^trai fvravda, Kvpit.

AeV pe peXti iro'ia fivai fj <rvvfi6(ia

ivravda' enipfva) va pot 8o6wat

Svo.

Ao's poi iv iroT^pi(ov) v(p6{y).

Svnvrjae pe avpiov nplv (f)da(roi-

pfv tls TTjV K(cf)aXXriviav.

SvTTvrjtTf pe avpiov els tcls e^.

BXeTTopev Tr)P Ke((>aXXr]viap j

MaXtora, Kvpit' 6a (f>6a(ran€v

fitTO. ^piatiav &pay.

136 Dialogues.

Put some hot water in the

basin, and clean my boots.

Bring me some coffee and a

biscuit.

Yes, sir ; will you have any-

thing else 1

I should like an egg, but be

quick about it.

AVhat is the name of thistown?

Argostoli.

Is it the first time that you

visit Greece?

No ; I have been in Greece

before, but I have never

come this way.

The view is very fine.

That mountain is grand.

Where is Ithaca %

There, far away on the left.

What a ban'en'rock it looks.

Is this island Zante 1

Yes, ' Zante, Zante, Fior di

Levante.' In summer it is

like a lovely garden.

"WTien shall we reach Patras ?

We shall be there at 7 p.m.

and stay till 1 1 p.m., and

reach New Corinth at 6 to-

morrow morning.

BdXf oKiyov ^«jtov vepbv els rrjv

XeKavriv koi Kitdi'purov {yvaXiat)

TO viTo8r]fj.aTd fiov,

^fpt fjiov vXiyov Ka(f)f Koi tv

naîfj-dSi {Slnvpov).

MiiXlffTQ, Kvpif' 6i\(T€ r'iTIOTt

riXXoJ

Gt'Xo) (V avyov, alCKa Ki'ifit oyKf)-

yoapa,

nw9 ovofidêrai rj TroXts avrr) ;

*PipyocTTokiov.

E(i/a( T} irpoiTT] (f)opa, KaQ^ riv

inicTKenTfadf rr/if EXXn'da

;

*0;^t" rfkOov tls rfjv 'EXXdSa

iiX\oT€, dXX' ovbtnoTf rj\6op 8ia

T^s obov Tavrrjs.

'H 6ea fivai wpaiordn;.

To opos avTo f ij/at fifyaXoTrptnts.

Tlov ewai fj 'l6aia)j

E»cei fiuKpav trpos ra dpicmpa.

Tt yvfxvos ^pd)(os (palvfrai,

'H vrj<Tos avTTj (ivat rj ZaKwOos]

MdXtcrra'

*T] ZaKVvBos, T] ZdKVv6os,

TO I'lvdos TTJs 'AvaraKrjs . .

Kara to KoXoKoipi 6p.oia^(i /xa-

yfVTlKOV Krj770V.

ndre 6a (p6da<op(v els Tas Hd-

Tpas;

Qa rjpLfOa tKe'i els Tas fTTTO. fi.H.,

6a p.eivaip.ev fJtexP'' '''Vêu8f-

KaTrjs fi.fi. Kai 6a <p6d<ra>pfv els

Tijv Neai' Kopivdop els tus e^

avpiOV TO TT/JCOl.

Corfu to the Piiccus. ^Zl

Do you intend to go ashore 1

How much do you charge to

take me on shore ]

Two francs.

That is too much ; I will give

you one.

Very good, sir; here is myboat.

Bring that luggage.

Have you put all my things

in the boat ?

Howmany packages are there ?

Three, sir.

There ought to be four. Look

for the other.

Now are you ready ? Push

off.

There is a franc for you.

Have I time to go to the Con-

suhite before the steamer

starts ]

Yes, sir. The steamer does

not leave for four hours, and

the Consul lives close by.

Is this New Corinth 1

Yes. We have to disembark

at once, and drive across

the Isthmus.

Shall I not have time to

ascend Acro-Corinth %

No; the steamer sails from

Kalamaki as soon as the

SKOTTfverf va fîXdrjTf fi? Trjv

irjpdv ;

Uoaa 0€\ets vd fie ^yaXr]s eôo

{va fie aiToîâa-rfs^;

Avo (ppdyKa.

Eivat napa iroKv' 6a aov bdicru)

tva.

Hokv Kcikd, Kvpie' e8a> eivai fj

^dpKa pov (17 Xf'/iôf pov).

êpe aira to itpdypara.

"E/SoXff oka Ta Trpdypara pov

els TTjv \(pôv;

ndca tefiara (^dirotrKtvaV^ eivat ;

Tpi'u, Kvpie.

'Y-Tvpene va rjvai T((T(rapa' Kvrraê

8ta TO aWo.

EtVat fToipos TupaJ

Epvpos

(aTru>6r](Tov).

'iSoii fv (fypdyKov.

"E^co Kaipov va imdya eis to

Upo^fvelov irplv dvaûpriarj to

arpoTvKoiov]

MdXtora, Kvpie' to aTponXoiov

bev 6' dva)((i)pff(Trf Ttapa fieTa

Vfcraapas wpns, Ka\ 6 Trpo^tvos

KaToiKel ir\T)criov.

AvTT] eivai ij N«a K6piv6os^

M<i\i(TTa' fidvs irpenei v diro-

fiiâa6S)p(v Koi va SteXdapev

((f>dpd^r]s Tov 'icrdpov.

Aei/ 6a ex<>> Kaipov v dvaât etj

TOV ÂKpoKopivdov;

"Ox^' TO aTpoTTKoiov avaxcope'i

(K TOV KdKapaKlov ev6vs dpa

138 Dialogues,

passengers have crossed the

Isthmus.

What carriages are there 1

The Steamboat Company has

carnages, but I recommend

you to hire a private one.

Give five or six francs.

Steward, how much do I owe

you?

Ten fraacs in all, sir.

Here is a 20 franc piece.

Give me back ten.

I have only paper and cop-

per, sir. Here is half a

ten franc note and eight

francs of copper.

You are giving me too much.

No, sir; paper and copper

are depreciated (1879).

Please put this copper in

paper.

Can you take me to Kala-

maki, coachman 1

I am engaged, sir.

Send another carriage for me.

Put my luggage on the car-

riage. Quickly.

Drive on. Stop ! Go faster.

Do not beat your horses

like that.

Is that the steamer forPiraeus 1

I will go on board at once.

01 iinûTai hiaâxri rov Icrd'

fxoc.

Tt fidovs Sfiaâi vnapôvcriv;

H aTfioTrXoiKr] iraipia exêi afinâv,

aXXa eras crvviarco va fxio-daxrrjTe

filav idtaTiKrjv. Aclxrare TrtVre

fj (^ (fipayKa,

Tpofpobora ^TratSt), ttocto <rov

ofpeiKd);

Ev oXo) 8//ca <PpdyKa, Kvpie,

'I80V fv vofiirrfta xpvcrovu tS>v

eiKocrt (f>payK(ov. Entarpfôv

fioi (80s poi oTTiaoy) fieVa.

E;â) fiovov X^P''"' '^''' X'*^'f°''>

Kvpif, *l8ou TO fffiiav fvos X^P~

TovoyLicrpLaTOS ratp 8fKa (ppayKcov

Koi 6kto> (fypayKa tls x«^'"'''»

Mol Bidfis ndpa TroXXd.

*'0;^t, Kvpif' TO )(apTov6fU<Tna Kai

6 xoKkos (Lvai viroTfTip,T}p€Pa.

Ti;Xt^f (li X"P'"'0''> irapUKaXo),

Tov ;faX(c6i' TovTov.

Avvn<rai ph fte (f)fpf]S fls to

KakafiaKiop, ajxa^rjXaTaJ

E)(a> dyaiyiop, Kvpie.

2T«tXe fiov aWrjp a/iaâp,

BaXe TO npayfiwra fiov (n\ Ttjs

afia^rjs. Ta;êcar. Tpfjyopa.

'n.p0Xpf]O'0P (ffiwpos). 'Sracrov.

IlTjyaiPf TaxvTfpop. M^ KTxmas

€T(n TO oXoyd aov.

Ekupo fivai TO dr/xowXotov 8ia

TOP IlfipaLd j Qa iiriîâcrBS)

dfiia-ms.

Arrival at an Hotel. 139

Steward, I want some break-

fast. Let me have some fish

and lamb.

Give me some red (black)

wine.

I cannot drink the Avine

resin6.

Shall we pass Salamis and

Aegina 1 Please point them

out to me, when we are

near them.

Are those mountains on

the right in the Pelopon-

nesus ?

Yes; they stretch far away

to the south-east.

TpoôSdra, Btkut va. irpoyfvfia'

TiVw" 86s fxoi oklyov 'yf/'dpi, Koi

dpvdici.

Aos fioi oKiyov fiavpov Kpaai.

Aev fjpTropu> vu jtiw to peTaivdrov

Kpaai.

Oa ntpdaapep dnb rrjv 2ci\apiva

Koi Trjv Atyiuav ; Adê pov av-

rdf, (ri irapaKoKS), orav (1p(6a

1t\T](TioV.

Ta opt) fKelva npos ra Seîa (ivat

TTjs Tl(\onovvfj(TOvI

MaXtora* iitrtivovTai irokv paKpav

irpos Ta voTtoavaroKiKd.

(3) Arrival at an

Hotel.

Can you tell me which is the

best hotel 1

There are no good hotels at

the Pirseus.

In what part of Athens is the

hotel you recommend 1

The best hotels are in the

Square of the Constitution.

Have you any rooms free 1

We want a sitting room and

two bed rooms.

A*ISI2 EI2 TO XENOAO-

XEION.

'HyJTopftTe va poi eiTnjre ttoiov

eivtu t6 KaXXiTfpov ^fvoSo-

Xf'iov ;

AeV imdpxovv KoKa êvo8oxf7a

tls Tov Ilfipaid.

Elf TTolov ptpos Tap A6t]v5)v fivai

TO êvo8oxfôv TO onolov auft-

(TTOTf ;

Ta KoXXt'rfpa ^(voSoxtta tivat eU

TTjV TrXuTf'iav TOV '2vPTdypaT0i.

'Ex^Te dapdria (Kevdepa;

QeXofifV filav aidovaav koL bvo

bapaTia tov vttvov (jcoiTiouas^.

140 Dialooûes.

How much do you charge a

day for the three rooms %

The price is twelve francs a

day for each pei-son, includ-

ing meals.

Will you dine in the public

dining-room ?

We prefer to have our meals

in our own room.

Let us have dinner immedi-

ately; we want to go to bed

early.

Make a good fire in the sitting

room.

We are covered with dust, I

should like a bath.

If you want it we have every-

thing ready.

Waiter, show the gentlemen

their rooms.

If you take the rooms by the

month, it will be much

cheaper.

Waiter, bring my luggage

into my room.

Where are my things %

Are you sure tliat the bed is

quite dry %

The sheets seem very damp.

You must change the sheets.

Tell the waiter to make tlie

bed and air the room whilst

1 am out.

noo-oi/ ^r]T(iTe fKaiTTrjv fjfifpav Sta

ra Tpia dtofiaTia;

H Ttfif) fivai 8o)8eKa ippayKa Kara

iiTOfiov, fif TO (Payr^Tov,

OeXere va •yev/iaTifjjre tls to

fCTTiaTopiov;

npoTinS>fifv pa Tpmyaptv (Is to

Safiariov fias.

As dftnvrjaafifv evdvs' Oikofifv

va irXayidcTiOfjiep ivwpis.

Ava'\fr€ KaXfju (fxoTiav tls Tfjv

aWovaap,

Eififda KeKaXvfinevoi airo ctkovii

{KoviopTov), (TTtBifiovu va Ka/iO)

XovTpov.

'Eav dyoTtuTf, ()(0{i(V to navra

frot/Liu.

YiTTjpeTa, Sfiôv tls Toi/s Kvplovs

Tu hmpAria toiv.

'Eav fvoiKiddrjre to. BcofxaTia KaTa

fxrjva 6a j/vai iroXi) (vdtjvoTtpov,

Ynrjpera, (})epf to. irpdyfiaTa (Is

TO 8a)p.a.Tt6v fiov.

Uov (ivai TO. TrpdypLard fiov J

Etcrat ^(âios on to Kpf^^dri

(ivai (VT(Xci)s (TT(yv6v j

Ta aiv86via (f>aivovTai noXv irypd.

Upend V aXXd^r}T( Ta aivSovia.

EiTTt (Is TOP viTr}p(Tr]v va (Toipdarj

TO Kpf^âTi Ka\ V depiaj] to

tfOfidnov, (p ci) c(/xa( e^to.

Arrival at an Hotel. 141

There is no bell in the room.

At what o'clock do you wish

to be called in the morning ]

1 think I shall require another

blanket on the bed.

My head is too low, bring nie

another piUow. Put out the

light.

Bring me some hot water at

half-past seven in the morn-

ing.

Where are my boots 1

Have my boots been cleaned 1

I want more towels.

I have forgotten my tooth

brush. Go and buy me one

as soon as you can.

Take my clothes and brush

them.

My hair-brush is in the port-

manteau. Have you found

my comb 1

Bring me some better soap.

Put plenty of cold water in

my bath.

I should like to have four

candles instead of two.

Would you prefer a lamp ?

Liv inapx^fi kwScop (Is to Sw/uJ-

TlOV,

Kara noiap Supav tnidvuuTt va

aas arjKoicrovp ttju irpaiapJ

No/JtX<i) oTi 6a Xd^cD dvdyKrjp icai

aXXov xpapiov (^naraviat, OKf-

•ncKTp.aTOi),

To K((paKi puv (ivai TraXv ^âfirjXd,

<êpf fiov Koi ak\o paîXdpi

(irpocTKKpdiKaiop^, 2j30<re to

<f>S)s.

4>epe fxov ^((ttop vtpop (Is raj

(TTTa Koi Tjpiadap to Trpaii.

Uov dual TO. nanoi/Taid pov (ra

inrobjipaTo) ',

'EKadapiadrjaap ra InoBripaTd

fjLOv;

6(Xa) Tr(pi<T(TOTepas niroXias

(irpotToylnaY

'Eê;â(ra ttjp ôvpTaav ra>p ddov-

Tdv. Ilriyaiv( pa [lov ayopdarjs

uiap TO Ta\vTtpop,

Udpe TO. povxd pov Koi ^((TKOPiae

Ta.

'H (iovpTcra tS>p p.aWiS)P dpai

(Is Th biadKKiop. 'Evpts to

KTevi povJ

4>€pe pov KaXKirepop aanovpi.

Bake a(f>dopov Kpvov pepop ds t6

\oxrrp6v pov.

^'EneBvpovp vd e;^<a T(<r<rapa <nrfp-

pLaT(T(Ta (Krjpia) optI 8vo.

UpoTipaTe piap \dpnap^

142 Dialogues.

Waiter, bring me tlie bill.

Have you made out our ac-

count ?

You charge a great deal.

Ilaidt, 0(/>e \iov rhv \oyapia(Tfi6r,

ExafifS Tov Xoyapia'jfwv /xaj ',

ZrjTUs iroWd,

(4) Conversation with aGreek Master ^

You are very late this morn-

ing. It is now a quarter past

eight,andyou said youwould

be here at half-past seven.

I am very sorry, sir, but we

can make it up by going on

longer at the end of the les-

son.

Yes, but that is not the same

thing. I must insist upon

your being more punctual.

Have you written anything

to-day 1

I have translated an entire

scene from this French play.

You are very industrious and

are making great progress.

I will correct this first, then

we will read.

Please write clearly, especially

the kappa and the lamvtha.

The accent is wrong. Here

is a mistake.

ATAAOrOS nPOS AIAA2KA-

AON THS EAAHNIKHSFAQSSHS.

IIoXu rjpyTjcraTe rrju rrpcoiav rav-

Tr]v. Eivai o/crw koL rirapTOV,

Koi eiirere ort da ^ade eSw t^v

e^b6p.r]v Koi fjfxiafiav,

AuTTOv/xai TToXu, Kvpie, aXXa dvvd-

pfda V dvairKTjpajTaipfv tovto

napartivovrts to tsKos tov fia-

GrjfiaTos.

MaXicTTa, dWa bev (tvat to avTo

Trpayfia. Qa fnip-elva va ^crOe

aKpiSforfpos.

'Eypd-^art TtTTore o^/zfpoj'J

'M(Tf(f)pa(ra oXokKtjpov (rKrjVTjv €K

TOV TaWiKov TOVTOV BpdpaTot.

Eiade TToXu eVt/xeX^r Ka\ Kafivtre

TToXXay npooSovs. Qa 8iopda)cra

TOVTO irpStTov Koi vcTTepov 6a

avayvdxrapev.

TpdcjXTe, irapaKoXS), Kadapd, Iduog

TO KaTTTta Kal to \dp^8a.

O TOVKTpOS (lUai i(T(f)a\pfV0S.

'l8ov (V \ddos.

* For words used in lesson, see Vocabulary, p. 277.

With a Greek Master. 143

"What is the Genitive of this

word?

The Genitive of that word is

not used.

What is the Present Indica-

tive of tliis verb 1

I will look it out in the dic-

tionary. How is it spelt 1

What is the first letter %

Blot that page. "Wipe the

pen.

Have you a pencil 1

Will you take the French

copy ; I will take the Greek,

and you can translate aloud

what you have just written.

It will give you facility in

finding the words.

I cannot read it off in Greek

very fast.

Well, try as fast as you can.

I cannot remember the words

at the moment, although I

know them well.

A little practice will remedy

that difficulty. Bravo ! You

are getting on capitally.

I will say the dialogue I have

learned.

I will read the English.

Now I will say a sentence in

Greek, and you shall answer

me. Let us suppose that

TLoia (XvaL i; ytvucfj t^s Xfêat

ravrris',

'H yeviKT} TTJs \f^f(OS TavTr/s ttvai

aXpi](TTOS.

Iloios fivai 6 fpecTTag t^s opicr-

TiKTJs Tov prjfxaTOS TOVTov;

Ga jraparqprjaa els to \(îk6u.

Has dp6oypd(f)fTcuJ

Hoiov aval

TO rrpioTOV ypdpfxa ;

XTfyvuXTOTt TT)V (TfXl'Sa TaVTTfV.

2,(f)oyyiaaTe to kovBvXiov.

"ExfTt /wXvfiboKovdvXovf

HdpfTe, irapaKoKciy to FaWtKbu

din-iypa(f)ov' tyw 6a Trapa to

'EXXijvikSv, vfitls 8* bvvaadf va

ptTat^pdcrqTt ptydXoCpavas o,

Ti iypdiâTt rjbt}. Ga (vkoXvv^

drjre va tvpTfre tos Xe^fis.

Aev bvvafiai va to duayvdxra 'EX-

XrjPioTl TToXv oypTjyopa.

KdXtof ' SoKtfidaare oaov bvvatrde

Tax^Ttpov.

Aev bvvap.ai va ivBvfiSspuu Tas

Xe^fis els TTjv (TTiyfi^Vy fjLoXovari

KaXS)s Tas yva>piâ>.

'OXryj; npdîs 6a depaTTevcrr) tt]V

hv<TKoXlav Tairrrjv, Evyf. Upo-

âlvere d^toXoya,

Ga eiTTO) TOV SidXoyov, toi» onolov

efjLa6ov,

G' dvayvaxra to 'AyyXiKdv,

Ta>pa 6a Xeyo) (f>pda-iv Tiva 'EX-

XtjvuttI Ka\ vpels 6d fxoi dnav-

Tare. *As vnoQevanev oti fx

144 Dialogues.

you are calling upon mewith a letter of introduc-

tion. (See Conversation on

this subject.) I will take

the part of a washer-womanor a hotel-keeper.

Before next lesson I will learn

two or three of the dialogues,

and then I shall be able to

understand and answer in

those subjects.

You can have the Yocabulary

of the subject open before

you. You will be able to

find the word you require.

I must read some modern

poetry to get used to the

pronunciation by accents.

Very good ; we will try some

of the extracts. Take care

about the accented syllable,

and the other syllables will

take care of themselves.

The pronunciation is difficult.

Do I pronounce that right ]

Not quite. You should learn

a piece of poetry and say it

aloud whilstyou are dressing.

I am tired of the house. Let

us not lose this glorious day.

We will go for a walk to-

wards old Phalerum.

(TTiaKfTTTfcrai, e^cnv (rvcTTaTiKrjv

fTTKTToikrjv' e'yw fie 6a Kufivco

TO fjiepos fiids irXva-rpai ^ ii/6s

êpo86)(ov.

Y]po Tov fTTOfifvov iia6f]fiaTos 6a

fjid6(A> 8vo ^ Tpeis SiaXoyovs, Kal

ToTf 6a Tjfxai iKavos va (vvoS>

Ka\ V anavrSi ds to. avriKtifxtva

Tavra.

HfiTTopelTe va exV"^ '"^ Xf|tXo-

yiov TOV 8ia\6yov tovtov cipoik-

Tov ivamiov eras. Ovtco 8e 6a

hvvrjadf va (vpL(TKrjT( t^v Xe'îi',

TTjv onoiav 6a xpei,d(rj<r6e.

Ilpmei V dvaywai<jK(ii vforrepd

Tiva irw.TjftaTa, OTrms aTroKTrjcroi

TTjv e^tv TTJs npo(\)opas bia tov

Tovicrpov.

noXii Ka\d' 6a hoKindcrafiiv Tiva

t5>v dnoKTiracTfidTrnv. UpoatâTf

CIS TTjv Toviôfjifvtjv av\\a^r]v,

KOI al aWai (TvXXajSai 6a (ppov-

Tiôvv p.6vai TOiv fit tavrds.

'H Trpo(f>opa eivai SuctkoXos. Upo-

(f)fpa> TovTO Ka\a>s ',

"0^(1 eVrfXcos* TTpeVet va nd6riT(

(V Ttfxdxiov TToirjfiaTos Kal va to

Xeyjjre ev a evdverxde.

Êliapvv6r}v TTju olKiav. Ay /x^

Xd(TCCp.(V TTJV "KafiTTpav TaVTTJV

fjfiepav. Oa TrfpinaTTjarafifV

Tvpbs TO nakaiov ^dXrjpov,

With a Guide. 145

With great pleasure. We can

talk Greek all the way.

I do not understand. Tell me

in English what you said.

Thanks ; now go on talking

Greek.

Be so good as to speak Greek.

I did not come here to learn

French.

Please speak slowly and dis-

tinctly. I am a little deaf.

The time is up. I must be

going away.

When will you come again ]

To-morrow at the sametime?

I fear it is impossible. I amengaged, but I will come in

the evening at nine.

Very good. I shall be ready.

Please be punctual. Good-

bye. At nine to-morrow.

AvudfjifOa va 6fii\S>nfv '£XX7-

viKa Kaff oKt]v rrjP 686u.

Aev fvvoS). EliTfTt fioi o,ti

ciTTaTf, 'AyyXioTi. "EvxapKTTS)'

Toipa (âKo\ov6i]craT( va ofii-

\tjt€ 'EXXijwftd.

AdjSfTf T^v Kd\o(rvvT]v va SfiiX^re

'EWtjvikci. AfV ^Xdov eSco va

HaSoi TdKKiKa.

OfiiKfirf, TtapaKoKS), apya Ka\

KaOapd, £t/iat oXiyov Ka>(f)6s,

O ^pi')Vos irapriXde' irptnei v

dva^fâprjao).

ndre ^d tXdijre iraXivJ

Tû av-

TTjv apav avpiov',

ôôC/xat OTi (ivat dSvparov.

Ex(o SciXTfi virQ<TXf<Tiv, dXXd da

(Xd(t) TO icnrfpas ets rds ivvea,

TLoXi) KoKd. 9d fip.ai erot/xor.

'EoTf, irapaKaXS), dxpi/Si)? etj

rfjv S>pav. XaipfTf. Aoiirov

avpiov (Is rds ivvia.

(5) With a Guide.

r want a good guide, so that

I may lose no time in ask-

ing my way.

iVould you like one who can

speak English ?

];ertainly not. I want one

who can speak Greek, that

I may practise.

MEG' OAHrOY.

Exa avayicqv koXov obrjyov 8«d

i^ fuf xdvoi TOV Koipov fiov

^rjTav TOV bpoptov,

QiXfTe odrjyov opiXovvra ttjv

'AyyXiKT]v;

Be3ata)s oxL Ge'Xo) oSrjybv Ofu-

XovvTa TTjv 'EXXrjvtK^v 8ia va

KUfivo) aaKT)(rw,

146 Dialogues.

Are you a guide 1

Yes, effendi.

"What do you charge a day 1

Six francs a day, sir.

Eicrat SStjyosJ

'MaXuTTa, d(pfi>Tr].

Uocra 6f\(is rfjv fjfiepnv '

E^ (ppdyKa ttjv rjpepav, Kvpit.

TOVTOV

'

MaXiara, Kvpie, tivat rifiios Koi

f^VTTVOS.

KoXa, 6a <ras BfupS) vmvOvvoVf

iav p.e airara.

Qa fielvo) (vraiQa fiiav f^bopdSa

Koi 6(Xco va 18(0 KaXa oXa ra

mpaioTfpa irpayixara.

Do you recommend me this Mol a-vma-TaTf rov uvOpui-nov

man ? •

Yes, sir, he is honest, and

intelligent.

Well, I shall hold you re-

sponsible if he cheats me.

I shall be here a week, and

want to see all the most

beautiful things well.

You must always speak Upinn va SpiXfis iravroTf 'EX

Greek. Not too fast. Re- Xr^viKo., "Oî noXv yprjyopa.

peat what you said. Say it 'E7ravaXdp.âve o,ti uTrfg

in French, in Italian, in Aeye ro TaXXiKa, 'iTaXuoi

English. 'AyyXiKd.

What is that building—hill Tt tlvai to Kripiov roiiro—6 Xd

—street—house ? <ôj—^ 686s—rj oIkIu;

What is the name of this limy ovofidêrai t) nXarfia avrrj\

square 1

You must be here at eight Uperêi va â-ai e'Sw avpiov T

to-morrow morning. ^rpwi ds ras okto).

Very good, sir, I will be IloXv KoXd, Kvpie^ da rjnc

punctual. aKpi^Tjs.

(6) Asking the wat in

A Town.

Can you tell me where Mr.

Coumoundouros lives ]

Is this the bouse of Mr. Tri-

coupis ?

OnOS ZHTHSHi TI2 TON

APOMON EN THi HOAEI.

Avvacrdf vd fioi etnrjre irov Karot-

Kel 6 K, Kovp.ovv8ovpos ',

'H oiKia avTT) (ivai rov k. T/>t-

Presenting a Letter of Introduction. 147

Will you sliow me the way

to the Railway Station—to

the English Legation %

"Which door ought I to knock

atl

Knock and go in. You will

find a second door.

Go straight up the hill.

'Evap((TT(l(T6e m (loi Sei^qre tow

dpofJiov Tzpos TOP ^TnBpbv rov

2i8T]po8p6fiov—77/30? Tr}i> Ay-

y\iKT]v TTpecr^fiavJ

Iloiau Ovpav TrpeVet va KTwrjcra)

'

KTVTTTjcraTf Ka\ ettreXêrf. 6a

(vprjTf bevTfpav noprav (dvpavY

Urj-yalvere laia indva els tqv

(7) Peesentinq a Letteb

OF Inteoduction.

Is it far to the house of

Mr. VNo, sii*, it will take three

minutes in a carriage.

Drive to the house of Mr.

Go and fetch a carriage

;

choose a good one.

Close the carriage. It is

cold.

Is Mr. at home 1

No, sir, he is out.

At what hour shall I be most

likely to find him 1

"When will he return 1

Not before dinner.

ErXEIPI2I2 2Y2TATIKHS

Eni2T0AH2.

Eivai fiaKpav ^ oIkio tov k,

deivaJ

''0;(t, Kvpie, aTT()((i rpia XfTrro /ne

TTjV apaâv.

Tpaâ fls rfju oiKiav tov k,

Urjyaivt va <f>fpJ]S fiiav apaâv,

Ka\ 8iaXe^( p'lav KoKriv.

KXeTcre tt]v apaâv. Eivat

*0 K. bflva fivai ds to (nriTi

)

"Oxi, Kvpu, fivat e^co (o$co).

Karo irolav &pav tivai nidavop

pa TOP evpcoJ

HoTt 6a (Tri<rrpeyf/Tj;

A(P 6a (THiTTpe^ irpo tov ycv-

paTos.

' Prop-r Names are declined.

L 2

148 Dialogues.

Give him this letter and mycard, and tell him I will

call to-morrow morning at

eleven.

Very good, sir.

Please give him this letter

and ask him if he will see

me.

How do you do, sir 1 I amdelighted to receive any one

who has a letter from myfriend.

You are very kind.

And how long have you been

here?

I only arrived the day before

yesterday.

And how does the town

please you 1

It is beautiful and the climate

delightful.

At what o'clock shall I find

you at your hotel %

I am always in until twelve.

What are you doing to-night 1

A few people are coming to

u« and we should be de-

lighted to see you.

Many thanks, but I have pro-

mised to go with a friend

to the Society of Parnassus

to hear a lecture.

Ady Tov Tr\v iirimoiX^v ravrqv kcX

TO €iri(TK€TrTrjpi6v fiov, Koi (ini

TOV oTi 6a Ttfpdva avpiov €is

ras fv8(Ka.

IIoXu Ka\d, Kvpif.

UapaKokS) dos tov ttjv tVto'TO-

Xiji/ TavTTjv Kal f'pmTrja-f tov idf

6f\rj va /i€ IBj],

Ti KapvfTf, Kvpif ; Xaipci) St-

)(op(v6s Tiva, 6 Snoloi e^^ei

fiTKTToX^v dno TOV (j)l\ov pov,

Eto-^t jToXv tvyfvfjs.

Kal nocrov Kaipov ex*''* ^^Ta^&a\

Y[pO)(6is povov t^6aa-a.

Kai TTws ads 0atV«rai rj noKnJ

Etcoi iipaia TrdXtf, to fie kX/j

fivai Tfpnvov,

Kara noiav apav da ads (Zp-

els TO ^fvoSoxf^ovJ

Eipai TrdiTOTf peaa ptxpi t\

bunbfKarqs.

Tims 6d irepdoTjTe tt^v ^pabid aas

©a tkOovv f8a> TO ^pd8v ptpiKi

Koi 6d (v)(api.(TTr]6Siiptv va ad\

idoapfv.

2ar fiixapi<rrS> ttoXv, aXX vne-

(j\i6r]V vd vndyco ptTd Tivos

(fjikov pov (Is TOV 2vK\oyop<

' Uapvaaabv ' ottcos aKOV(r»

8iaTpi^r]v Tiva.

i\

The Post Office. 149

You do not lose time. The

Syllogues are almost always

open to the public

You will see a meeting adver-

tised in the paper, and you

can always go in.

I must go now, sir. "We have

breakfast at eleven at the

hotel.

Good-bye. I shall have the

honour of calling to-moiTOW.

If I can do anything for you,

please let me know.

AeV yavfTf Kaipov. Ot (rvXXoyot

(ivai ax^ôv iravroTf avoiKToi but

TO Koiv6v (Ji)(OV(ri.v i$xj6(pav rrjv

(laobov^,

0a ibr]Tf ras <rvv(bpid<Tfif dy-

ytWopevas 8ia tS)V fCîj/ifpiSwi/

Koi bvvaaOe va (laeXdrjTf,

npfuft V avax<i)pr)(ra> rcopa, Kvpie.

To npoyfvpa naparidfTat tls to

^€vo8o)(f7ov (Is Tos fvSeKa.

XalpfTf. 0a XajSo) ttiv TipfjV va

aas iTn<TK(($6Si avpiov. Eav

dvvapai va irpdîo rt imtp vpStv,

<rds irapaKakS) va. /xoi to finijTf.

(8) The Post Office.

I beg your pardon; could

you tell me where the Post

Office is ]

Come with me to the Square

of the Constitution, and I

will show you the way.

You must turn here to the

left and keep straight on

past the Chamber.

It is in the same building as

the Home Office.

You will easily recognise it

by the crowd.

Is it that building just above

the English Embassy and the

office of the ' Ephemeris ' 1

TO TAXYAPOMEION.

Me crvyx<>ipf'^'''f) S*'' fov Xeyere

nov fivai TO Taxv8pop(iov j

'EXarf pa^v pov fls ttiv irkaTelap

Tov ^vvTayparos Koi 6a aas

t(iô> TOV bpopov,

npent I va yvpiarjTe ebm trpos to.

apiaTfpa Ka\ j/a 8ifv6vv6i]T€ kut'

(vdflav nepav r^s Bov\tjs.

"Eivai (Is TO avTo KTipiov p( to

vwovpyeiov tS)v E<T(OT(piKS>v.

Qa TO dvayva)pi(TT}T( (VKoXa dnb

TOV naXvv Kocrpov,

Mi'jTrois (ivai to KTipiov (K('ivo

aKpi^ws Trapairdvco dno ti)v

dyy\iKr}v ivp«T^(iav Ka\ to ypa-

(pdov T^s 'E<f>T)p(pi8os j

I50 Dialogues.

Yes, sir; it Is at the corner

above.

When does the post leave for

England ]

On Thursday and Saturday

at 6 p.m. The postage is

30 lepta for abroad.

When do letters reach Eng-

land ?

They take about a week. Aletter posted on Thursday

readies London on Wednes-

day, and one posted on

Saturday will be received

on the following Saturday.

When does the mail arrive

from England ]

Ou Thursday and Saturday

morning. You have only a

few hours to write replies.

Eor Greece, the postage is

only 20 lepta.

Give me three stamps of 30

lepta and two of 20.

Is that right 1

No, sir; you must put on

another 60 lepta,

But it is ' Papiers d'Affaires,'

Manuscript.

Y'ou must write it on the

outside, and leave the ends

MtiXtora, Kvpit, eivat tts rf/v

(7rdva> yaviav.

Uore di'ax<>>pel to Taxv^pofxetov

8ia rfjv 'AyyXlav;

TtjV nfflTTTTJlt Kol TO 2d^âTov

fls Tcis f$ p. p. Ta TaxyhpopiKa

Tik-q tLvai TpiaKOUTa \ewTa bia

TO e^coTfpiKov,

Hore c^dduovv al fTriaroXal fls

TTJV AyyXiav

;

XpfidôvTai piav e^bopdba irep'i-

•nov. Mm iniVToKr] picjiOela-a

(IS TO Ta^vBpopelov ttjv IlfpTrTijv

(f>6dv(i fls AovSilvop TTjv TfTdp-

Tr]v, Kai aWt] pi^dilaa (Is to

Tox^hpopflov TO 2d^âTov, 6a

\ri(f)dfj TO fnopfifov ^dîSaTov,

UoTf <p6dvfi TO Ta\vhpop(iov (^

'AyyXias;

Trjv nepTTTr/v Koi to 2dj3âTOV to

Trpai, \JAiyas povov (opas

eYtre 8ia va ypdxf/rjTt djravTâfis,

Ata Tr}v 'EXXaSa Ta Ta;ûSpojui(ca

TfXrj fivai fj.6pov fiKoai Xejrra.

Aoy poi Tpia ypappaTaarjpa t(ov

TpidKuvra XenTiov Ka\ 8vo T¥

(Xko<ti.

'Elvai (rwcrra

;

0)(i, Kvpif, Trpenei va ^dXr]Tt

aKopr] fv TOiv f^rjirra XfTrroJi/,

*AXX* (ivai )((ip6ypa<pov.

UpfTrei va to ypd'^f/ryre air f^co ko

V dcpTjoTjTf Ta oKpa dvoiKToi

Athens. 151

open. Then it will be suffi-

ciently stamped.

Are there any letters for me \

What is your name, sir ?

There is my card.

No, sir, there are none.

If any come, will you send

them to the Hotel d'Angle-

terre—des Etrangers—NewYork ; and please send them

as early as possible, as they

may be important, and re-

quire answers.

You can rely upon me, sir. •

Take these letters to the post

and stamp them.

Ask whether the post haa

arrived.

No, sir; the boat has been

detained by bad weather.

Tore 6a. f)(rj ri irpiirov raxy-

hpofiiKov TiKos.

Mi^TTCDf vnap)(nv(Tiv emoroXat bC

Has ofOfid^eade, KvpifJ

I80V TO €TnaKfinr]pi6v pov.

Oxi, Kvpit' 8iv vndpxfi Kappta.

Eav eX^wcrt rivfs, fvapta-TTjdrJTe

va Tas irtpy^Tt els to ^(vo8o-

Xelov Tijs 'AyyKtas—Tav Sevau

—Tijs Ne'af Y6pKr]s' Koi irapa-

KakS> arelXaTe ras to to^v-

Tfpov, bioTi KTcof fwai anovbaiat

Koi XPuCova-iv aTravTrjo-eas.

MdvaTf T](rv)(os, Kvpie, Koi BtXco

(jipovTiaei.

Hrjyaive Tas eVtOToXay Tavras els

TO Taxv8pop(7ov Koi /SaXe ypap-

paroarjpa,

EpdiTi](rov iav ri Ta)(vbpopfiov

f(f)6a(Te,

"O^i, Kvpie' TO aTpoTrXoiov Kad-

VarepTja-fv (vtKa KUKOKaipias*

(9) Athens. AI AGHNAI.

The Museums are open to the Ta Movo-eTa (Ivai avoi<ra {dvol-

public on certain days in the yomai) 8ia to koivov Kaff i>pia--

week. p€vas r]pepas t^s f^bopdbos.

Is the ITyeense collection on *E^(T(6t] fj o-vXXoyi) t&v MvKrjvai/

view at Athens 1 ds 'Adljvas npos 6iav;

Yes; it is in the Polytechnic. MaXtora* dvai us to lloXvre-

Xyfiovt

15* Dialogues.

There is a large piece of Mo-

saic in the Royal Garden

in a good state of preserva-

tion.

There is a fine collection of

ancient coins in the Univer-

sity.

Some interesting discoveries

have been made in the

recent excavations on the

southern side of the Acro-

polis.

There has been an attempt

to revive the Olympian

Games in the Stadium.

Plato's Academia, and Co-

lonus, the scene of one of

Sophocles' plays, are within

an easy walk of the city.

The best view of Athens is

from the top of Lycabettus.

You can reach the top in half

an hour.

Mars Hill is on the other side

of the town, close to the

Acropolis.

The view of the Temple of

Theseus is very fine from

the train as you enter the

station.

The Ceramicus is also very

'Yrrap>;«t \i.iya MaxraiKov ivros

Tov ^aaCKiKQv ktjttov, Biarripov-

fi(vov (V KoKfi KaTaardafi.

Yirdpxfi i>pa[a avWoyfi dp)(n'iwv

vomeriiaTuv iv t^ Travfnicrnjixitf.

27rov8aia» rives dvaKaXvif/eis <ye-

vovTo els ras eaxdras yevofxevas

dva<TKa(l>as irpos rf/v pearjp^pivTjv

irkevpav rrjs AKponoXeats,

'Eyevero npocTTrddeid ris va ena-

va\r](f)6a)(Tiv ev tw ^TaBico ol

'OXvfiTnaKoi dywves.

'H AKabrjpia tov UXdravos Koi 6

KoXavos, rj aKijurj fiids rpaycobias

TOV 2o(f)OK\fovs, KelvToi els

fxiKpav divoaTaalv ex. T^r tto-

\ea)S,

H apaioTepa 6ea t5>v *h6t)vS>v\

et,vai eK ttjs Kopv(pjjs tov Avkw

^rjTTOV.

Avvaade v dva^rire els rrjv Kopv-I

<f)fjv evTos fjfjiicreias apas.

'O "Apdos Hdyos, (6 Xd^of tow

"Apeuts) eivai Trpos ttjv a\\rj»i

TrXevpav rrjs noXeas, nXrjaiov\

Ttjs AKpondkeois.

'H dea TOV Orjaelov e7vai ttoXw ;

a>paia eK tov (Tibrjpobpofiov afia

elcreXdere els tov (rradpov,

'O KepupeiKos eivai enlarjs noXvj

Athens. 153

near the railway station.

There are some fine monu-

ments in it well preserved.

It takes a long day to drive

to Marathon and back.

Eleusis, through the pass of

Daphne and along the Sacred

Way, is not too far for a

good walker.

On Easter Tuesday the annual

fete at Megara is held.

Many strangers go there to

see the peasants dance.

The costume of the peasants

is very picturesque.

Another delightful excursion

is to mount Pentelicus. Tobe at the top in time to see

the sun rise, one must sleep

overnight at the monastery

at the foot.

The marble quarries are well

worth a visit.

The view from the top of

Hymettus is also very fine

but less extensive than that

from Pentelicus.

I should like to go to My-

cense. Is it easy to go

tliere ]

nXTfatov ToC aradfiov rov aibrj-

po8p6fjiov,

Yirdpxovaiv (v avra Tiva lapaia

fivr)fi(ia KoKo)! 8iaTrjpovp(va.

Xpeid^fTai oKokXtjpos fjpfpa va

vndyr) Ttf €<^' (ifid^rjs ds Mapa-

BSava Kcu va (nicrTpiy\ni,

'H 'EXevcTJf hia tov trreiov toO

Aa(f)viov Koi dta Trjs Upas 68ov

bev tivai ttoXv fuiKpau 8ia xakov

ireôSpopov,

Tfjv TpiTTjv TOV Tld(Txa yiverai ^

fTTjcria iopTT) fjy to. Meyapa,

EtoXXoi ^€voi irrjyalvovp (Ktl va

i8(t)ai Tovs xcopiKoi/s pa \opfv-

(0(TI.

At ivSv/jUKTUii tS)v )â)piKOiv fipai

ypacjiiKaTaTai.

*AXX»7 (vxdpioTos fKbpofiT) (ipai

(Is TTjP UfPTfXrjp, Ata va

^ddarj Tis iyKaipas fls rr)»

Kopv(f)t)P, OTTwr idr] T^v dvoToXrjv

Toil TjXiov, TrpeVet pa K0ifJiy]6fj ds

TO pOPaOTTjplOV (Is TOVS TrpoTTO-

8as TT)P irporjyovpevTjv pvkto,

Ta XaTOfjLfla tov fiappdpov dî-

ôv(ri va TO fniaK((pdjj tis.

'H Ofa (K tov 'Ypr]TTov (ivai

(niarjs ttoXv iapa'ia, dXX oXtytb-

Tipop (KT(Tap(pr} T^s Bias Trjs

nepTfXrjs.

ÊTr(dvpovP va vtrdya (ts ras

Mujoji'af. Eivai (vkoXop pa

VTrdyrj TIS eVfiJ

154 Dialogues.

The easiest way is by water 'H tlKoKaripa obos tlvai dia

as far as Nauplia, where OaXdiraijs fi^xP'^ Navn'Kiov, onov

horses must be hired to npiiTei va fuaGaxrrjrf Ittitovs

take you to Mycenae, Tiryns, 8ia va vndyrjre ds rdt Mvkt]-

Coriuth, etc. vas, rfjv Tipwda, ttjv Kopivdov

K.T.\,

How many days does the trip nJo-ay ^p.ipas SiapKtl to ra^d-

take ] Biov

;

You can see everything easily Awaade va iSjjre ra ndvra Iv

in four days. avian tls -reavapas f/fifpas.

Is there anything worth visit- 'Ynapxei n aîov iniaKt^taa iv

ing at Corinth 1 Koplvda;

From the top of Acro-Corin- *EKT^sKopv(f)T]STov'AKpoKop[vdov

thus you have one of the ^X^ff 6iav e< rSiV Xapvporepav

finest views in Greece. ev 'EXXaSt.

It takes about two hours to 'Yndyfi rtr (VTOs 8vo apZv ((fuTT-

ride or drive from Corinth iros rj e^' apd^qs «k rrjs Kopiv-

to Kalaniaki, whence a 6ov fls t6 KaXap-aKi, 66(v to

steamer brings you back to drfionXoiov ads fjrava(f>€pei tU

the Piraeus in about four Ueipaid ivros rea-adpoiv n-fpiVoi

hours. wpcov.

What season in the year JJoiav apav rov erovs 6d e'^fXe

would you choose for tra- yerf fiui raêiSiov iv ra iacoTf

veiling in Greece 1 piKa r^s 'EXXaSoy;

The winter is most enjoyable 'O x^'^l^^" *'""' ° /:xdXXoi' tixd

in Athens ; but I should piaros ds rds 'Adrjvas' 6a iê

choose March, April, or \(yov 8e rov MdpTiov, 'AvpiXio

May for travelling in the rj Mdôv 8ia irepifiyrjaiv ds n

interior. ia-coTtpiKov.

Throughout the month of Kafi* Skov t6v 'lavovdpiov 6 olpai

January the skies are almost vos dvai a-x^ôv dre^fXor.

cloudless.

Residence in a Family. -^SS

(10) About a Family in

which to beside.

E. I want to find a family

who would receive me into

their house.

G. You mean that you wish

to have rooms there; not

to have your meals with the

family.

E. No, no. I want to have

my meals there. You do

not learn Greek by living

in the same house with

Greeks. I want to hear

them talk, and talk to them

myself.

G, But, sir, it is not the cus-

tomhere to receive strangers.

Our habits are so different.

It will not be very comfort-

able for you.

E. It is the only way to learn

Greek quickly, and I shall

adopt it, whether I am com-

fortable or not.

G. I admire your determina-

tion. But in a few days

you will return to yuur

iiotel.

E. We shall see. In the

meantime, how am I to find

a family ?

HEPI OIKOrENEIAS EN Ht

eEAEI NA KATOIKHSHt

TI2.

E. GtXo) vh. evpca oiKoytveidv

Tiva, rJTis 6a fi eSe;(eTO ftf

TTjv oiKiav Trjs.

G. 'Evvoflrf OTi imdvîUTe va

(XV"^ Sw/ita'Tta e/cet, o;î o/xcay

Koi va TpcuyrjTe fie ttji/ oIko-

yfVfiav.

E. "Ox}, oxi ! ©eXci) Koi va Tpaya,

Aev fiavddvd tis 'EWrjviKa Kor-

oiKwv fiovov ev Tfi avTrj oIkIo.

fjied' 'EXKtjvcov. Qe\(o va roi/s

aKovci va opikaxri Ka\ va opiXa

Kal iya> n'pos avTOvs.

G. 'AXXa, Kvpie, 8(v tivai (tvvtj-

6fia eScd va 8e;^coiArat ^fvovs.

Ta tdipd pas eivat noXi) dia(popo-

TiKa. Aev 6a aas fLvai ttoXv

avairavTiKov.

E. Ell/at o povos Tponos va pd6r]

Ti-s EWrjviKa Ta\€u>s, koI 6a tov

'iTapahc)(6a> eire 6a rjvai evapfcr-

TOV fiTf dev 6a j]vai,

G. Qavpdîo Trjv aradfpoTrjTa

(raf. AXX' (vtos oXiycav rjpt-

pS)v 6d fniaTpt-\lrt]Tf ds rh

E. 0a idwpev. 'Ev tovtois ttoos

8vvapai va evpco olKoyfVddv

nva

;

155 Dialogues.

G. I will inquire among myfriends, with pleasure ; but

I fear it will be difficult.

E. I think I shall put an

advertisement in the "Qpa.

G. Such a thing was never

heai'd of It is impossible.

E. If it is extraordinary it

will attract attention, and

that is the object of an

advertisement.

G. But only a low class of

people will answer the ad-

vertisement.

E. Well, I shall go and see

them and judge for myself.

I am determined, so come

and help me write the ad-

vertisement.

'An Englishman desires to

enter a Greek family. Herequires two rooms, and

wishes to take his meals

with the members of the

family, in order to talk

Greek. Terms, 300 francs

a month. Address, IT. A.

Hotel des Etrangers.'

G. Yes, I think that will do;

300 francs a month is quite

enough.

E. They ought to include in-

struction for that sum. In

France, Germany, and Italy

G. Ev)(api(TT(i)S 6a f^fTaaa fit-

raî) tS)v (fjiKoiv fiov' ahXa (po-

ôvfjiai oTi 6a J/i/ai tvaKoXov.

E. No/[*tfc<> OTi 6a KaTa-)(<op[<T<ji

flboTToirjcriv riva tts rijv ' "Qpav,

G. Toiovr6v T^ oiibfTTOTt rjKovaBrj.

£(i/at ahvvaTOV.

E. *Eaw T/i/at rrapaboôv 6a «X-

KVCrrj TTjV TrpO(TO)^r]V TOV Kocrpov,

Koi ovTos (ivai 6 (TKOTTos puis

(l5onoif](Tfa>i.

G. *AXXd t6t€ povou f] Kara raîs

TOV \aov 6a X«/3); vn oi//'«' rfju

uhcmoirâiv.

E. IIoXii Ka\a, da vTrdya va roi/s

ida> Ka\ va Kplvut p6vos pnv.

JLipai diTo(f)aaiap(VOS, uxTTf fXa

va pe ôr]6r](TT}s va ypdypô) rfjV

*lbonolq<nv.

* AyyXor rtj (ni6vp(l. va flcr€\6rj

f.s riva fXXrjviKfjv olKoyevtiav,

E^(i dvdyKr]V 8vo baparLav kcA

im.6vp(i va rpuiyjj ptra rmpfXcov r^s olKoyiveias ottcdj opf

Xfj (\\r]viKd. Tiprj 300 (f)pdyKa

TOV piiva, Aiddwcris M. A.

A(vooox^(iov TOiv Afvmi'.

G. MaXttrra, vopiâ on ()^(i

KaXSii' 300 <f>pdyKa kutci prjva

(ivai upKfrd.

E. UpfTTd Tore va crvpirfpiXap-

^dvTjTUi Ka\ fj 8i8a(TKa\ia fls t6

TToaov. Elf TTjv VaWlaVj Ttp.

Residence in a Family. 157

I paid much less.

G. But here it is not the

custom, and you must pay-

rather more. Give the ad-

vertisement to this man

;

he will take it to the office,

and pay what is due.

ftavlav Koi 'irdkiav tTrXfipaxra

TToXv o\iya)Tfpov.

G. EbS) ofjid)! 8(v (iifoi (TVVTjdaa

Koi TTpfiTft va irXrjpaxTtfTf 7rfpi(T~

(Torepov. AoTf rqv fldonoirjcnv

(Is TOV avOpOilTOV TOVTOV, OCTTtP

6a Trjv virayrj els to ypacfte'iov

Kcu 6a 7r\r]po)<rT] to irpenov.

(II) Conversation with synaiaaesis me tina 01-

THE Head of a Family. kofeneiapxhn.

G. I have seen your adver-

tisement in the paper, sir.

E. It is very good of you to

come so promptly. Do you

understand what I require ]

G. Certainly, sir. I have

taken a new house which is

too large for my own family.

The rooms are very good.

E. Can I have my meals with

youl

G. I fear it will be difficult.

E. But it is a necessity. I

regret that we cannot ar-

range. Good morning, sir.

G. Yes, sir, if you can eat

our Greek dishes.

E. I do not mind anything,

so long as the house is clean.

G. We have breakfast at

11.45 ^Q^ dinner at 6. In

G. EtSov, Kvpie, T^v yvoaaTOTToit]-

(Tiv <ras fls TTjv ecj)Tjp.(pi8a,

E. Eicrdf jToXii KoXos Stort fantv-

aare va eXdijre. KaraiXapûvfTe

rt C'l'^S) ;

G. BfjSata, Kvpie. "E;^© eVot-

Kiaa-peinjv vtav oIkiuu noXi) fieya-

Xrjv bia TTji/ olKoyevfiAv p.ov. To

8a)p.dTia (Ivai noXv KoXd.

E. Avvafiai va Tpaya fia^v (Tagj

G. ôôvpaioTi6ajivai8v(rKoXov,

E. 'AXX* tivai dvdyKT]. Armovfuii

8f dioTi 8ev (Tvp(pa)VOVfitv. Xai~

prrf, Kvpie.

G. MdXtaTa,Kvpie,&v^fnroprJTtva

Tpwyr)T€ TO. fKXrjviKap^s âyip-o.

E. Aev fif p.fXti 8ia riirort, (f)ddvfi

fiovov Tj olKia va fjvai. KaOapd.

G. Upoytvpariôfiev fls rag

11.45 *'*' yfVftarifôixfv tls ras

158 Dialogues.

the morning you could have

coffee and anything else you

required.

E, Those hours suit me very

well. What do you ask a

month %

G. I cannot take less than

350 francs a month, and I

assure you that I shall gain

very little.

E. Then you must manage

your household very badly.

I will not give more than

300 francs a month for

everything, and I expect

you to give me an hour's

Greek lesson a day.

G. But you do not know, sir,

how dear provisions are.

E. I know that tliey are

cheaper here than in Paris,

and there I only paid 300

francs in an excellent family.

G. I hope you do not regard

me as a rascal. I am a man

of honour, sir, and I assure

you that I shall gain nothing.

I will accept with this con-

dition, that you will stay

at least two months.

E. I can promise for one

month, but after that I can-

not be sure. Probably I

shall remain three months.

6. 'Yr]v iTpcoiav 6a nii>T]T( Ka(j)€

Kai o,Tt aXXo ^r]Tr](TfT€.

E. At Sipai avrai eifot ttoKv Ka-

rdWifkoi 81 (fif. Tt (rjTf'ire

Tov fir]va (St (Kaarov firjvaj]

G. Aiv bvvafiai va Sf^^^co oXtyco-

Tepov tS)V 350 (f)pdyK<ou Kara

fJLrjva, Ka\ aas êâiS) on 6a

xepSiô) naiXv oXiyov.

E. Tore eiade ttoXv Kaxos oIko-

Kvprjs. AeV 8i8(o nepiacTOTepov

TCiv 300 (f>pdyK(ov Kara priva

bi o\a, Ka\ fvvoo) va [lol 8i8r]Tf

ekXrji'iKov fia6r}fia fuas wpas

Kaff eKaaTTjp,

G. 'AXXa bev yvcopl^fre, Kvpit,

it6(tov OKpiâ eivai ra Tpo(j)ipa.

E. Tvccpl^d) OTI eivai fvdrjvoTfpa

f8S> OTTO Toiis napiciovs, koi opa)s

tKfl fTrkfipavov 300 (jypdyKa

(JLOVOV ft$ aîoKoyov oiKoytvtiav.

G. Aef Trtorevo) va [xi 6ecop^Te

Karfpydpt]v. Eipai Tifxios av-

6pa>'iros Kill eras fifâia on

bev 6a Kepbfjcra (jitpbicra)) W-

iTore. Qd 8fx6S) inro tov opov vh

[Xfivrjre bio p.TJvai TOv\d)(ii(TTOv.

E. 'H^TTopoJ va vrro(rxf6a) b

tva p-rjva, ciKKa fitr avrhv bfv

bvvafiai va r)p.ai ^f'âios. Uido'

vbv va fiuvci rpfis nrjvas.

Residence in a Family. 159

Gr. I hope you will stay at

least three months, as I liave

to spend a great deal in

buying furniture. "When

will you corae ]

E. I should like to come to-

morrow. Will everything

be ready 1

G. At three to-morrow every-

thing will be ready for you.

E. Very good. I shall be

there at 4 p.m.

Gr. 'EXTTi'^w oTt Ba fiflmjTf rov-

Xa;î(rTov rpt'is ixrjvas fVetS^

6 avayKaadSi va 8aTTapr](Ta> ttoX-

Xct 8ia V dyopdao) fTTinXa,

HoTf 6a fXdrjTf5

E. 'EneBiifiovu va eXdco avpiov.

©a ^vai TO ndpra eroi/xa;

Gr. Eiff ras rpus avpiov oka 6a

rjvai eroipa 8t vfids.

E. noXii Ka\a. Qa eXô) fts rat

(12) ABKivAii IN A Family.

Where is my bedroom ]

Here, sir.

Are the sheets dry? Whyhave you only given me one

sheet ] Go and get another

directly.

Is there anything in those

drawers "?

Open the cupboard. I want

to hang my coat up.

Clean my boots, please, and

call me in the morning at

7. I will take coffee and

an egg at 8.

Bring me some hot water for

shaving.

When will dinner be ready 1

AGISTS EI2 OIKOrENElAN.

now flVai 6 KOITWV fXOVJ (^ fp«/3'

âroKafiapcnj

E^dj, Kvpie,

Ta aivdovia (ivai oTfymj Atari

fioi f8a>Kas novov tv aivhoviJ

TlT]yaLV€ Ka\ <f>fp€ aXXo d/ueorwr.

'YTrdp)(€i Ti (Is aira to (Tvprdpia;

Avci^f TTjv cKtvodrjKrfv (to vtov-

Xdnij. GeXw va Kpefidaa to

(f)6pfpd fiov.

KaOdptaov, TrapaKoXS), to. vttoSj)-

fiard pov Ka\ înrvrjat pf to

irpaX els ras 7- ©a irdpa Kaipe

Ka\ ev avyov fls ras 8.

^fpe pov oXiyov ^((Ttov vepov 8ta

va ^vpiadSt.

ndrt 6a ^vai iroipov to yevpaJ

i5o Dialogues.

It is now a quarter of an

hour late.

The master of the house is

out.

I don't care. I cannot wait

;

I am in a hurry. Put din-

ner on the table.

Do you like that dish \

Yes ; I like all vegetables,

especially haricot beans.

Will you have some salad

with your chicken ?

{JFor oilier dishes, etc.,

Thanks, I have finished.

Will you excuse me? I

must go out at once.

' The Theatre begins at 8,

and it is twenty minutes'

walk.

At what o'clock shall you be

backl

About 1 1 ; but I had better

take a key, so that the ser-

vants need not sit up.

*Hpyr)afP rJSr} tv rerapTOV r^f

S)pai.

'O d(fieinT]s (olKobfaTroTTjs) flvai

Aei* pe peXet. Atv Tjpnnpciy va

TTtpipiva. Bidôpai. BdXc to

(jiayrjTov fts to rpantî.

2aj dp((TK(i TO (payr/Tov tovtoJ

MaXi<TTa, p.' dpiaKovv oka Ta

"kaxaviKa, Idiass to (paaovXia.

QeXfTf oXlyrjv aaXuTav pi to

novKi

;

see Vocabulary, p. 263.)

'Ev)(apiiTTSi, (TfKfiacra.

Me (Tvyx<»pflTe JUpeirfi va ($-

(X6(a dpeams.

To dfuTpov apxi^d f's TOf OKTOi

Koi TrpeTrei va âdiaa (iKocrt

XfTTTa.

Uoiav aipav 6a iinaTpi'^rirfJ

Ilepl Tas fvbfKa' dWa KaWl-

repnv va ndpco fva Kkfibi, Sta

pa pfj ptvuvv ol xmrjpiTai aypv-

Give me the key of the front

door.

If the dogs bark at you, throw

a stone at them, and they

will run away as fast as they

can.

Thanks ; I have my stick. I

am not afraid.

Aof poi TO KKfi8iov TTJs ipnpoa-

6ivris Qvpas.

'Eav TO (TKv\i.a aas yavyl^nvtri

plylraTf piav nfTpav Ka\ da

(f)vyovv TO Taxyrtpov.

ElxapioTw' fx<o Trjv pd^8ov fiov,

AcV (f)ofioipM.

Meeting in the Street. i6i

(13) JfEETING IN THeStKEET.

How do you do 1 How are

you?

Very well, thanks ; and you \

I have a bad cold.

I am very sorry to hear it.

"Well,and how are you getting

on in Greek ?

Capitally. The language is

very pleasant and not so

difSoult as I expected.

One learns Avithout working

if one talks Greek all day

long.

Well, what news is there 1

Not much. 1 fear there will

be war, however; the peo-

ple are excited.

Have you heard the report

that Moukhtar Pacha, the

Commissioner for the Rec-

tification of the Frontier,

has retired, and will be

replaced by Said Pacha ]

It cannot be true, Said Pacha

will not leave Constantino-

ple.

I heard it on good authority.

2YNANTH212 KAG* OAON.

Ti Ka\i.viTi ; Ilwy iiaQf\

TLoKv Kaka^ fvâpicrra)' v^tis 8eJ

Eifiai jToXw Kpvo\oyT}[i('pos.

AvTrovfiai noKv (aKovcav tovto\

Kal TTcos TTtjyaivfTt els to. 'EXXij-

viKa',

Aafinpa. Eivai fvxapiaros yh.axr-

(ra Koi o;(i Toaov 8v(tko\os ocrov

(VOfllÔV,

Mavdavft Tts x<*'p'f va KaTaytvrjTai

fav opiXjj 'EXXrjviKa Kad' oXiji*

TTiv fjixtpav,

Kal ri vea ()(op,^v]

0)(i TToXXa. ôôvpai iv tovtois

on, 6a yeivrj nokefios' 6 Xaos

fivM (^rjppevos.

HKovdare rr/v etSrjaiv ori 6 Movk-

Tap naaaiy 6 iTrlrponos inl rrjs

btappvdpiaeois rav avv6pa>v

dneaiipdrj, koi oti 6d avrtKora-

aradr} VIVO Tov 2atS TraaraJ

Afv etvai Buvarov v (iKrjdevrj. 'O

2ai5 iraaas 8ev (f)€vyei dno rrjv

IloXiP.

To rjKovcra €k deTiKrjs nrjy^s.

(14) In A Cafe. EI2 KA^ÊION (ka$eneion).

Which is the best Cafe here 1 Uolov ehai to KaXXiTtpov Ka(^nov

(^Ka(f)fvflov) ivravda',

Ta icaipfla Toii 26Ka)vos, Kal tovThe Cafes Solon and Kout-

M

l62 Dialogues.

soukos are the best. You

must go past the Chamber

and straight on down the

hill. They are in the Place

de la Concorde.

There is music in the square

on Sundays, Tuesdays, and

Thursdays.

Give me a cup of coffee.

Will you have it sweet or not,

sirl

I will take it k la Turque.

How much is it ?

Ten lepta, sir.

It is not the custom in Greece

to give tips to the cafe wait-

ers.

Waiter, bring me a sweet-

meat, a glass of water, and

the chess.

AVliat is that liqueur they Tt tvorov tivai (Kf'ivo to onolov

KovTcrovKov tivai ra KaXXirtpa.

IT/jfTTei va TTfpda-qTf Trjv Bovkfiv

KOI va KarafiriTf la-a top Karr]-

(fiopov. 'Eivai fls TTjv 7iXareIai»

TTJs * 'Ofiovoias.

Ilatfft fiovaiKr) (Is rrjv ifKaruav

TtjV KvpiaKr]V, rfjv Tpirriv Koi

Trjv Ufp.nrrjv.

Aos fjioi fva Ka(j)e.

T\vKvv rov 6eX(Tf, Kvpie, ^ o;(t

;

Tbu SfKco TovpKiKov. Jloaov ex* ' >

Ae/ca XeTTTti, Kvpie.

Aev (Ivai, (Tvvrjdtia els ttjv 'EXXaSa

va Bldcoai /irraîai fls(^va(f)ikfv-

aij Tovs inrjpfTas tov Ka(j)fiov.

IlniBi, (f>epi fiov (V yXvKi(Tp.a,

(V TTOTtjpiov v8aTos Ka\ to â-

TpiKlOV.

are drinking]

It is ' mastique.*

Tell the boot-black to come

here. Here, boot-black !

Here, cab ! Drive to the club.

Have you any English news-

papers ?

Yes, sir. Here are the ' Times

'

and * Daily News.'

Will you have a cigarette ?

No, thanks ; I prefer a cigar.

irivovai',

"Eivai paoTixa.

EiVe TOV \ovaTpov va t\6r], E,

XoCfxrpf

!

"Ap.aâ, Tka (dS>. Tpdâ els Trjv

"E^fTf ayyXiKas icfyrjfiepiSas',

MdXtora, Kvpie. 'iSou ol ' KaipoV

KOI TO.^ 'Hpfpfja-ia Nea.'

GtXere ev aiyapovj

*0;î, tv)(api(rT(o' rrpoTip.S) tv

irovpov.

i

Wt'/A a Washerwoman. 163

Are you ready 1 Let us go. E'o-^e fzoifios ; *Aj vndyaixfv.

1 am tired. I shall go home. Eifxai Kovpaa^iivos. Qa imdyut

(IS TO aniTi,

(1 5)"WiTH A Washerwoman.

How soon can you let me have

my linen back ]

I cannot send the shirts before

Thursday, sir. The other

things you can have to-mor-

row.

Very good, but you must

promise them for Thursday

evening.

There is a list of my things.

7 shirts,

7 collars,

5 pair of socks,

1 2 pockethandkerchiefs,

2 pair of drawers,

3 undervests,

6 white ties.

You may put as much starch

as you like into the shirt-

fronts.

I forgot to ask how much you

charge.

My prices, sir, are rather high,

but the washing, sir, will be

thoroughly well done.

Very good. I trust to you,

ME HAYSTPAN.

Elf noaov xpovop Tjfinopfls va

fioii ini(TTp('^r]s TO. dairpoppovxd

nov;

Aev fjpiropS) pa (ras OTfiXw rh

VTroKdpi<ra npo rr^s Ile/LiTrT?;?,

Kvpit, Ta aXXa pov)(a oputs

Tjpnopflrf va ra fXTjre avpiov.

IIoXu KaXd, dWa rrptnei va vno-

o'X^^n^t OTt 6a ra <fiepr]S Tf]v

Hipnrrjv to iantpas.

I80V 6 KOToXoyos tS)v pov)(Civ pov.

7 i/jTOKapiaa (^xiTwvfs),

7 KoWdpoi (iTfpikaipia),

5 C^'h^ Ka\T<Ta»v,

1 2 pavbfjXta (Jiivopaicrpa),

2 (aa^paKa,

3 (paviXts,

6 aarrpoi Xaifio^fToi.

H/xTTopfIf va /SaXjjf oaijv KoWav

6e\(is tls ra TrtpiarijOia tS)V

xmoKapiauiv,

'E\r]crp6vr]aa va cpwrijcra) rroaa

6f\ti.s.

H Tipfj, Kvpu, fivai poiXXov pe-

ydXr], dXXa to nXvaip^p 6d

ydvTi Kadiis npfirfi,

UoXi) KaXd, 'Epmarfvopai tls

U 2

i54 Dialogues.

and remember, not later than

six on Thursday.

Certainly, sir, without fail.

eVe, Koi Kurraê va to. «;(&)

o^t dpyoTtpa drro ras f$ rrjs

Mcj'Xiora, KvpUj xônpls <j\Xo.

(16) In A Bookselleb's.

Where is the best bookseller

in the town ]

There are two good shops,

close together, in the Hue

Hermes.

Wliich do you recommend ]

"Wilberg has foreign books:

atAntoniades'.a little higher

up, you will find all the

Greek books you want.

I want to buy the 'Papesse

Jeanne,' by Roides, which I

am told is a very clever

novel.

Yes, it is the wittiest novel

in Modern Greek, but I

advise you to begin with a

comedy.

Buy the French and Greek of

some play of Sardou. Read

through a scene carefully in

both languages. Shut the

Greek and translate from

the French.

EI2 BIBAIOnOAEION.

Hov fivai 6 KaWiTtpos ^t^Xio-

TTcbXj/f rrjs noXews ',

'Yndp\ovai. 8va koXo /St^XtoTrw-

Xeia, KftVfi/a to (v nXrfa-Lov rov

aXKov (Is TTjv obov 'Eppov.

Ilinov (Tvpi(TTaTe;

'O BiXpnepy €)^€i ^€va î^Xia' tli

Tov 'AiTOCtaSow oKiyov dvcoTepa)

6a (vprjTf oka to. eWrjviKa îf:i-

Xt'a, TSuf oirolav exerc dvdyKrjv.

QeX(o V dyopdcTco r^v ' UaTricnTav

'ladvvau' inrb Poi8ou, jj onoia

po\ Xtyovv fivai jroXu ev(pvei

pvdiaroprjpa.

MoXiora, flvai to tl^viaTtpov

pvdicTTOprjpa Ttjs vecoTepas eX-'

XrjviKTJs yXo)(T(Tr]s, dXXa acts

avpôvXdco V dp\i(TT)Te pe

piav Kcopcobiap.

'AyopdcraTe to 'E\Xt]vik6i> kqI

TaXXiKop Keipfpov Ko)pcpîas

Tipos TOV âpôv. A.payva>(TaTe

pfTO. Trpoaoxfjs plap (TKTjprjv Kai

els Tcis Bvo •yXcoffcras, KXtitrare

TO 'EXXt)pik6p KfiptVOP Koi p€-

Ta(PpdaaT( ck tov ToXXikov.

J

In a Bookseller's. 165

"What a capital plan ! It will

make the study of Greek

quite amusing.

Yes, and it will teach you

the idioms of the language

in a very short time.

When you can read easily,

you ought to begin the his-

tory of Greece, by Papar-

rigopoulos, a really great

work, or the Histoiy of the

Bevolution, by Tricoupis.

But I wish to learn some-

thing about Greece at once.

What books are there %

There are two recent works

:

New Greece, by Lewis Ser-

geant, and ' La Grfece telle

qu'elle est,' by Moraitinis.

Both meritorious works.

I have heard of a book called

' The Greeks of To-day,' by

Tuckerraan, who was Ame-

rican Minister here.

It is a most amusing and

true sketch of the country

and people.

Where can I buy it t

It is out of print, but I will

write to London for a copy.

Thank you, and please send

Tt \a\nxpoi rponos ! Oa KufXTf

Tfjf aaovbrjp rtjs EWTjVLKijs

(UTfXas 8ia(TKt8aaTiKt]v.

MaXtora Koi Bia tov rporrov Tov-

Tov 6a diSaxS^re ra j'Stco/iara

T^f y\cL>a(Tt]s (VTos ^paxyrdrov

Xpovov.

'Orav tvvTjdrJTe v avayivai(TKr}T€

ilKoKios, TTpenei v dpx^Lcrrjre ttju

IcTTopiap rrjs 'EXXaSos vtto K.

IlanapprjyonovXov, irpaypariKcos

p-tya fpyov, Jj rfiv ^laroplav rî

'EXXrjviKtjs 'ETTavacrTaaeas vno

2. TpiKoinr).

'AXX' iiTiQvixoi va pa.6a> kuti ti

TTfpi 'EXXuSos ndpavra, Uoia

/St^Xia virdpxovcrt J

'Yndpxovat 8vo via fpya' fj * Nea

'EXXaff VTTo AovSo/3iKOu 2ep^fvT

Koi. ^ * 'EXXqs Ota tivai vtto

MojpoIrtVj;. 'AncfiOTepadîoXoya

(Tvyypdppxvra.

HKovara rrepi tivos fti^'Klov ' Ot

'EWrji/ft TT]! trrjjjiepov vno

TaKfppaPy 6 6no7os t]TO irpea^vs

rrjs Âp.(piKrjs iv 'Adfjvais.

Eivai Xi'aj/ tvxdpia-TOU Ka\ aXtjdfs

aKiaypdtpTjpa toO tottov Ka\ tov

'Kaov.

Tlov bvvapai va to dyopdaaJ

*H e/cSoertf (^r]VT\ri6j], aKka 6a

ypd'ât (Is TO Aovblvov va pov

OTfiXovv ev dvTiTxmov,

Ids fv\api(TT(Of Ka\ napaKaXu

1 65 Dialogues.

it to the Hotel des Etrangers

for me as soon as you re-

ceive it.

"Kfivârt TO (IS TO ^«i'o5o;^«ioi»

t£>v Stvav, ajxa to Xd^tjrf,

(17) In A Stationee'8.

Have you writing paper 1

Certainly, sir ; what size do

you require 1

Show me what you have,

and I will choose.

I want some larger paper than

this, and some envelopes.

The only larger size we have

is foolscap.

Ah ! that will not do. I must

take this. Please wrap it

up in paper for me. Howmuch is it 1

Five lepta a sheet, and you

have 23 sheets. That will

make one franc.

I will pay you in copper.

Then it will be one franc

fifteen centimes ; copper is

depreciated.

Is there anything else I can

sell you this morning 1

Yes, I want some sealing

wax and wafers.

X am surprised at your using

wafers.

EIS XAPTOnQAEION.

E)(eTe x^P'"' '""'' ypayf/ifiaTOs J

Bf/3at<or, Kvpit, irolov crx,r]fiaTos

«\'fTf avayKqv;

AfTê fiov o,Tt <X*'* *"' ^^ **"

Gf'Ao) (jityaKfiTfpovX**/""' ^^^

TOVTO Koi fiepiKovs (})aKfWovs.

To povov ptya\(iT(pov axw^t '''^

onoiov eôfifv, ftvai ds TtTapTov,

Q. ! avrb 8(» Kapvft. Upinfi

va napdi tovto, 2e napaKoXS)

TvXiê TO CIS X°P'"*''ndffoi/

UevTS 'X.cTTTa to (j>vXKov koi

iirripart eiKoiri Tpia (f>vWa' Kap-

va t6 0X.0V iv (ppdyKov.

0a aas Saxra ôXkov.

Tore Kapvti (v <f>pdyKov Koi btKa-

ntirre XfTrra* 6 xoXko; tivai els

V7T0TipT]CriV.

Exfte avdyiajv SKXov tivos, to

OTTolou pa Svpapai va aas irco-

\i]a(i} TTjv TrpcoLav tovttjv;

MoKiara, 6fX<a oKiyov ôvXoKfpi

Ka\ 0(TTl(g.

'EKirXfiTTopai aKovcov on /jera-

)((ipiî(T6t OOTtfS.

1

Travelling in the Interior, 167

Why \ They are most useful

and convenient.

I fear you have not any

Englisli J pens.

No, sir; but you will find

these very good.

I will try a few. Wrap them

up with some blotting-paper.

1 cannot bear the sand you

use in this country.

Where shall I send the parcel

to]

Send it to the house of Mr.

Coupa.

L.iar'i. \ £(fa( ttoXw )(pi](Ti[j.ai kuI

KaTakXrjXoi.

nevas rov J.

"Oxi, Kvpif, dWa 6a tvptjrt rai-

Tas noXii KuXds.

©a duKifida-oi pepiKas. Ti;Xt|e

ray pe oXiyov CTTOviroâpTov.

Afi» 8vvap,ai va vnoiîpa) tj]v

appov, TTjv onoinv peTa\(ipi-

C«rd( (Is rov Tonov roiirov.

Hoi) vd oreiXcD t6 dtpaJ

SrfTXf TO (Is T^v oiKiav rov k.

Kovna,

(18) Travelling in the

Inteeiok.

Can you tell me the name of

a good dragoman ] I wish

to ride across the Pelopon-

nese.

Yes. I know a most trust-

worthy man. I will send

him to you.

Do you know the Pelopon-

nese ]

Certainly, sir. Look at these

testimonials.

How much would it costi

We are a party of four.

I would provide horses, food,

HEPIHrHSIS EI2 TO

E2QTEPIK0N.

Avvaade vd p.01 (tnrjre to ovopa

KoKov Tivos hupprfveccsJ

GeXoj

va Ta^fibfvcrci ((jiiinTOS Kaff

oXfv TTjv II(\o7r6vvr]crov,

MdXtora' yvcopiô) audpamov nva

Xiav d^LomaTov, Qa ads tov

OTeiXci).

Tvapi^fTf Ttjv Il(Xon6vvrj(rovI

Beâiwp, Kvpte. Uaparqprja-aTe

TCI TnaTOTToiTjTiKd TavTa.

Hodov 6d K0(TTi<Tr] t6 Ta^dbiov

TovTOJ

'Eip(da Tecraapa aTopa.

*Ey(i) 6d ads TrpopTjdfvu) dXoya,

i68 Dialogues,

everything for 80 francs a

day, for all.

That seems a great deal, but

I will ask my friends.

We accept. "We shall start

from Katacolo and ride

across to Nauplia and

Epidaurus.

That is a beautiful journey.

You will see the plain of

Olympia, the temple of

Apollo Epikourios at Bassse,

Argos, Mycenae, and Tiryns.

You can retui-n from Nau-

plia to the Piraeus, or ride

to Epidaurus and take a

boat there.

"We must ride faster, or it

will be dark before we reach

Argos.

No, sir, the horses cannot

gallop.

They must. Drop the bridle.

Is anybody there ? Ostler !

Put our horses in the stable.

Is there a house here, where

we can pass the night %

Yes, sir, follow me.

We wish to sleep here, have

you a clean room ]

Yes, sir, here is a beautiful

room, but it has no beds.

rpo<f)r]v Koi ra navra hia oyBo-

TJvra (jipdyKa TrjDt'juepav 81 oXovs.

Mol (})nivoiiTai TToXXa, oAXa 6a

fpa)Tr]cra> rovt <}}l\ovs fiov.

Sfxôfieda. G' dvax(opf]aa>fi(v

ano TO KaraKciXov Koi 6a vnd-

ycofifv f(f)i.mroi (Is UavjrXiov

Koi 'Eni^tavpov,

Eii/at fopaiov ra^dbiov. Qa 'brjTt

Tr/v 7re8idSa tijs 'OXvpniai, tov

vaov TOV EniKovptlov 'AttoX-

\(ovos, TO "hpyos, rag Mi'(ciji/ar

Koi TTjv Tipvv6a. HpnopetTf va

€Trav€\6T]T( dia NouttXiov us

Ileipaia fj va IndytTe ((pimroi,

fls EniSavpov Kai tKfl va nd-

pr]Te ulav XffiQov.

npfTTfi va nopfv6a)p(v ra^vro-

pov, aXXo>f 6a vvKTaxrrj nplv rj

(p6d(T0}pfv fls TO Apyos,

0;î, Kvpie, Ta aXoya 8iv tjpnO'

povv va Kokirdacixri,

npend. A(f)r}(T€ top )(â\iv6v,

Eivai Tts eSw ; imroKopf.

BaXf Ta a\oyd pas (Is tov

(TTaiiXov,

'Yndpxd Kappia olna ivTavOa,

onov va 8vi^6a>pev va St/X^m-

pev T^v vvKTaJ

MaXtora, Kvpit, aKoXovBrja-aTf pt.

'Emdvpovpfv va Koipr}6wp(v iv-

Tav6a, (X^'f Kadapov dcopdriov^

MaXiora, Kvpif, l8ov lapdlov Sw/xa-

TioVy alOâ 8(v e;(€t Kpt^^dna.

Travelling in the Interior. 169

Fortunately I have brought

one.

We are hungry. Have you

a chicken or Eome lamb \

"Would you like potatoes ?

The meat is not cooked

enough. Cook it a little

more.

Send our dragoman here.

Give me a light.

What have we to payl

100 francs, sir.

Show me the bill. I will

conect it.

Pay him 50 francs. It is

enough.

There are 50 francs. Take

them and let me go. Get

out of the way.

Drive on, coachman. Let

him talk.

Hold your tongue. I shall

not listen.

We ought all to have brought

our own beds, and as much

food as possible. The hotels

are abominable.

Order three horses, two for

gentlemen and one for a

lady, to be ready to-morrow

at seven o'clock, if it is

fine.

Would you not prefer a mu/e,

they are more sure-footed 1

Eiirv;^cos «yob ('f)(pa to ISikov

fJ-OV.

Ufivcbfifv. "Excels Kavev vovW ^

oXiyov apvij

©eXere TraraTts {y(o)fxriKa) J

To cf)ayr]T6v dev (ivcu upKfTa

^rjpifvov, "^tjat TO oXiyov ire-

piaaoTtpov.

^TflXf pas e8co TOP bifppTjvta,

Aoi fjiov €v (f)5)S.

Tt ()(optv va nXT]pa(Ta)p(» f

'Ekqtov (f>pdyKa, Kvpif.

Af'i^ov poi TOP KaToXoyov, Qa

TOP biop6(t}(Ta>.

liXrjpaxraTf TovTifVTrjKOVTa (jipdy

Ka, Eivai apK€Ta.

'I80V TTfvrjura <f>pdyKa. Hdpe to

Koi a({>(s pe va <f)uya). ^vyt

an ipnpos pov,

Tpn'jSa, dpa^a, "Acfirjai tov I'a

Xe'yi?.

2i<j>na' Siv aKovca.

"EnpeiTt va ^fpa)ptv o\oi to Kpt0-

d^Tid ^las Ka\ oatjv f/bwdptda

TTtpiaaoTepav Tpo4>rjv. Td ^(vo-

8o;^fIa fivai dnoTponaia,

IlapdyyfiXe va eTOipaadaai rpia

aXoya, 8vo Sia Kvpiovs /cat (V

bia Kvpiav, avpiov (Is raj (tttu,

fciv Tjvai iipa'ios Kaipos,

Aev TTpoTipart tva povXdpi;

(piav

Tjpiovov)' jSaStfet dcT(pdX(CTT(pov,

lyo Dialogues.

No, a mule is so uncomfort-

able to ride.

The saddle is not on properly.

Are the girths right t

Tighten the girtlis.

Loosen the girths.

That bit is too small. Change

it.

The reins are very thick.

Is this horse sure-footed

—

fast—quiet 1

He is a little lame.

No, sir, he always goes like

that. It does not matter.

Are the shoes all right \

Hold this horse while I help

the lady to mount.

Lead the horse with the bag-

Can we cross the river here ?

Yes, sir, it is only two feet

deep.

Send for the priest of the

village— the school-master

—the chief man—the De-

march.

Sir, good day, we wish to

pass the night here.

Welcome. Our accommoda-

tion is humble.

Will you send a man to

0;^t* TO fiovXdpi eipai ttoXii a*ca-

TaXXTjAoj/ 8i Imracriav.

'H (TfXn (to eiîTnrtoj') bev tlvai

KaToKXfjXcos âXfievr], 'll fcbi/jj

T^s creXas eifot aaiaTciJ

2(^t^f TTjv ^dtvTjv (ttjv vyykav^.

'AnoKvae ttjv ô>ui]v (êcr^t|e Trjv

Ta yKtfua ravra eivai ttoXv fiiKpd.

AXXaê ra.

Ta r]via flvai 7ro\v ;ôi>8pa.

To aXoyov tovto e;êi a(r(f)aXes

/3uStcr/xa, fivai rax^v—rjavôv^

XtoXaivft oXiyov.

*0;(t, Kvpie, TtavTOTf er^t iTTjyaUfi.

Aei* TTfipdêi.

Ta TTeraXa tovtu eivai KoXdJ

KpaTT/iTe TOVTO TO aXoyov, eV a

e'-yo) ôr)dci) T^v KVpiav v dva^l],

Odrjyei to akoyov p.e Tas ano-

(TKfvds.

Avvdp.e0a va 8iaj3w/iei/ ivTaiida

Tov iTOTafiov;

MaXiara, Kvpie, e^fi p-ovov 8vo

noboyv ^ddos,

2TftXf dia TOV TTOintav rov âpiov

—roi' bihacTKoXov—tov irpov-

\ovTa TOV Ar)pap)(ov.

KaXrjptpa, Kvpif, eiridvpovpev vcl

8i€X6a,p€U TTJV pvKTa ivTavda.

KaX«br wplaaTf. Ta npos dvd'

itavmv etcat nevi^pd.

SreiXare Tiva irapaKoXovfifv va

Shooting. 171

guide us % How far is it

to Nauplial

How many liours shall we

take to reach Mycenae on

horseback ]

The road is very steep and

narrow.

imi obrjyqa-rj. Uocrov fiuKpav

fwai ftos fls t6 NauTrXtov;

Ilocras copav da KafxoofjLfv va c{)dd-

trci)/xe«/ fls ras MvKrjvas {(piUTToi'

H 68of fivai TToXv KpT]fiva)8T}i koI

arfVTj,

(19) Shooting.

"Where is the wind 1

It is in the north. "We shall

have good sport.

It is in the south. The birds

will be up in the mountains.

It is no use going out.

Have you got my cartridges ?

Fetch the dogs from the boat.

Have you loaded the gun

—

the rifle ]

Bird on the left— on the

right.

Do you see where they went 1

They have gone over the

mountain.

I have hit him. I have

wounded him.

Look out. There's a pig in

those bushes.

Keep the dogs back. Don't

make a noise.

There he is.

Come along, he is wounded.

He cannot get away.

KYNHriON.

Atto ttov eivai 6 avtfiosj

Etwi ôpeios. 9a fâfiev koKop

Kvvriyiov.

Eicat voTioi. Ta rrovkia da ^vai

(Is TO ôvvd. Eivai dva^tXis

va (êXdcofifv.

"E^fis TO. (^vatKia fxov ;

4>epf TO (TKvKih diro rfjv Xffiôv.

Eyepiaes to TOvcpfKt (to ottXov) j

Eu TTovXi npos TO dpUTTtpd—'

bfîd.

BXeVrrf ttov VTTTJyov J

'Yniiyov \nrfp to opos.

To (n(TV)(a. To fTrXrjyaaa.

Upoaf^f. 'iboii eicfl tv yovpovvi

fls TOVS âTOVS (Kfivovs.

KpdTT)(Te Ta onio'Oi aKvXid, M^

Kdprjs 66pvl3ov.

'EKfl fivai. No to !

'AKoXoidrja-ov, fnXrjyadr}. Aiv

q/iTTopet va yXvTaxTr],

172 DialoFttes.

Give me my l<uife.

Take care, sir.

All right. I am ready.

Well, how many woodcocks

did you get ?

It was too wanii for wood-

cocks. They are in the

mountains.

Is there any game in that

country 1

The wood is full of game.

Take the hag back to the

yacht and get dinner ready.

We shall be back in an hour.

Aoy jxov TO fia\aipi fiov.

UpoaeâTtj Kvpif.

TloXv Kn\a. Eifiai troifios.

Km TTOcrats ^vXoKorais iKTvnrj-

vaTf ;

'Hto rroXi) îcrrr] 8ia ^vXeKcSraiy,

El fat fts Ta ôvvd,

"E^fi Kvvrjyiov tis iKtlvuv tqv

TOTTOVJ

To Sdcros tivai ytfrnTQ Kvvijyi

(nXripes KVvrjylov).

TJrjyaivf rov craxKov (Is ro 6a\a-

prjyov Koi eroipaae to -yfC/xa.

&a (Travfkdapev fitra piav wpav.

LETTERS.

1 74 Letters,

LETTERS.(1) Invitation.

Mr. and Mrs. B. request the honour of Mr. A.'s company

at dinner on Saturday, the 28th inst,, at 6.30 p.m.

Answer.

Mr. A. has the honour to thank Mr. and Mrs. B. for their

kind invitation, and regrets exceedingly that he has promised

to go into the country to ghoot, from the 27th inst. to the 3rd

prox.

Invitation.

Dear Mrs, X.

I regret exceedingly that my being in mourning prevents

!ny receiving you as I should like, but it has been impossible

for us to give dinner-parties since my aunt died eighteen

months ago. If, however, you would like to come in for a

cup of tea in the evening, we shall be delighted to see you,

and to hear an account of your adventures at Megara.

Yours affectionately.

Answer.My dear Mrs. A.

Your invitation to come in after dinner is most hospitable,

and I need hardly say how much I should have enjoyed

accepting it, but unfortunately I caught a cold yesterday on

the Patesia road (which is certainly the most dusty, windy,

and disagreeable in Athens), and my doctor forbids me to

leave the house. My husband is too busy with his horrid

antiquities to give a thought to anything that has not been

buried at least 1000 years. I look forward to the pleasure

of meeting you at the great ball at the Palace on New Year's

Day, to which I am told everybody is invited.

Ever yours, with love,

Y. X.

Invitations. 175

EniSTOAAI.(1) nP02KAH212.

Kvptof Kol i\ Kvpla B. Xafi^dvovai rrjv Tifjifjv pa Trpoa-KaXfcroxTt

(Is ydfj-a Tov Kvpiov A. rw â^âvM, 283 tVra/ieVou firjvos, 6.30/*.//.

AHANTHIIS.

'O Kvptos A. Xafx^jvei t^v Tififjv va fvxapK^TTjajf rbv Kvpiop Koi

TTjv Kvpiav B. Sia rfjv tvytvrj iTp6(TKKr]rTlv t<ov, XvTretTat Se VTrfpôKiKo.

SioTi vnefTxiGif va vndyi] els rfjv fô^fjv Sta va Kwriyrârj dno r^f

271JJ icTTajxevov /x«XP' ''^S 3»;s tow irpoaeôvs fJLrjvos,

nP02KAH2I2.

AyaTrrpy] /not Kvpta X.

Avnoipai ttoXv 8i6ti (vtKa iTfvQovs ipnohiôpun va aas 8ex0S> ios

fTTfBvpovv, aXX' ^TO aSvvarov va Sibmpev ytifiara drro tov Oavdrov

rrjs Bfias pov irpo SfKaoKTco prjv&v. Eav iv rovTois fvapfaTrjdrjTf va

(\6rjTf m iTirjTf TO Tf'iov pfff fjpatv to fcrnipas, 6a tixapicrrr]6a)p(v

va ads tSw/nei' /cat v aKovaapfv ttjv Sifjyrjaiv Ta)i» ets Meyapa

jr(pm(Tfi,oi>v aas.

"OXoJs npodvpos.

AnANTH2I2.

AyaTTijTTj poi Kvpia A,

'H 7rp6aK\r]ais aras oTTwy f\6a Trpbs xipds ptTa to Stlirvov eivai

\iav (}>iK6^tvos, koi Sei/ €)(<i} dvdyKi/v va f itto) Troaov fvj(dpi(rTOV 6d

pel TjTO va TTjv f^fôpTjv, aXX dTV)(ci)s (KpvoXoyrjcra x6fs fls ttjv oSok

Tci)v Uarrjcricov (JJtis tivai ^(fiaioas fj paXXov KoviopTutbrjs , npocTTjVfpos

Ka\ bva-dptaros (Is 'AOrivas) Koi 6 laTpos pov h(v pot f7rtTp(nei va

(^(k6a Tijs oiKias. O av^Dyos pov (ivai Xiav dnrjcrxoXTjpevos fls

Tas naXaioapxaioTrjrds tov, woTe vci pfj (TKcrrrrjTai irepl aWov tivos

pr} T(6appfVov Toi\dxia-Tov eVt lOOO (Trj. 'eXttI^<o va Xaj3a) t^v

€vxapi(TTr](nv va ads avvavTrjaa els tov peyav dvoKTopiKov xopbv ttjv

npaTTjv TOV veov erovs, els ov, po\ einov, ndvTes irpoaKoKovvrai,

"EipX fUTa iroXX^s dydinjs f/ (J)iXtj aas,

Y. X.

1/6 Letters.

(2) To TIIE DiEECTOB OF THE PoST OfFICK.

Sir,

I beg to inform you that I am now living in the house of

Mr. Coupa, near the palace, and request that you will have

all my letters sent there.

I am, sir, your obedient servant.

To THE Same.

Sir,

I beg to draw your attention to the following cases of

negligence on the part of the Post-office. On Thursday last

the mail came in at 1 1 a.m., but the postman did not bring

my letters until late in the afternoon. On Saturday the mail

came in at lo a.m., but I did not receive ray letters until

late at night. As the mail for Europe goes out on Thursday

and Saturday at 6 p.m., I was unable to answer the letters I

received, and iim forced to wait until next week. This is a

matter of the utmost importance, and I request that you

will enquire into it, and make every endeavour to have it

rectified. I am, etc.

To THE Same.

Sir,

I am leaving Athens on the 26th of this month, and

request that all letters for me may be re-directed to Poste

Restante, Trieste, until the 6th pros., and after that to

Hotel Continental, Paris. I am, etc.

(3) To A Greek Masteb.

Sir,

Wx. has recommended you to me as a teacher of

Modern Greek. I should like to know what your usual

charge is, and what time you have free. If you can come to

my hotel at 4 o'clock to-morrow afternoon, I shall be glad

of a personal interview. Yours faithfully.

To tJie Director of the Post-Office. 177

P (2) nPOS TON AIEYeVNTHN TON TAXYAPOMEION.

K Kvptc LitvQvvra,

Aafj^vo) Tî/ Tiixrjv pa yva>(TTOTroifj(r<o vîiv on KaroiKO) rfSt] els rrjp

oiKiav Tov KVplov Kovrra, nXTjaiov tuv ovaKTOpav, koL eras napaKokci

va buiTa^rjTt va (rrfWuvrai cKfi 6\ai ai itnvTokai p.ov.

AtarcXd) /tera affiaa-fiov vfitrtpog Btpdnav,

ripOS TON AYTON.*A^l6Tlft( KvpK,

Aa/x^dcco TTiv Tip-ffv va eras TTapaKoKfato va (TriarrjCTTiTt t^v vfitrepav

irpo(ro)(fjv eVl tS>v e^rjs TrfpiTrraaecov d/icXctof tow raxvdpofifiov.

Tt]u 7rap(\6ov(ra» Uifiirnjv t6 Taxv8poix(iov €(f>6aafv ds rag fvSeKa

IT. p.., dXX' 6 ypap.p.aTOKopii<TTr]g bev fxoi f(f)(pe ras (irtaroXas tlp^

apya p,fTa p,«rqp3p'i.av, Th ^d^ârov to ra^vSpopdov fcfidaafv

fls ras 8«a Jr./*., dWa 8fv eXaôv rds fnia'To\ds fiov et/xiy dpya rfjv

VVKxa. 'Endbi] rh Ta)(yhpopelov 8ia ttju 'EvpaTTTju dva-xapti ttjv

II(p.7rrrjv Ka\ to 2d^âTov ds Tas f^ f^f^-t ^«'' rjdvvrjdrjv v diravrfjaa)

CIS ras eViOToXdf, ras onoias tXaôv Ka\ dvayKdôpat v dvapevu> ttjv

irpoa(\T] i^bopdba. Tovto (ivai avTiKeip-tvov vyîcTTrjs cnrovdaioTTjTOs

Ka\ napaKoKco vpds va ((pfvvqarjTt icara/SdAXovres nda-av Trpocnrddfiav

irpbs 8i6p6a<Tiv, AtareXw k.t.X.

^ a > nP02 TON AYTON.Kvpcf AtfnaviTa,

UporWfpai V dvajâpfjcra e^ 'Adrjvmv Tfjv tlKocTTTjv (kttjv tov ftTjvos

tovtov Ka\ napaKcikS) oXat al npos fie eniaroXaX va bievdvvavrai els

Tepyearrjv * Poste Restaute /i«xpt rrjs eKTtjs irpoaexpiis Koi KaT&iTiv

els t6 Hdtel Continental els Uapia-lovs. AtareXca (e.T.X.

(3) nPOS EAAHNA AIAA2KAA0N.Kvpie, ^ '

O K. (TVPeaTTjaev vfMS ms dibdtTKcAop ttjs veas eWrjviK^s

y\o>(r(rrjs. 'Enedvpovp pa pdOca noiap dpLOi^rjv Xap^dvere Ka\ noias

&pas exere f\ev6epas. 'Eav dvvrj&riTe va eXdrjre els to êvo8oxe7ov

els Tas Teacrapas /x./t. t^s avpiop, 6d evxapi(TTt]6a vd Xdâ npoaaTrtic^v

Tiva (Tvvevrevîp. , ,

i/xerepos.

178 Letters.

Answer.

Sir,

My terms are three francs an hour for Greek lessons, hut

if you were here for some time, I would naturally make a

reduction. I am employed at the Gymnasium (College) all

the morning, but could come to you either in the afternoon

or evening. I shall await your reply with impatience.

Yours obediently.

Sir,

I am going down to Phalerum to-morrow afternoon, so that

I shall be unable to take my lesson. If you are disengaged

in the evening, about 9 p.m., please come and see me.

Yours truly.

(4) To Engage Rooms.

Sir,

I shall arrive at your hotel by the steamboat from Marseilles

to the Piraeus next week. Be so good as to retain a sitting-

room and two bedrooms for me, and send a guide to meet the

steamer at the harbour.

Yours, etc.

(5) To A DOCTOB, DEMANDING InSTANT ATTENDANCE.

Sir,

Be so good as to come and see me at once, as I am in

great pain, and fear that it is the beginning of a severe

illness.

Yours faithfully.

To a Doctor. 179

ADANTHSIS.

*AînTifie Kvpif,

'A/ioijSiji/ Xafi^dvco Tpia (f>pdyKa Tqv &pav iia (ladrjfiara rrjs iWrj-

viKrjs, aXX* (CIV 6a SiafidvrjTf tvravda eVt riva )(p6vov, da fXaTraxrw

<l)V(TiKa Tw Xd-yo) rfju Tiprjv. Eipai fvr](T)(oKripevos oKrjv ttju Trpcoiav fls

TO yvpvdcriov, aKKa dwap-ai va epxapai, npos vpas pera pearip^piav ^

TO tantpas, 'Avvnopoucos dvaptva Tfjv dnavrijaip <ras.

"ox (Of TTpoBvpos,

Kvpit,

0a KareXdo) (Is ^dikripov avpiov p(Ta p«Tr]p^ptav, Za-Te Ssv 6a

SvvT]6a> va Kapco to pddrjpd pov. 'Eav 8(V (XV^^ KooXvpd Ti to

iqiripas Kara ttjv evvdrTjv, (K6(t(, napaKaXS), vd pe 'i8t]t(.

YpfT(pos.

(4) nP02 EN0IKIA2IN AOMATIQN.

Kvpi(,

6a (f)6d(T(i) (Is t6 ^(yoBox(tov eras ^la tov (k Maatraklag ds

ridpata aTpoirXoiov Trjg irpoaexovs (^BopdSos. Ad^(Te Ttjv koKo-

(Tvvtjv va poi KpaTTioTjTe plav at6ov(Tav Ka\ 8vo KOiTcavas Ka\ irip'âTf

(va oSrjyoi/f Kara t^v afpiîv tqv aTponXoiov fls tov \ip(va.

iîaT(\S> Ac.r.X.

(5) EHISTOAH nP02 lATPON, AI* H2 ZHTEITAI

KATEHEirOYSA Eni2KE*l2.

Kvpie,

Ad^(Te TT/v KaKo(Tvvr]v va (\6rjTt va p (ni(rK«j>6^Te apitras,

(TTdSrj vno(f)(pu> iroXi) Koi <f)oôvfuu on tovto fivai dp^f) troâpds

d(T6(V(ias.

'Yp(T(pOS,

N 3

i8o Letters.

(6) Requesting Letter of Introduction.

Sir,

I am about to make a journey to Corfu. As I know that

you are a native of that place, I venture to ask you to give

me a letter of introduction to your friends there. Before

leaving, I shall call to thank you for your extreme kindness

to me during my stay here.

Yours very sincerely.

(7) To THE Minister op the Interior.

Sir,

I have the honour to inform you that I propose to make

a tour through the interior of Greece, going from here to

Mycenae, and request that you will give me an assurance

as to whether there is any danger to be apprehended from

brigands. I was told in England by a friend, who is in the

Turkish service, that it was unsafe to visit the Acropolis

without a guard of soldiers. At first I did not venture to go

there, but, encouraged by the example of some fellow-travel-

lers, I sallied forth one day at i p.m., armed with a revolver,

a heavy geological hammer, and an umbrella. As no attack

was made upon me, I repeated the experiment, and, em-

boldened by success, now go there in the moonlight, unarmed

and unattended, to the consternation of my wife, who threatens

to come out from England and protect me from brigands.

Although, as you will perceive from the above account, I

am a man of great courage and no prejudices, my duty

towards my family would not allow me to start on my

journey to Mycense without an explicit assurance from you,

sir, that I shall incur no danger.

I have the honour to be, sir,

Your obedient servant.

Address

—

To the Minister of the Interioi', etc. etc.

To the Minister of the Interior. i8i

(6) Al' H2 ZHTEITAI EniSTOAH 2Y2TATIKH.

Kupte,

UpoTidffiai va Ta^(iB(V(r<o /i«XP* KtpKvpas, 'ETTftS^ Se yvapiâ

on Kardyfade tK tov tottov (Ktivov, ToiKfio) va ^rjrfjaa) iiap Vfxup

cTvcrraTtK^v €Tn<TTo\f]v npos tovs «« (f)tXovs aas. Uplp ^ avax<''>pW^

6(\a) aas (iTi(Tiif(f)6rj, tva aas fvxapi(TTf)(r(c Sia ttjv fityaXrjv irpbs f/xe

KcikoaCvrjv aas Kara ttjv ivraiiQa Siuiiovrjv fiov.

"OXas vnerepos,

(7) nP02 TON KYPION Em TON E2QTEPIKQN YnOYPrON.

Kvpif 'YTTovpye,

Aafi^dva Tr}v Tip.r]v va yvoDOTOirotrjcrci) vpLiv on irporidtfiai va

iTfpifXda) TO (aarepiKov t^s 'EXXdSos, 7n]yaiva>u fvTfv0ev fls MuKi/ray,

Koi TTapaKaXS) vd fie SiaQfâioxrrjre nepl tov av imdpxr] kIvSwos tis

va avXXT}ff)da> dnb Xjja-Tds. ^tXos fi-ov tis (v 'AyyXi'a, StareXaJi/ ev

TovpKiKj} vnrjpfcria, fJ.61 tinev on t/to (ttikivSwov va emaKfcfid^ tis

Trjv 'AKpowoXtv avfv avvoBeias aTpanarrav. Kar' dpâs 8fv eToXfiav

va vndyo) eKcl, dXX' fv6appvv6f\s eV tov napabflyiunos a~vvo8oindpav

Tiva>v f^fjXdov fjnepav Tiva Trtpl rrjv Trpayrrjv p., p., (pepaiv noXvKpoTov,

ptydXrjv yfcaXoyiKriv a({>vpav, Ka\ p.iav ofinpeXav. Eirfitfj ov8fpia

7rpo(T/3oX^ eyivfTo kot (fiov, ircaveXaôv to neipapa kii\ ivBappvvQiis

tK TTis (TTirvxtas Trrjyalvat rd>pa €/c«i, OTav rjvai atXrjvi], aoTrXos Kal

livfv (TvvoSfias irpos (poôv ttjs trufuyou /xou, fJTis dndXfl va eXdrj

OTTO TT]v 'AyyXt'ai' orray p.e -rrporpvXd^n dno tovs XrjaTas.

MoXoi/ort, ws 6eX(Te naparrjprja'fc, €K ttjs avu tirjyTjafcas, eip.ai

dvBpamos p.eydXr)s yevvaioTrjTOS koi avfv irpoXfiylrewv, to wpos ttjv

oiKoyfi/fidv p.Qv KadrJKOv 8(v 6d p.01 iirtTptne va e7ri;^fipijo-a) ttjv irtpirj-

yrjaiv fiOv fls MvK^vas avtv prjTfjs 8ia3fâiu>a€(t>s fK iMfpovs vpa>v.

Kvpu VTTovpye, on 8fv da Starpeô) Kivbvvov Tivd.

'Enl TovTOis v7io(n}p,€iolfjuu dae^daTUS,

(Âiddwais) Ev7T(i6eaTaTos.

T^ Kvpico (TTi Twv 'EaaTtpiKuv 'Ynovpyw or Ilpos to trrl tuv

'Eo'ojTfpiKwv 'Ynovpytlov,

1 82 Letters.

(8) Eeply.

Ministry of the Interior, Athens,

April I, 1879.Sir,

In reply to your communication to the Minister of the In-

terior, I am ordered to inform you that no case of brigandage

has occurred within the frontiers of the Greek kingdomduring the last eight years, and that you can travel anywhere

you please in Greece without the slightest danger. Anyreports you may have heard to the contrary are inspired by

ignorance, prejudice, or malevolence, and may be entirely

disregarded. I may further remark that Turkish officials

are not usually the best authorities on Greek affairs, and

that their views are too often discoloured- by interest or

by prejudice.

The earnest desire of the Greek Government is that

Englishmen should travel in Greece, and learn to know the

country and the people, and thus that knowledge of the

truth may expose the absurdity of these stories.

I am, sir, your obedient servant.

(9) Information about Athens.

Dear Mr.,

Should you like to become a member of the Club during

your stay at Athens ? Strangers are admitted for a month

without subscription, and I shall be most happy to put down

your name, if you desire it. You will find there the ' Times *

and ' Daily News,' with all the foreign and Greek newspapers

and reviews, among others the ' Nineteenth Century.' There

are billiard and card-rooms, but no restaurant. If you will

call there at 5 p.m. this afternoon, and ask for me, I will

introduce you to the principal members and show you the

rooms.

Yours very truly.

Reply from Mmister of hiterior. 183

(8) AHANTHSIS.

'Ev 'A^^vatf Tjf I17 *AirpiKlov l879.

TO Em TON E20TEPIKQN YnOYPrEION,

Kvpie,

Ely dndvTrjaiv r^ vfttrepas alrficfois irpos tov vnovpyov tcov

iaoDTepiKcov, t^ct eWoXiji/ va 7rXj/po(ôpjj(rQ) v/zSy on 8e»» lirdpxf^

napdbiiyp.a XjjaTflas (vtos tS)v avvopav tov iWrjviKOV âcriXeiov

irpb tS)v Tf\evTalci)v Skto) irmv Ka\ on biivaade va TaêibfvarjTe

OTTOvbrjnoTe elap€<TTTJ(rd€ eV EXXdSi, avcv tov €Xa;^toTOU Kivbvvov.

iJacra (p'ijfiTj, ttju onoiav fx^'''^ icras aKovati wept tov fvavriov, etvat

(fiTTVfvais dyvoias, TrpoXrjyj/'eas, rj KaKoôv\ias, Koi Swarai TiS fVTf\a>s

m TrjV irepi(f)povf](rr], Avvapai npoaeTi va TrapaTrjpTjaca on v7raXX?;Xoi

ToypKoi 8(v (ivai crvvrjSai ol fjioXKov dîoTTitXTOi TTpoKeifievov wepl tS)v

fXXr]viKa)v irpaypaTcov ai 8e yvStpai Ta>v 7n]ydôviTi.v €< avfifpepovros

f] TrpoKrjyjrfais.

'H ^(orjporepa (niBvpia t^s eXXrjviKrjs Kvêpvrja-fOis elvai t6 vh

Ta^fiSfvaxTiv AyyXoi tv EXXaSt, Ka\ va (movSdâai ttjv xo>pav koi

TOV \a6Vf oTTCos f] yvSxns t^s dXrjdeias fKBfcrr] to y(\6tov tS>v fivBaiv

TOVTOiV.

AtareXw (lerd njs irpoatjKovarjs ijroX^êws npoOvfios.

(9) HAHPOÔPIAI HEPI AGHNQN.

*AyantjTe /loi Kvpie ,

'ETTiOvufiTe vd yelvrfre pfXos Trjs Aeax*]! Kara t^v iv 'Adfjvais

SiaiJLOvrjv aas', Ot êvoi tivai 8tKTol iv aiiTfj em eva fii]va avev

avvSpofirji' 6d rjfxai 8e Xtar (VTVxr]S vd Koraypdvô) to ovofid eras,

dv (iapearâdf. 0a fvprjre tKtl tovs ' Kaipoiis,' rd ''Ufiepfjo-ia

Nea, Ka\ o\as rds êas Ka\ iWrjviKas ecprjutpitas koi nepiodiKa, iv

ois KCLi TTjv ' AfKdTTjv 'EvvdTr]v 'EKaT0VTaeTT]pl8a.' 'Yirdpxovai acf)ai-

piaTTjpia Ka\ tcopdna xapTonaiyviov, dXX' ovx} Ka\ eanaropiov^ 'Eay

BiXrjre vd nfpdarjre air fVet ds rds nevTe p. p. t^s a-rjpfpov Ka\ pf

^T]Trjar]Tf, 6d Trapovaidaoi vp^s fls to Kvpiarepa peXr] Ka\ 6d ads

telô) TO bwpdria.

OXoH vpirepos.

1 84 Letters.

Dear Mr. R,

I have only just received your kind note, owing probably

to some mistake on the part of the messenger, and hasten to

answer it with all speed. The proposal you make I shall

accept most gladly, and will call at the Club, as you suggest,

at 5 p.m.

Yours sincerely.

Dear Mr. G ,

You told me the otlier day that you would like to come

and see us play lawn-tennis at Phalerum. If it is fine to-

morrow, I am going down by the 2.30 p.m. train, and expect

to meet the oflBcers of the English ship at the Piraeus there.

If you will meet me at the corner of the Rue Hermes and

the Place de la Constitution at 2.10 p.m. we can go in a

carriage or by omnibus to the station. It is only ten

minutes by rail to Phalerum, so that we can have a game

and take the 4 p.m. train back to Athens. I believe I amright in thinking that trains run every half-hour in the

afternoon both from Athens and the Piraeus. Please send an

answer by the bearer.

Yours very truly.

Dear Sir,

I should have been delighted to come to Phalerum with

you, but to-morrow afternoon am obliged to attend the funeral

of an old friend, who died this morning. It would be inter-

esting for you to come too, and I can promise you that it

will not be so lugubrious a ceremony as in England. The

procession will pass the Chamber of Deputies at 2.15 p.m.,

where I hope you will join me. We can go to Phalerum

some other day, but you must not count upon me as a player,

your English games are too violent and dangerous.

Yours very truly,

G

Miscellaneous. 185

'KyaTTryrt ftoi Kvpif P.

MoXtf jrpo fUKpov eXajSov ttjv fvfjifVTJ (t:i<tt6Kj)V eras, (vfKa \a6ovs

Tivhi itiOaPov Tov KOfuoTOVf Koi (TTTfida) V aTravrtjaa). Ttji/ Trporacriv,

rfjv oirolav poi Acd/xwre, a7ro8<xo/«zi Xiav aapfvcui Koi r^Xco eXêi fis

TTiv Afo-xf]" S>S /*°* ypa(})tT€ fif ras TTfvre fitra fif(TT)p^piav.

2as dairdôpai, 6 (})[\os aas.

' *AyaTrr)Tf pot Kvpie T.

Mot (tiTfTe irpo tivcov fjpepav on elxaplaras 6a Tk6i]Tf va ibrjTf

fjpas naiôvras lawn-tennis els âkrjpov. 'Eav ûai kuXos Kaipos

avpiov TTpoTidepai va KareXdoi 8ia t^s ApMôcTTOixias tS)v 8vo koi

Tjpiafias p. p., (KiriCtov va (rvvavrrja-a touj dîapariKoiis tov ayy\iKov

nXoiov TOV aradpevovTOs els Uttpaid, 'Eav deXrirt va pe avvavrrjarjTe

tis Tijv ycovlav Trjs obov 'Eppov Koi nXardas ^vvrdypaTos tts Tas ovo p.

p. bwdptda va inrdyccpev e(f)' dpd^rjs rj 8ia tov Xetocôpeiov fis tov

(TTadpov. MexP'' *aXijpou 8ia tov triSrjpobpopov (ivai povov 8eKa

XfTrrd, Stare 8vvdp(6a va Ttalâipev mi va enavfXdapev fls Adfjvas

8ia TTJs &paô<TTOixlas t5)v Tfacrdpav p. p. No/xi'ô) on 8ev cr(f}dK\(0

(f)pova>v OTt al dpaôaroixiai ds>ax<opovai icad rjpia-ftav Sipav pera

pfo-Tjp^piav Koi «| 'A6t]vS)v /cat ck Hfipaiios. 'AiroarfiXaTf poi,

napaKokS), Bid tov K0u.iarT0v dndvTrjcriv, „^^ , ,•^ ' '^ ' OAojj vptTfpos,

'Ayanrjri Kvpte,

Evxapi<TTa>s rj6f\ov ptra^rj fls ^dXrjpov ptff vpav, aXX' avpiov

ptrd p.((rT]p8piav fipai vnoxpfooptvos v aKoXovdfjaa t^v Ktjdfiav

iraXaiov <{>iKov diTo6av6vTos arpxtpov T^f rrpoatav, "HêXei' (ladai

fvhia(f)epov Ka\ Bid ads fniayjs fdv eXdrjre Ka\ tras xmoa-xopai OTi dev

fivai Tocrov nevdipos TeXtrrj as iv 'AyyXia, 'H Krjbfia dtXei BieXdet

irpo TOV BovXfVTrjplov els rds bvo koi tv TtrapTOv p.p., onov cX;rt^tD

6d pe avvavrfjariTe. 'Hpnopovpev vd KOTaâpev els ^dXrjpov uXXrjv

Tivd fjpepaVj akXd 8ev irpenei vd pe decop^Te i>s iraiKTTjv' to dyyXiKC

rraiyvidid aas eivai noXv /3tata koi Kivdvvudr].

"OXas vpeTtpos, „

flTT] T(x>V

paftOVT)

^vyevva.

,rfj rov

-TICTTOV.

:' iopui.

PAET V.

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

W

PAGE

Vames of . . . 271re 274ts of Human . . 275Public, etc. . . 266

274^atural Features . 276;les of . . . . 270enses, etc. . . 273

372263272268

rms . . . 377ays ... 258ling . . . 261

.... 267. Relations

.

275.... 258

PAGBNatural Features .... 376Newspaper, Words to Facili-

tate reading 260Painting 274Plants 272Political Terms 260Professions .265Qualities, Senses .... 273Relations, Ages of Man . . 275Sculpture 273Senses, Faculties, etc. . . 273Shooting 270Time ........ 259Trades 265Travelling 261Trees 272Weather 25QWeek, Days of 258

few exceptions, the English words in each subject areuilly, in order to facilitate reference.

Ic-

X.

VOCABULAEY.

The Days of the Week, At ^/x/pat r^f i^SofxaSos.

Sunday, 17 KvpioKfj.

Monday, ^ AtvTfpa.

Tuesday, 17 Tpirrf.

AVednesday, ^ TfTdpTtj.

Thursday, ij Utp-rvn}.

Friday, 17 napacKevf).

Saturday, to la^ârov.

The Months, Of prjvts.

January, 6 *lavovapios.

February, 6 ^(^povapios,

March, 6 Mapnos.

April, 6 'ATTpt'Xtof.

May, 6 Maioj.

June, 6 'lovwoj.

July, 6 'lovXios.

August, 6 Avyovaros.

September, 6 ênTtp^pio^

October, 6 'OKTd)^pios.

November, 6 Nof/x/Spior.

December, 6 Ae/ce/x^pios.

Âe Seasons, At Spat rov trovs.

Spring, ^ *Ai'oi^ts' (to "Eap).

Summer, to KaXo/catpt, Oepos.

Holidays,

New Year's day, ^ TrpwTj; toO

€T0V9, f] TtpOiTO-^pOVla TO »'«'oi'

?TOS.

Twelfth Night, ra Qeoipdveia.

Carnival, atd7rd(cpe<o (aTTo, Kpfai).

IjCnt, ^ vrjOTfia, fj aapaKocrTrj,

Good Friday, ^ MeydXr} llafia-

(TKfVT].

Easter, rb Ucia-xa, fj Aapirpd.

\\ hitsuntide, f] nevTrjKoarf],

Midsummer's Day, t6 depivbv

Autumn, TO ^divonapov. .

Winter, 6 Xeipwy.

At ioprai.

fjkioTpoTTiov, or ^ ioprii " ToC

Ayiov ladvvov.

Michaelmas Day, fj io .prfj tSiv

Taîapxo}v.

Christmas Eve, ^ ""c papovi)

Toov "KpKrTovyfvvcov.

Christmas, ra Xpia-n ' ^vyivva.

St. John's Day, 17 iop- ^rrj roi.

'Ay. '\dvvov Toil Bctj -tkttou.

Birthday, tu ytvfffKia.

Annivex'sary, fi fniT(i'^<^ ^s iopTt}.

Vocabulary. 259

Time, 'O

A. year, t6 'tos.

A century, 17 iKaTovrafTrjpU,

6 alcov.

This year, e(/)eVof.

Last year, ntpvai, rb napeXdov

(TOS,

Next year, to fpxofifvov (tos,

TOV xP^ôv.

A month, 6 firjv. .

A fortnight, t6 btKantvOf]-

ptpov.

In a fortnight, pfTO. SeKanfvre

rjfiepas.

A fortnight ago, npo beKanivTe

fjpfpwu.

A week, f) e^So/Llas {i^8op,d8a).

Last week, t^v napeXBova-ap

(^8opd8a.

Next week, t^v npoa-fXTJ e/35o-

/xdda.

Yesterday, ;^(9f?.

The day before yesterday,

npoxBis,

The Weather

Weather, 6 Kaipos.

Cold, ri y^vxpa, to Kpvo, to ^v-

Xos.

Heat, f) C^CTTt], 6 Kaxxrav.

Frost, r) irayoivin, 6 irayiTos,

iDamp, 17 vypaaria.

Rain, rainbow, fj ^poxrj, to

ovpdviov Toôv(J]

"ipis).

Snow, TO x"'*'*} V X""''*

Dust, T] CTKnVT], 6 KOVlOpTOS,

Fog, f} 6p,ixXr]f T) Karaxvid.

Ice, o irdyos.

Xpovos,

To-day, this day week, o-ij/xf-

pov, afjptpov oKTO).

To-morrow, avpiov.

The day after to-morrow,peOavptov.

Morning, 17 npata.

Afternoon, t6 aTropeo-ripepo, t6

anoytvpxt (^p.fTa pfarjp^piup^.

Evening, f/ iairipa,

Day, 17 ij/xepo.

Night, 17 vv^.

Sunrise, f) dvarokri TOV fjKlov.

Sunset, t] 8vais tov ijXi'ov.

Midday, Noon, t6 fi€(n]pepi, f)

fi((rr]p^pia.

Midnight, Ta (xea-dwKTa.

Tlie hour, fj apa.

Half an hour, fjptaeia Stpa.

A quarter of an hour, ev

TerapTov (ttjs wpaj),

A minute, iv XenTov.

A second, Iv SevTepoXenrov,

'O Kaipos.

Storm, 17 TpiKviiiaK

Hail, ^ x°-^^C'^-

Thunder, f] ^pomf}.

Lightning, ^ dirrpaiiri.

Wind, 6 avfpos.

East wind, 6 avaToXiKos ave-

pos.

South wind, 6 votcos avtpos.

West wind, 6 Bvtikos avepos.

North wind, 6 ôptios avepos.

Sun, sunshine, 6 17X105,^ Xdpy^ris

TOV fjXiov.

' An interesting word. Originally ' the third wave,' supposed to bethe biggest (cf. Latin, fluctus decumanus). Used metaphorically, Tpi-icvpia KaKwv, Aesch.

8 2

160 Modern Greek.

Moon, moonlight, r] <Tt\r\vr\, to

fpeyyapi, to (f)5)t ttjs (TfXrjvrjs.

Full moon, rj TravaeXrjvos.

New moon, f] vea crf\rji/r].

Star, TO a(TTpov, 6 dcTTrjp,

Sky (clear), S oiipavhs (Kadapos).

Cloud (cloudy, cloudless), t6

v((f)os ((TVVP€(f}a>8r]s, dve(f)f\os^.

Sea (rough, smooth), 17 daXaaa-a

(jpiKVfiioi>8r]s, yoKrjvuiia).

Phrases to facilitate reading

iTpoi iVKokwcriv T^s avayvaaidis

Advance, to, Trpoxoopco.

Advertisement, tj dyytXla.

Agency (Havas, Reuter), to

UpaKTopelov {Xa^ds, 'PfouTfp).

Ambassador has been ap-

pointed, 6 npea-^vs biapla-dr].

Archbishop has resigned, 6

dpxifTTiaKOTTos iraprjTTjdrj.

Army (of occupation), 6 arpa-

Tos {ttjs KaTO)(fls),

Arrange, to, StevêToj.

Article, leading, to Kvpiov ap-

6pov.

Attach^, 6 uKoKovBos.

Bill was voted, to vofioaxeîov

i\j/r](f)iadi].

Bishop was insulted, 6 tm-

aKOTTos v^piadrf.

Boundary, to avvopov.

Budget, 6 TTpOVTTo'koyKTpOS.

Chamber of Deputies, 17 BovKr).

Circular note, 17 iyKVKkios bia-

Koivatais.

Commission, the commis-sioner, rj iniTponr], 6 eiri-

TpOTTOS.

Concession, fj Trapaxi>prj(ns.

Conference, 17 vvvBidaKfyJMi.

Conservative party, r6 (rvvT-q-

prjTiKov KopLfxa.

Constitution, to a-vvrayfia.

Greek News]pa2)ers, *pao-fif

Twp EXkrjviKav 'E(f)t]pfpi8(0V,

Consul, o irpoêvos.

Correspondent, 6 dirranoKpiTTis.

Debate was adjourned, ij a-vCr)-

TTjaiv dv(^\i]6rj.

Embassy, ^ npfa-^fia.

Empire, rj avroKpaTopla,

Evacuation, ^ eWi/oxrtf.

Excitement, 6 ipedia-pos.

Frontier, to a-ivopov.

Government, fj Kv^fpvrja-is, to

xmovpydov.

House of deputies was dis-

solved, ^ jSovXi) 8t fXvdi].

Interview, rj awevTcvîs.

Judge, 6 diKaaTTjs.

King, constitutional, 6 jSao-i-

\evs, 6 avvTaypLariKos.

Leader of the Opposition, 6

dpxriyoi ttjs dvTindXiTcucrfws.

Liberal party, to ^Ck{k(v6epov

Koppia.

Majority, fj nKeiovo^t]<pia.

Mayor, 6 8r)papxos.

Meeting, t6 avWaXrjTfjpiov.

Minister of Foreign Affairs,

6 'Ynovpyoi t&v EôoTfpiK&v,

Minister of Home Affairs, 6

'Yirovpyos tSdu Êa-<i)TepiKa)v.

Ministerof Public Instruction,

6 Yrrovpyos tjjs Ar]po(Tiai

'EKTTMdeiKTfWS.

Vocabulary. 261

Minister of Religion, 6 'Yirovp-

ybs tSuv ^ EKK\T]cria(TTiK(ov.

Minister of Justice, 6 'YTroup-

•yos Trjs AiKaioavvrjs.

Minister of War, 6 'Yirovpybs

Tuv SrpaTtojTtKWj'.

Minister of Navy, 6 'Ynovpybs

tS)v NaiTtKwi'.

Minority, 17 fido-^p^rjipia.

Monarchy, limited, fj Trepiapia--

fievT] p,ovap)(i.a.

Newspaper, press, fj e^r^pLtpis,

6 Tviros.

Standard, ^ 2r]fxala.

Daily News, ra 'Hfifpfjo-in Ne'a.

Morning Post, 6 Êw6w6s Ta^v-

8p6fios.

Times, ol Kaipol.

Daily Telegraph, 6 'H/ifp^crtos

Tr]X(ypa<pos.

Opposition, ^ duTino\'LT€V(ris.

Orator, 6 pfjTap,

Organisation, 6 opyavia-fios.

Peace, fj upT]vri,

People, 6 Xaof.

Population, 6 ttXjjûo-juoj,

Powers, Great, at bwdiins, al

p.fya\ai,

Piefet, 6 (Ttapxos.

Prime Minister and President

of the Council, 6 UptaBv-

TTOvpyos Koi npofSpos TOV

'YrrovpyiKov 2u/xj3oi;Xi'ou.

Prince, princess, 6 rjytpau, ^

fjyefiovis.

Progress, 17 rrpooSos.

Provisional scheme, t6 irpoa-'

Published daily, is, f/cSi'Sfrai

Kadrjfjifpivcos (Kaff fKd(TT)]vj,

Queen, 17 âaiXia-a-a.

Question, Eastern, to (fjrrjpa,

TO dvaroXiKop.

Radical party, r6 'Piôa-naa-Ti-

Kov Koppa,

Republic, 17 AijpoKpaTia.

Republican press, 6 Ar^poKpa-

TIKOS Tvnos.

Resigned, has, Traprjrfjffr).

Retreat, f] vTroâprja-is.

Revolution, fj eTravda-Taaitt

Riot, fj oxâyayia.

Rumour, f] (}>f]pr].

Secretary, private, 6 Tpappa-

Tfvs, 6 l8iaiT(pos.

Special correspondent, 6 et8i*c6s

dvranoKpiTfjS.

State, TO KpaTof.

Stated, it is, Xfyfrai.

Successor (to throne), 6 8id-

?!oxoi.

Treaty, 17 a-wdfjKTj.

Vice-president, 6 avTinpofSpoi.

Viceroy, 6 avriBaariXfis.

"Want of confidence, ^ eXXaylfis

ipniCTToavvijs.

War, 6 TTokepos.

Archbishop of Canterbury, 6

'ApxifTriaKonos TrjS Kuvra-

^piyias.

Marquis of Salisbury, 6 Map-

Kiwv 2uKiaôvpfjt.

Travelling, Th Ta^tlbiov,

Arrival, ^ aîîf. I Baggage, ^ dno(TK(v^.

Bag, 6 auKKos,\Berth, 17 ^t'o-w (place).

262 Modern Gi-eek.

Blacksmith, 6 aidrjpovpyos.

Box, TO Kl^dnTlOV,

Bridge, f) yf(j)vpa.

Bridle, 6 ;caXn/dr,

Cabin, 6 6d\ap.iaKos.

Change, to, horses, aXXa'fw

iTrnovs.

Clothes, TO fvBviiara.

Cross, to, diepxofJiai.

Custom, T) (TvvT)6eia.

Custom-house, to Tt'kcovflov.

Custom-house-officer, 6 reXavo-

Dangerous, firiKlvbwos.

Deep, â6vs.

Departure, ^ dvax^prja-is.

Doctor, 6 larpos.

Dragoman, 6 biepurjvds.

Duty, 6 (f)6pos.

Foot (on), TTfâs.

Gallop, to, KoXmiôi.

Girth, 17 vyyXa, t] (a>vr] toC

f(f)imriov.

Guide, 6 oBrjyos.

Hatbox, f] niKod^KT], f) Kairne-

Xitpo.

Head of the horse, ro Ke(fid\i

Tov o^dyov.

Hold (Imji.), Kparrjaov.

Hole, f] onfj, r] rpvTva.

Horse, TO aXoyov, 6 OTTroc.

Horseback (on), e(î7r7ros.

Hotel, TO ^(vo8ox('iov.

How deep, nSaov âdvs.

How far, nocrov paxpdv.

How long will it last, noaop

6a tiapKearj,

Key, fj k\€is, to xXetSi.

Land, by land, 17 ^rjpd, dia irjpai.

Lengthen (Imp.), fidxpyve.

Let go, n^ff.

Lock, lock (Imp.), ro K\f'i6pov,

t] KKfidapid, (cXftSoxTf.

Lodging, TO KaToKvpa.

Loosen (Imp.), Xva-e, êacfiLê.

Luggiige, ^ dnoaKevfjj to irpdy-

paTa.

Mare, 17 <})opd8a, fj 'nnos.

Mayor, 6 drjpapxos.

Mud, 17 Xdanr).

Mule, TO povKdpi, fj fiplovos.

Ostler, 6 'nrnoKopoi,

Passage, passable, f] hiobos,

biaôTos.

Path, ro povoiraTi, fj aTpmros.

Pocket-book,To a-rjpeiapaTapiov.

Porter, 6 Bvpmpos.

Priest, d ifpfvi.

Prohibited, diirjynpevpivov.

Road, 6 bpdpos, fj 6b6s.

Rocky, ^paxdibrjs.

Rope, rd (rx"ivlov, to anapTov.

Saddle (Imp.), aapdpoaov {inl-

aaôvf.

Sea (by sea), ddXaacra (Sta da-

Xao-ffj;y).

Shoe (horse), rd tt/toXov.

Shore, rd jrapoKiov.

Shorten, (rvvrtpvco.

Stay (to make a), araBpdoy,

Starpi.Sa),

Steep, KprjpvaiSTjs, dvo)(f)€pf]s.

Stirrup, 17 (T/cdXa, 6 dva/3oXeis,

Strap, rd Xcopiop.

Stream, d pva^.

String, d andyos.

Summit, f] Kopvcpfj.

Tighten (Imp.), rrfjlyê.

Trot, to, TpiTTobi^w.

Walk, d nepiTTaTOs.

Way (shortest), bpopos, 6 ^pa-

XVTOTOS.

Vocabulary^ 263

Food, 'H

Almonds, to. afivyhaka.

Apple, unripe, iir\Kov, ao3pov.

Apricots, ripe, ra êpvKOKKa,

iopifia.

Artichokes, gi'een, at dyyivapet,

)(\a>pai.

Asparagus, ra a-Trapdyyia, 01

dcTTidpayoi,

Bacon, fried, t6 x^^poH-^Ph "?"

yaviapievo.

Bake, to, "^tjvo.

Beans, French, to kovkio, to

(})a(Tov\ia xâpd.

Beans, Haricot, ra (f)a<rovXta,

Beef, TO 0(o8iv6v.

Beef, boiled,TO âSivop ^paarov.

Beef, roast, t6 âbivov ylîjrov.

Beer, bottled, fj finipa, 6 (iOoi

(Is (f)id\as.

Biscuit, TO TraîfJidBi, to biirvpov.

Boil, to, ^pdCo.

Bottle, fj cf)idXr], TO ôvKoXiop,

Brandy, to olvonvevfia (^fiTrpdvTi).

Bread, toast, t6 ^//•co/Lit, Ka\//aXt-

acTTo.

Butter, TO ôvTvpov.

Cabbage, t6 Xdxavov,

Cake, New Year's Cake, 17

nrjTa, âaiXoirrjTa.

Caper, 17 #c(i7r77aptr.

Cauliflower, to Kowovnidi, f}

dvBoKpdfx^T].

Celery, t6 atXtvov.

Cream Cheese, 17 nv(i6pa.

Cheese, to rvpi, 6 Tvpos.

Cherry, to Kfpda-i.

Chestnuts, roasted, to KdoTava,

\l/r]fjLfva,

Chicken, t6 novKi, kotottovXo,

Tpocf)^.

Chocolate, ^ TaoKoXdra,

Claret, red Wine, to k6kkivo

Kpacrl.

Coffee, Turkish, 6 Ka(pfs, Tovp-

KIKOS.

Cover, TO aKfrraapxi.

Cream, to KdipaKi,

Crumb, ij î-x^} "^^ îxovKov.

Crust, 17 Kpovara, 6 (pAoiof.

Cucumber, to dyyoipi.

Cup, TO (piXT^dvi, TO KVTTfWov.

Currant, 17 Kopivdiaicrj <jTa(pls.

Cutlet, 17 KOToXfTTa.

Date, 6 Kovpfids, (f)oivi.^.

Dessert, to emdopniov.

Dine, to, yevixaTiCo).

Dinner, to ytvfia.

Dish, 17 TTiarfXa, napoîs.

Duck, 17 Trdnia.

Egg, TO aov, avyou.

Egg, boiled, t6 adv, alyov,

^paCTTOV.

Egg, poached, to mSv, avyov,

jidTi.

Fat, TO XiTTOSf Tvdxos, Xmapos,

naxvi.

Fish, TO ^dpi, 6 Ixdvs.

Fork, TO TTflpOVVt.

Fowl, 17 opvlS, TO TTOvXl.

Fruit, TCI onoipiKd, Ta cPpovTa,

Game, to Kvvrjyiov.

Glass, TO TTOTTJplOV.

Goose, T] xh^^-

Grapes, to aTa^lXia,

Gravy, 6 C^^pos, fj (raXTO-a,

Ham, TO xoipopepi.

Hare, 6 Xayois.

Honey, to peXi.

Ice, TO nayaTov.

254 Modern Greek.

Ice-lemon, rh Traywroiz-Xe/xow.

Jam, TO ykvKo,

Jug, r] Xayj^wy.

Knife, rh fiaxalpiov.

Lamb, t6 dpvlov.

Lean to yjâxvov.

Leg of mutton, to fnrovTt, to

fjLTjpov irpo^drov.

Lemon, t6 Xepoviov.

Lemonade, fj Xf/xomSa.

Lettuce, t6 papovXi.

Lobster, 6 da-raKos,

Meat, TO Kpias.

Meat, fat, lean, to Kpeas, traxv,

yl/a)(v6v.

Medlar, t6 fiicTrCKov,

Melon, TO TffTTOVl,

Milk, TO yaXa,

Mulberry, to p.ovpov.

Mustard, 17 /xouo-Ta/jSa.

Mutton, to irpo^dov Kpeas.

Napkin, 17 TrcTceTu, to x^'P°"piiKTpov.

Oil, TO fXaiov, XaSt.

Omelette, 17 op.f'hiTa, t6 <r(j)oy-

ydrov.

Onion, rb KpopvSi {leponvov),

KpofivhaKi.

Orange, to iropTOKoKiov.

Oyster, to a-rpdbiov.

Partridge, ^ irepSiKa.

Peach, TO pobaKivov.

Pepper, to TrtTrept.

Pie, TO ^vfiapiKov, t] TrfjTo.

Pig, TO yovpovvi.

Plate, TO TTtaro.

Pork, TO )(oipivbv Kpias.

Potato, T) iraTaTa, to y(u>iX7J\ov,

Pudding, T) novbiyya.

Kadish, t6 pandvi.

Rice, TO pvî.

Roll, fj (ppavTôXa,

Salad, 17 craXaTa.

Salmon, 6 a-oXofios.

Salt, salt-cellar, to SKat, 6 SKa-

Toboxôs.

Sandwich, to a-dvboviTs.

Sauce, t; crdXro-a.

Saucer, to VTroKweXXoi' (Trta-

TUKl.

Smpe, TO ftireKaTcrivi,

Sole, fj y\co<T<Ta,

Spice, Ta pvpoibiKa, dpafiara.

Spinach, t6 (rnavaKi.

Spirits, Ta olvonvevfiaTo.

Spoon, TO KOxXidpiov, xovXidpi,

Sugar, fi Cdxap^s.

Sweetmeats, to. âxapa>Td.

Table, fj Tpdireâ.

Table-cloth, to TpaneôiidvbvXov.

Tart, TO yXvKicrpa,

Tea, TO Tfiov (^Tcrdi).

Tender, Tpv(f>€p6s.

Toast, TO l/^w/il yf/r)p€VOV,

Tongue,»J

yXdio-o-a.

Tough, (TKXripoi.

Tumbler, tu noTfjpiov.

Turkey, 6 Ivbidvos, ydXXos.

Veal, TO îSe'Xo.

Vegetable, t6 XaxaviKov.

Vinegar, to ^flSi.

Walnut, TO Kapvbi.

Water, t6 v€p6v.

Wine, red, white, resinated,

TO Kpacri (olvos), kokkivo, aa-

irpo, piTaivdro.

Wine-glass, t6 iroTtipiov toC

Kpacriov.

Woodcock, 17 ^vXoKOTTa,

Vocabulary. 265

Trades and Professions, Texvat koI 'EnayyeXnara.

Archaeologist, dpxato\6yos\

Architect, apxireKTav,

Attorney, dvTiKKrjTos, SiKTjyopos.

Auctioneer, SrjfioTrpdTrjs.

Author, avyypa<pevs.

Banker, Tpanfîrrjs,

Barber, Kovpevs.

Barrister, 8iKrjy6pos.

Blacksmith, aiBripovpyos.

Bookseller, î^XiottoKtjs.

Bootblack, XoOaTpoy, inoSripa-

T0Ka6npUTTr]S,

Bootmaker, vnoSTjpaTonotos,

Butcher, KpeomciiXrjs.

Cabman, dfia^tjX'iTrjs.

Carpenter, fiapnyKos, ^vXovpyos,

Chemist, xvi^'^'ôs.

Confectioner, âxapoTrXdarrji,

Clergyman, kXtjpikos.

Clerk, ypa(f)evs, VTrdXXrfKos.

Cutler, paxaipoTToios,

Dentist, oSovroiaTpos,

Editor, eKdorrjs.

Engineer, p-rixaviKos.

Fruiterer, onwpoTrcoXrjs.

Gardener, Kx^novpos.

G^rocer, pnaKoKris, navTonitXrjs.

Hairdresser, Kovpds.

Historian, laropiKos,

Interpreter, diepfirjvfvs.

Journalist, i(^r)pi€ptboypd<ôs.

Judge, biKa<TTris.

Lawyer, Siicrjydpos.

Librarian, î^XiodrjKdpios, /Si^-

Xio(pvXa^.

Merchant, ipnopos.

Money-clianger, dpyvpafioiôs.

Officer, dîanaTiKos.

Paper-seller, stationer, x^P'ô-

nwXrfs.

Pedlar, 68fp.7ropos, irpayparev-

TJJf.

Photographer, (j>a)Toypd({)os.

Poet, TrOlTjTTlS.

Policeman, KX-qTrip.

Politician, ttoXitikos.

Priest, Upevs.

Professor, Ka6r]yT]TTjS.

Schoolmaster, 8i8daK(i\os.

Shoemaker, TraTrourf^s, vttoSt]-

HaroTTOios.

Student, (})oiTrjTr]s, anovbaaTrjs,

Tailor, pdnri^s.

Tobacconist, KanvondiXT]s.

Tradesman, pLeTairpdrris, rex^l-

Tr]S.

Undertaker, (jiepfrpoiroios.

Upholsterer, TaTniTonaXrjs, eVi-

ttXottcdXtjs.

Waiter, vnrjpeTrjs.

Washerwoman, irXvarpa.

Watchmaker, copoXoyonoio^.

Wine-merchant, olvip-Tiopos.

Writer, ypa(fifvs, avyypacpeis.

* All Greek words in this Vocabulary are masculine except -nXvaTpa.

266 Modern Greek.

Public Buildings; jârts of a town, /iiT]fi6(rta mlpia' Ta (xepr)

Trjs iToXfais.

Academy, ^ uKabrjiila.

Arsenal, 6 vavcrTudfios' ^ ott-

XodrjKT].

Asylum (for idiots), to aarvXov

fKOpS)!',

Asylum (for orphans), to 6p-

(pavoTpo(f)flov.

Bank, National, Ionian, 'H

Tpdneâ, f] 'EdfiKfj, fj 'Iopiktj.

Barracks, oi (TTpuTwvis.

Cabstand, 6 aTaOyios rSiv &paâ>v.

Coffee-house, caf6, to Kacfxiov,

TO Kacpeve'iov.

Capital (of a country), f) irpa-

Tfvov(ra.

Carriage, open, shut, fj cifiaâ,

avoiKTT], Khfiartj,

Cathedral, 17 p.r}Tp6Tro\is.

Cemetry, to veKpoTacftuov,

Chapel, TO Trap€KK\f](Tiov,

Chemist s shop, to cfyappaKflov.

Church, fi eKKkrjaia,

Clock, TO fopo\6yiov.

Club, 17 yêaxV-

Columns of Olympian Zeus,

nl arvXoi tov OXvpniov Aios.

Court of Justice, t6 AiKaa-Trj-

piov.

Custom-house, t6 TeXavnov,

Custom-house officer, o TeAw-

vo(pvXa§.

Factory, Steam, t6 'EpyoaTa-

aiov, 81 aTpov,

Fountain, f/ ^pvcris.

Gutter, 6 oxfTos.

Hospital, TO voaoKopfiov.

Hotel, dear, cheap, t6 ^fvoSo-

X^'ô"} aKpiôv, tv6vv6v.

Lane, f) aTpanoi.

Library, to read, v îlSXioBfjKtj^

avayivaxTKa.

Manufactory (of gunpowder),TO 'Epyoa-Tciaiov {to nvpirtdo-

irf2oi>\

Market-place, f] dyopd.

Metropolis, fj MrjrpowoXis.

Mint (to coin), t6 vopiaparoKo-

TTflov {vofiifTfiaTOKOTrca),

Monastery, to povaarfipiov.

Monument, t6 fivrjixe'iov.

Museum, closed, open, t6

pOVVeioV, KXfKTTOV, dpoiKTov,

Palace, to. dvuKTopa, TO naXdri-

ov.

Parish, fj iuopla, fj KoivoTrjs.

Pavement \ ^ ^'^/^Z^'"^'"''

[ TO TTfQobpOpiOV,

Picture gallery, 17 ntvaKodfjKrj.

Post office (a stamp), to tu^v-

Spopdov (ypappaToarjpov).

Prison (to be condemned), fj

(f>vXaKfj {KaTaSiKdôpau.

Promenade (to walk), 6 nepl-

noTos (jrepnraTco).

Public-house (to drink), to

KanrjXflov (ttiVq)),

Quay (to sail), ij npoKvpala

(TrXeco).

Quarter of the town, fj awoiKia

TYjs TrdXfoJs.

Reading-room, t6 dvayvaxTTj]-

piov.

Shop (to sell), TO paya^fiov, t6

ipyacTTrjpiov (jvaiXSi^.

Shore, TO TvapdXiov, fj dKTfj,

Square, fj TrXareta.

Vocabulary. 267

Statue, TO aydkiia.

Street, winding, ij 686s, iXiKo-

fibrjs.

Suburb, distant, t6 npodartiov,

aTTOjxtiiaKpvcrp.(vov.

Tlie TeiTEce, ^ raparaa, rh

dafia.

Tower, Venetian, 6 irvpyos,

'¥.v(tik6s.

Town, sea-, commercial-, 7

TToXtf, napa6dKa.<T<nos-, tp-

ITOplKTj-.

Town-hall, to br]pap)^(1ov.

University, student, to Uave-

marrjpiov, 6 (fjoiTrjrrjs.

Walls of the town, to relxr]

T^y TrdXfwf.

Zetter-ionting, 'H Êniaro\oypa(pia,

Address, 17 tuiSwais, 17 eVi-

ypacplj.

A. B., Esq., Athens, London,T&i Kvpla A. B., tts ÂdrjvaSy

Aovdlvou.

Blotting paper, to arovnoxap-

TOV,

Care of (to the), rg (f)povTi8i.

Direction, f} 8ifv6vva-is.

Envelope, 6 (j)uKe\\oi.

Expression, fj fK(f)paais.

Gum, T] youpa, TO Koppt,

Ink, ff peXdvT].

Inkstand, to /ifXavoSoxflov.

Letter, t6 ypdppa, ij (ttkttoX^.

Letter-box, t6 ypapparoKiôi-

TtOV.

Letter-paper, 6 Ta^vSpopiKos

XdpTfjs.

Do I post the letter in time 1

pmrco (yKaipais ttjv (iricrToXrju]

Newspaper-wrapper, t6 irepi-

KoXvfjpa Tijy ((f)r}pfpi8os.

Paper, to x"P'"«''— blue, white, ruled, pa^v,

aanpov, xapniôpevov,

Pen-nibs, to Kop8vXia, ai irtwai.

Peu-holder, 6 Kov8v\o;p6pos.

Pen-wiper, 6 KoKapopAicrrjs.

Pencil, TO poXv^doKovdvXov.

Pencil-leads, tu poXvâKia.

Penknife, to kovSvXopdxaipov.

Postman, 6 Taxv8p6pos.

Post-office, TO Taxv8popt2nv.

Post, arrives, leaves, to tuxv-

bpopelov, (jiddvfi, dvaxdopf'i-

Postage, TO. TaxvbpopiKO, TeXrj.

Return of Post (by), dTrdvTrjaiv

dvapivui 81a. Tov (noptvov.

Registered letter, crvaTrjpfvrj

(TTtCTToXr).

Ruler, 6 xapa|.

Sand, T) appoi.

Seal, 17 (Ttppayls.

Sealing-wax, t6 fiovXoKepi, 6

'WnauiKos KTjpos.

Sheet of paper, t6 (j)vXXou

XnpTov.

Signature, ^ wroypa^^.

Stamps, Ta ypappaToarpia.

Is that enough 1 tlvai

dpKerdJ

How many stamps does this

letter require ] noa-a ypap-

paT6aT]pa xpfidC^TOi ff (itktto-

Xrj avTT)^

268 Modern Greek.

Two stamps of thirty lepta,

Svo ypanfiaTocrrjfia Tav rpi-

avra XfiTTciv.

Telegram, t6 rrjkfypdcfirifia.

To be left till called for, va

Wait for an answer, nepiftept

dTrdvTTjcriv,

Wafer, f] ocrna.

Writing materials, ^ ypaîKri

vXrj.

The writing, to ypcuîjiov.

Parts of a House, names of pieces of furniture etc., etc., Ta

p.ept] TJ]S olKias, ovopLaaiai. twv iir'niKav, k.t.\.

Candle, to light, to lajpl, dvdir-Apartment, to 8a>fidTiov,

Arm-chair, ij TroXvdpofa, to

6pnvlov,

Arrange (Imp.), raKronoiricTov.

Back room, to onia-dev dcopd-

TiOV,

Balcony, 6 eâaTris.

Barrel, to âpeXi, 6 Kdôs.

Basement, t6 Karcayaiov.

Bason, to wash, f] \eKdvT],

Tr\vvop.ai, Xovofiai,

Beam, f] boKos.

Bed, to lie down, to Kpe^âTi,

fj KXivrj, KaraKKivofiai.

Bedding, to sleep, to. a-TpaalSia,

KOlfJLwpMl.

Bedroom, fj Kp(î3aroKdfiapa, 6

Koirav,

Bell, to ring, 6 kwSwi', kcoSw-

Blanket, ^ naTavia, to icpdnXui-

Blind, TO nwTôvpi.

Bolt, lock, (Imp.), 6 (rvpTT]s,

xXftcroi'.

Box, TO Kl^d>Tl0V,

Brick, TO Tov^Xov, f) nXlvdos.

Broom, to sweep, 17 vKoima,

TO crdpadpov, aapopco.

Brush, fj jSoC^To-n, 17 -i^riKTpa.

Carpet, to xaXt, 6 Tdnris.

Castle, 17 firavXis, to (ppovpiov.

Ceiling, to Ta^dvi, t) opocprj.

Cellar, 17 djrodfjKt],

Chair, to sit down, ^ /cap/fcXa,

TO KdSicrpa, KaQ-qpai,

Chest of drawers, t6 K0fi6.

Chimney, 6 Kairvoboxôi.

Clock, TO (opoXoyiov, TO (KKptptS,

Counterpane, 17 Kovîpra, to

fCpdnXana,

Cupboard, to open, r6 vTovXdm,

f) aKfvodfjKT}, dvoiyo).

Curtain, to draw, to irapanf-

Tacrpa, dvtydpdv.

Cushion, TO irpoaKfCpaXaiov.

Desk, TO ypd<p(iov.

Dining-room, f) Tpnirf^npia.

Door, Come in (Imp.), ^ 6vpa,

eiaeXdf, ipnpos.

Drawer, to avprdpiov.

Drawing-room, rj aWowa,Footstool, TO (TKap.vi, TO vnoTTo-

810V.

Flame, fj ^X6§.

Floor, TO Trarco/xa, t6 eSo0or.

Front room, t6 eixirpoadtv dw-

fldTlOV.

Vocahilary. 26g

Fuel, TO evavcTfio.

Furnished, iniirKanitvos.

Furniture, to. eniirXa.

Garden, 6 Krjnos.

Gate, fj ttiXt].

Ground floor, to Korayaiov.

First floor, r6 7rpS>T0v "narafia.

Hire, to, eVotKidfo).

House, T] oiKia,

Jug, fj 'Sdyrjvos,

Key, to unlock, to ickdbiov,

avniyo) (^sKXeiSwo)).

Kitchen, to cook, to jxayftpelop,

fxaytipcvat.

Kitchen utensils, to. fiaynpiKa

CTKfVTJ.

Knocker, to poVrpoc,

Ladder, staircase, tj o-/caXa, 17

Lamp, to trim, 17 Xdfxna, 6 \vx-

vos, tTOLfxa^d) TOP Xvxvov.

Lock, 17 KkfiSoovid, TO KkelQpov.

Looking-glass, 6 KadpfTTTTjs.

Marble, t6 pdppapov.

Mat, 17 ylrdOa, 17 ^Lados.

Matches, to light, ra airlpra,

dvanTco,

Mattress, to crTpapa,

Nail, TO Kopcî, 6 ^Xoy.

Padlock, TO \0VK€TT0V.

Pane of glass, t6 ve\oTT\ata-iov.

Pavement, to iT(Co8p6piou.

Peg, to hang up, t6 Kpfpaa-Topi,

KpefiS).

Pianoforte, to KktiboKvpâXov,

TO nidvo.

Picture, to paint, ^ cIkwv, (oj-

ypa(pi^co.

Pillar, Tj (tttjXt].

Pillow, tA paîXdpt.

Plank, plaster, 17 aavU, 6 yv^ôs.

Portrait, 17 dKitv,

Eoof, t] UTiyt].

Room, TO dccpdriov.

Saucepan, 17 KaraapoXa.

Sheets, clean, dry, to a-iv86via,

Kadnpdj (TTfyvd.

Shelf, TO pd<pi, Tj aaPis,

Shutters, open, shut (Imp.),

TO irapaOvpo^vKXa, avoi^t,

KXei(T€.

Smoke, 6 koitvos.

Soap, TO cranovvi, 6 crdrrfov.

Sofa, 6 aoipds, TO dvdKXivrpov,

Stable, o araiXos.

Staircase, to go up, fj o-jcaXa,

dvaâiva.

Steps, to go down, al fiadpides,

Karaâiva).

Stone, 6 Xidos,

Stove, f) deppdarpa.

Sweep (Imp)., (TKOvmcre, (rdpa-

<rop.

Table, to write, ^ rpdnfCa,

ypd<f)a>.

Tablecloth, t6 TpantCopdp'

Xop.

Towel, ^ TTfTO-fTa.

Tmnk, to crevrovKi, to Kiâriop.

Tumbler, to drink, to norrjpiop,

TTIPCO.

Wall, 6 Tot;^;or, rb Tt'ixof,

Washhand stand, 6 pinTrip.

Well, TO irrjyddi, to (f)peap.

Window, TO napdBvpop.

Wood, yard, court, to ^vXop,

Tj avXrjt

270 Modern Greek.

Articles of Dress, Ta

Boots, thick, thin, ra vnobfj-

fiara, xov^pd, XfTrrd.

Boot-jack, 6 v7ro8Tjfj.aToavpTr]t.

Braces, a pair of, ai ripavrais,

Brush, clothes, hair, ^ ôvpra-a,

fj ^r]KTpa Tap ivbvpArav, rmv

paK\iS)v.

Brush my clothes, ôvpraurf

ra povxa. p.ov.

Button, button (Imp.), t6

Kopîov, Kop^cocre.

Cap, put on, take off (Imp.),

TO KoXvppa, /3d\e to aKov(f>o,

^€aKov(f)a>(Tov.

Coat, fashionable, t6 evSvpa,

TOV (TVppOV,

Coat, gieat, 6 enfvbvrqi.

Collar, 6 KoKapos, t6 nepnpa-

Xr]Kiov.

Comb, TO ktIvi.

Cuff, TO paviKfTTt, ^ Ufpixfipis.

Drawers, t6 ta-ci^paKoy.

Fit, to, raiptdCa,

Gloves, TO. yavTia, Ta xfi-pdicTia.

Handkerchief, silk, t6 âi/Sij-

Xtofj TO piv6p,aKTpov, p,(Taâ>-

TOP,

Hat, TO KaneXov, 6 TrTXor,

Necktie, 6 XaipobeTrji.

Pistol, TO TTlCTTuXlOP.

Pocket, Tj Tcrenr), to dvkaKiop,

Purse, TO ûXdpTiop.

pfprj T^y ipdvpaviat,

Eazor, TO ^vpdifnov.

Ring, TO SaKTvXidiov,

Seal, f/ (Tcfipayis.

Shirt, TO VTTOKdpKTOP, 6 ;^lT(il».

Shirt-collar, 6 KoXdpos.

Shoe, TO (TavddXiov.

Slippers, al naPT6<p\au

Socks, at KokTaai,

Sponge, 6 (TTrdyyof.

Spur, TO crrripovvi, 6 irrtpvuTrrip.

Stick, TO pa^5lop.

Stockings, at icaXTaai, a'l ntpf

KvrjpiSes.

Tooth-brush, 17 ôvpTaa tup

odoVTCOV.

Tooth-powder, ^ oSoptokSvis.

Trousers, to ituvtoXopi, al

TTepiaiceXlSes.

Umbrella, ^ opirptXa.

Waistcoat, to yeXe/ct, 6 vTTtp-

8vTTJS.

Walking-stick, rb pnaaTovn,

fj âKT7)pia, TO pa^hiov.

Watch is slow, to mpoXoyiop

jrrjyaivfi onlcra).

Watch is fast, rh apoXoyiop

iTTjyaivei ypfjyopa.

Watch-chain, 17 aXva-is tov wpo-

Xoyiov.

Watch-key, to wind up, rb

/cXtibiov TOV apoXoylov, Kovp-

Barrel of a gun, ^ Kdvprj.

Boar, 6 Karrpos, 6 dypioxoipos

Covey, TO Konddi.

Shooting, To Kvfijyiov.

Double-barrelled gun, hUawovoivXov.

Fire (Imp.), irvpX

Vocabulary. 271

Foxhunting, rh levvriyiov aXco-

ITfKOS,

Game, t6 Kvvfiyiov, ff aypa.

Gun, TO TOV(p(Kl, TO OTrXoV.

Hare, 6 Xa-ywy.

I have hit, (KTimqaa.

Load (Imp.), ytnia-f.

Partridge, f) nipbi^.

Point, to, of a dog, 6 ctkvKos

ipeplidpfi.

Powder, ro finapovri, 6 TrvpiTn.

Powder-flask, f) rrvpiToboxos.

Quail, f] oprv^.

Rabbit, to Kovvf\i, 6 kovikXos.

Hamrod, 6 oj3eXos.

Rifle, Tj KapapTTiva, to pa^hatTov

TOVCfifKl.

Scent, fj oapiT].

Season, the right, ^ f'lroxn, V

KaTaWrjXos eno^r].

Setter dog, Kvvr]y(TiKus kvcov.

Shoot, to, TTvpoôka,

Shot, large, small, f) ô\t].

Snipe, TO li1TfKaT(riVl, T] CTKoXo-

naKis,

Spaniel, kikov IxvrjXdTrjs.

Trigger, fj (T(f>vpa.

Wolf, 6 \VK0S.

Woodcock, fj ^vKoKorra.

Animals, Birds, etc.,

Animal, to (a>ov.

Bear, 17 apKTos.

Bee, f] peXia-aa.

Bird, TO TTTrjVOV.

Boar, TO yovpoijvi, 6 \o7pos.

Butterfly, f] TrfToXovSof ^ ^vx^'Camel, f] KaprjXos.

Cat, fj yara, fj yaXfj.

Chicken, to opvidoTvnvKi.

Cock, 6 KOKopas, 6 ir€Tfiv6s, 6

oKeKTap.

Cow, beef, fj dyeXds, TO â)8iv6v.

Cuckoo, 6 KOl'KKOS, 6 KOKKV^.

Dog, 6 <TKv\0S, 6 KIXOV,

Dolphin, 6 SeXcîV.

Donkey, to yaibovpi, 6 ovos.

Duck, wild duck, fj ndma, fj

V7i(Ta-a, fj dypiondnia.

Eagle, 6 deTos,

iigg, TO avyov, to o)6v.

Elephant, 6 iXecfjas.

Fish, TO ^dpi, 6 lx6vs.

Flea, 6 yjrvXXos.

Ta ZS>a, to TlTtjvd, kt\.

Fly, n M^'«'

Fox, f] dXtnov, 6 dKoiTrr]^.

Gnat, to Kovvoimi, 6 Koovcoyj/,

Goat, she-goat, ^ yiSa, fj kut-

aiKa, Tj ai^.

Hen, ^ »c()rTa, fj opvis.

Honey, to peXi.

Horse, t6 aXoyov, 6 tmros.

Insect, TO ^(oitpiov, TO evTopov.

Lamb, to dpvlov.

Lark, to sing, o Kopvhakos,

Lion, 6 Xecov.

Lobster, 6 daTOKos.

Magpie, fj KapaKaâ,

Monkey, fj paifiov, 6 ividrj^.

Mosquito, TO KOVVOIITTI, 6 KOiVOif^.

Mouse, 6 ITOVTIKOS, 6 jlVS.

Mule, TO povXdpi, fj fjp,lOVOS,

Nest, fj (jxokfd.

Nightingale, fj drjbmv.

Ox, o jSoCs.

Oyster, t6 daTptldiov,

273 Modern Greek,

Partridge, ^ irepbiKa, ^ Trtpbi^.

Peacock, to naycjvt, 6 raois.

Pheasant, 6 (j>aa-iav6s.

Pig, TO yovpovvt, 6 ôipos.

Pigeon, fj Trfpiarepci.

Quadruped, t6 Tfrpdirovv.

Quail, TO opTVKi., f] oprv^.

Rat, 6 ptyaXos novTiKos, 6 p,vs.

Raven, 6 Kopa^.

Sheep, mutton, to npoârov,

TO 7r/)o/3toj».

Spider, f) apaxvr}.

Stork, TO XeXe(ct, 6 nf\apy6s.

Swallow, 17 ;(eXi8coj/.

Swan, 6 KVKvot,

Tiger, fj Tiypis.

Toad, 6 (ppvuos, 6 (iaTpaxos.

Turkey, 6 IvBidvos, 6 ydXXos,

Vermin, to fmopav.

Wasp, T] (T(f}^Ka, T] a-(})rj^.

Worm, TO aKcoXTJKi,, 6 aKoiKr}^,

Wolf, 6 XvKoy.

Trees, Mowers, Fruits, Ta

Almond, t6 dpvyBdkov,

Apple, TO priXov.

Apricot, TO ^(pVKOKKOV.

Ash-tree, 17 peXla.

Bark, 6 cf)Xoi6s.

Branch, 6 kXoSos.

Bush, 6 Bdpvoi.

Cedar, 6 nibpos.

Chestnut-tree, 17 Kaa-Tavea.

Currant, ij KopivdiaKrj ora^tV.

Cotton-tree, 17 âpâKis.

Cypress, tj Kirndpiavos,

Fern, 17 nrepis.

Fig-tree, 17 <tvk^.

Fig, TO (TVKOV.

Fir, f) iXaTrj,

Flax, TO Xivdpcov.

Flowers, to avdrj.

Forget - me - not, to "pff pe

Xr](Tp6v(i, Tj pvcraatTis.

Fruit, oi KapTToi, al onapai.

Garden, 6 Krjnos.

Grape, fj a-Ta(f>vXTi.

Bunch of grapes, t6 Tcrapiri,

6 ôrpvs.

Hothouse, TO BeppoKTjniov {(jiv-

TOKopelovj.

Afv8pa, Ta "Avdrj, al 'On-wpot.

Hyacinth, 6 laKivdos.

Larch, 17 irfvKr].

Laurel, 17 ddcf)vr}.

Leaf, TO (pvXXov,

Lilly, TO Kplvov.

Lime-tree, ^ (piXvpa,

Medlar, to pfcrniXov.

Melon, TO TTfTTopi, 6 nencov.

Mulberry, to povpov.

Mushrooms, to. pavirdpia, ol

pVKTjVfi,

Oak, 17 8pvs.

Orange, t6 nopTOKdXiov,

Peach, TO poSdKivov.

Pear, r6 u;(Xa8t, t6 dniSi,

Pear-tree, 17 dn-tSfa, 77 dxXaSia.

Pine, 17 TTtvKrj, ^ iriTvs.

Pomegranate, to pdiSi, tj puid.

Poplar, fj XfvKtj.

Poppy, fj Trarrapovucu

Root, fj p'i(a.

Rose, TO p68ov.

Seeds, oi (Tiropoi.

Shrubs, Ta x^pdiiXaba,

Sow, to, o-TTeipQ).

Stem, TO KOTO-dvi., TO aTtXtxos,

Tulip, TO Xdpiov.

Vocabulary. 273

Vine, ^ afi7r(\os.

Violet, 6 ixfve^fs, TO lov.

Walnut-tree, 17 KapvBid, fj Kapva.

Wlieat, TO (TiTapiy 6 aiTos.

Willow- tree, 17 Irta,

Yew, 6 (T/xtXa^.

Facultiea, Qualities, and Senses of man, Th UpoTtpfifucra^

ai ÎbiOTTfTiS KoL ai Aladrjcrfis tov dvdpamov.

Admiration, 6 davpaa-pos.

Ambition, ambitious, fj (piKo-

Soîa, (f)ih68oôs.

Astonishment, fj fKiT\r]îs.

Badness, wicked, fj KUKia, kokos.

Character, upright, 6 xopaKTTjp,

Conscience, ^ awddrjais.

Despair, rj djrfXTricrta, 6 dntX-

niapos.

Diligence, diligent, ff impi-

Xfta, (TripeXrjs.

Eagerness, eager, ^ rrpodvpla,

npodvpos.

Falsehood, a liar, t6 -êvbos, 6

'i\ff\J(TTJ)S.

Fear, timid, 6 (f>6ôs, avavbpos.

Folly, a fool, fj papiay 6 ptopos.

Frugality, ij Xitottis.

Hearing, a sound, ^ oko^, 6

Idea, f) tSe'a.

Imagination, imaginative, fj

(f)avTa(Tia, (f)avraaia>8rjv.

Impatience, impatient, fj dv-

VTTopovTjaia, dinmopovos.

Incivility, uncivil, ^ dytveia,

dyfvfjs.

Intellect, 6 vovs, 17 Sidvoia,

Jealousy, jealous, 17 Ciôrvnlof

^rjXoTvnos.

Joy, happy, fj x^pa, fvTvx^s.

Knowledge, fj yvSxris.

Life, to live, fj Cojfj, (S>.

Memory, to remember, ^

Hufjprj, fvdvpovpai.

Passion, passionate, t6 itdBos,

nfpnradfjs.

Pleasure, f] (vxaptarrja-is.

Politeness, lit. good-breeding,

polite, 17 (vytvfia, eiiyfvfjs.

Reason, r6 XoyiKov.

Remembrance, 17 dvdpvrjoris.

Shame, to ataxos.

Sight, eye, 17 opaais, 6 6(f)da\-

p6s.

Smell, nose, fj oacftpTjais, fj pis.

Soul, fj yj/vxi']'

Talent, brain, t6 Trporeprjpa,

6 vovs, TO. pvakd.

Taste, fj yfvais.

Touch, finger, ^ d(j)fj, 6 doKTv-

\os.

Will, 17 OeKrjais.

Wisdom, fj (ppovrjais.

Wit, TO TTVfiipa, f] ficpvui.

Fine Arts, At apaiai Tf'xixu.

Sculpture, 'H TXvnTtK^.

Statue, ri aydkpa.

Bust, 17 npoTopfj.

Monument, t6 pvrjpt'iov.

Model, TO nponXaapa,

274 Modern Greek.

Cast, rh ax^fio.

Form, 6 rx/iros.

Marble, ri fidpfiapow.

Plaster, ^ yi-ôs.

Painting,

Water-color, ^ vbpoypa(f)ia.

Oil-painting, f] tXaioypacjiia.

Landscape, t6 Tonflov,

Portrait, fj elK(i>v.

Fresco, T) Toi)(oypacf)iiu

Mosaic, t6 pacraiKov,

Colouring, 6 xptopaTia-pos.

Shading, rj a-Kiaais.

Canvas, to Kawa^mravov,

Brush, ri ypa<f>is.

'H ZaypaîKT).

Fasel, 6 oKplât.

Engraving, 17 iyy\v^fi.

Engraving upon wood, r,

^vKoypa(îa,

Engraving upon steel, 17 xoXw-

ôypa(f>ia.

Engraving upon copper, t)

Xci^noypaipia.

Lithograph, 7 Kidoypacpia.

Colours, Ta

Black, rather black, pavpos,

peXas, pfXavcoTTOs.

Blue, light-, dark-, pafivs,

Kvavovs, dvoiKTOs-, âOvs-.

Sky-blue, ovpav6\povs.

Brown, Kaaravos.

Crimson, ^va-crivos.

Dark, dpavpos, oKovpos.

Gray, c})ai6s.

Green, greenish, Trpdaivot,

npaaivMTTOs.

Lilac, TO xpoipa TTjs Traaâiâias.

Peach, pobauvoxpovs.

Xpapara.

Purple, Trop(f)vpo>9r}s,

Red, fpv6p6s.

Rose, po86)(povs.

Scarlet, (l>\oy6xpovs, a\iKos.

Shaded, a-Kiep6s.

Striped, t6 dpadarov.

Swarthy, ^fXai^dj.

Violet, (wSt;?.

White, XevKos,

Yellow, Kirpivos.

Rather white, viroXevKog.

Rather black, viroptKas.

Architecture, 'H 'ApxiTfKToviKfj.

Doric style, 6 AmpiKos pvO-

pos.

Ionic style, 6 'ItowKoy pvdpos.

Corinthian style, 6 KopivOiaKos

pvdpos,

Tuscan style, 6 Toa-KaviKos

ftvdpos.

Byzantine style, 6 IBvâm-ivo',

pvdpos.

Composite style, o avvOiTos

pvdpos.

Structure, 17 oiKobopiK^.

Front, ^ irpoaoiîs.

Sides, al nXfvpai,

Vocabulary. -/O

Columns, 01 o-Ti'Xot.

Fluted pillars, pajSScorot Kiova.

Capital, TO KlOVOKpaVOV.

Metope, f] fifTOTTT].

Base, fj ^dcris, TO ^ddpou.

Colonnade, rj KiovoaToi^^la, f]

(TTod.

Caryatides, at Kapvanda.

Arch, fj d'îs.

Gate (of city), 17 ttvX?;.

Temple, 6 vaos.

Altar, TO BvaiaaTTjpiov, 6 âfiui.

Statue, 6 dvbpids, to ayoKpa.

Cathedral, fj pT]Tp6no\is.

Church, f] fKKXrjaia, 6 vaos.

Harmony, 17 appovia.

Proportion, 17 dvakoyia.

Ruins, TO. fptinia.

Vandals, ot BdvSaXoi.

Barbarians, ol ^dp,3apot.

Venetian Tower, 6 ÊveriKos

TTvpyos.

Broken, destroyed^ reOpava-fii-

vov, <Tna<Tpivov.

Man, 'O avSpaiTos.

Ancestors, oI jrpoyopoi.

Parents, ot yovfls.

Father, 6 narijp.

Mother, fj pfjTrjp.

Brother, 6 dtf'K(l>6s.

Sister, fj (Idf'S.cfifj.

Grandfather, 6 Tran-Tro?.

Child, TO TiKVOV.

Son, 6 v'los.

Daughter, fj Ovydrrip.

Grandson, 6 eyyovos.

Descendants, ot dnoyovoi.

Uncle, 6 6f'ios.

Aunt, 17 6fia.

Cousin, 6 (^d8f\(f)os.

Bridegroom, 6 yap^pos.

Bride, fj inip(pri, f) pvârfj.

Marriage, 6 ydpos.

Husband, 6 av^vyos.

Wife, fj uv^vyos.

Widower, 6 xw°^-Widow, fj xhp^'

Orphan, to 6p<pav6s.

Christening, baptism, to ûtt-

Tiapa.

He was born, iyewfjBrj,

He is dead, drrf6ave.

Woman, 17 ywfj.

Girl, TO Kopdaiov.

Boy, TO 7rai8iov, to dyopi.

Youth, 6 veos.

Bachelor, 6 ayauos.

A married man, 6 wpcfxyptvoi.

Old man, 6 yepav.

Old woman, fj ypaia.

His age, fj fjXiKia tov.

The Human Body, To dvOpairivop capo.

Eyes, eyebrows, ot 6(f)da\poi,

al 6(f)pvs,

Nose, f] pis (fj pvTTj).

Ears, TO aiTa.

T 2

Head, fj Ke(f)aXfj.

Hair, TCI paWia, fj Koprj,

Forehead, to peTumov.

Face, TO npoaanov.

Modern Greek.

Teeth, m ohovra.

Mouth, TO arofia.

Tongue, fj yAaxra-a.

Cheeks, ra îdyovKa, al irapfiai.

Beard, to yivtiov.

Moustache, 6 fiia-ra^.

Neck, 6 Xai/iOf, 6 Tpa)(r]\os,

Throat, 6 Xdpvy^.

Chest, TO (TTTldoS.

Bosom, 6 KoKiToi.

Shoulder, 6 Zipos.

Back, 17 po-xi-s, T] jrXarj;.

Arm, 6 ^paxiav.

Hand, to x^P'"

Finger or toe, 6 8dKTv\os.

Thumb, 6 dvT'L\fip,

Nails, oi ovvxfs.

Side, f) nXtvpa.

Lungs, 6 ivveifimv.

Stomach, 6 arofiaxos.

Hips, TO lax^ci.

Thigh, 6 prjpos.

Leg, ^ ki/ij/xt;.

Calf of the leg, ^ yaaTpoKvfjpr).

Knee, to yow.

Foot, 6 irovs.

Skin, TO bfppa, T] fTTibepiiis,

Bones, to. oara.

Flesh, TO Kptas,

Muscles, ol p.va)Vfs.

Heart, fj Kaphla,

Tears, ra haKpva.

Nature, the Country, 'H *vo-ts, 17 'E|ox^.

Ail', 6 dr]p.

Bank (of a river), f} oxSrj.

Bay, 6 KoXTToy.

Beach, TO napaXiov, fj uKpo-

daXacra-cd.

Brook, 6 pva$.

Bush, 6 6dp.vos.

Cape, TO aKpcoTTjpiov,

Coast, f) duTT].

Continent, ff ^nfipos.

Corn, 6 (tItos,

Cotton, 6 ^dfiâ^.

Dust, blinding, 6 KoviopTSs,

TvcpiXavav,

Earth, fj yrj.

Earthquake, 6 o-fto-yoy.

Estate, TO virciaTOTiK ')V, TO Krij/ia.

Field, fertile, to x'^/jd^toi',

yovipov.

Fire, fj (})(orid, TO nip.

Forest, t6 Bda-os.

Hai-bour, deep, o Xip.fjv, âdm.

Heavens, ol ovpavoi.

Hill, barren, 6 \6(pos, ayovos.

Island, f] vrjaos.

Lake, 17 Xt/x»"7.

Moon, f] aikffvrj, TO êyydpi.

Mountain, rocky, t6 opos,

^paxciSfs.

Mud, 17 'kda-mj, 6 ôpôpog.

Ocean, 6 uKeavos.

Olive trees, tq fXaiodevBpa.

Peasant, 6 ^wptfos.

Peninsula, fj x^po'ovTjaos.

Plain, fj TreSids,

Plough, TO apOTpov.

Points of the compass, ra

(TTjp.fia TTjs irvîdos.

North, 6 ôppai.

East, f) dvaTo\fj.

South, 17 pta-ijp^pla.

West, ^ 8v<Tit.

Vocabulary. 2/7

Rock, 6 Ppaxos.

Sea, 17 0d\u(T(Ta.

Shepherd, hardy, 6 noififiv,

€Vpai(TTOi.

Shore, sandy, fj oktI], afi/iadris.

Sky, blue, o ovpavot, Kvavovs.

Stars, ra aarpa.

Sun, 6 tjXios.

Swamp, feverish, to eXor, 6

^dXrof, 7rvp(Ta)8t]s.

Tide, TO pfvpa.

Tree, t6 btvbpov.

Valley, green, f] *cotXaf, irpa-

Water, good to drink, to v8a>p,

iToaifiov,

Wave, sounding, to Kvp-a,

Tixipov.

Wind, east, 6 avtpos dvaTO-

\ik6s.

World, 6 Koa-fjLos.

The Lesson, To Mddrjpa,

Accent, o t6vo!.

Acute, 17 oûa.

Grave, 17 âpf'ta.

Circumflex, t] Trfpicrnaitfvr].

Accusative, ij amart/cij.

Adjective, t6 itridfTov.

Positive, BtTLKov.

Comparative, ovyKpiTiKov.

Superlative, virepBeTiKov.

Adverb, to fnipprjpa.

Article, TO apdpov.

Aorist, 6 d6pi<TTos,

Author, 6 avyypa(f)fvs.

Book, amusing, to Smo-KtSa-

ariKov /3i/3Xtoi'.

Breathing, hard, soft, t6

TTVfvpa, Tf daada, fj \JAi\rj.

Case, fj iTTaxTis.

Class or declension, 17 /cXtVir.

Colon, ff avco T(\fia.

Comedy, ij Kcopabia.

Comparative, t6 ovyKpiTiKov,

Conditional mood, ij vnodfTiKT)

fyKXiais.

Conjugation, ij avCvyia.

Conjunction, 6 a-CvBtarpos,

Consonant, t6 a-vpcfôivov.

Contracted, awrjpripivos.

Conversation, r) (nvbiakfît.

Copy out, to, avTiypdcfxa.

Dative, ^ Sotikij,

Declension, 17 kX/o-w.

Defective, (XXdirTiKos

Dialogue, 6 dtdXoyos.

Dictation, 17 vnaydpfvais.

Difficult, 8va-Ko\os.

Diphthong, 6 8t(p6oyyos,

Dual, 6 8v'U6s.

Educated man, 6 nenaibfvpevos

(ivdpoonos.

Exclamation (note of), to

(ITKpfiiVrjpaTlKOV.

Exercise, to yvpvaa-pa, TO 6(pa.

Expression, fj fKcppaais.

Fault, TO 'kudos.

Feminine gender, to 6tj\vkov

yivos.

Full stop, 17 TcKua.

Future, ist, 2nd, 6 piWoiv,

npCoTOS, bfVTipOS.

Modern Greek.

Gender, to yivos.

Genitive, 17 ytviKt}.

High style, to v'^rfkhv vcfios.

Imperative, 17 npoa-TaKTiKij.

Imperfect, 6 TrapaTaTtKos.

Impersonal, aTr/joo-coTroj.

Indicative, f} Spia-TiKT].

Infinitive, ro dirapepcpaTov.

Interjection, to emcfxijvrjpa.

Irregular, avfidkos.

Leaf, Tc (fjvWov.

Learn, to (by heart), navddvu)

(« cTTrjdovs, drr e$a>).

Lesson, t6 fiddrjpa.

Library, fj î^XiodfjKT}.

Long vowel, ro paKpov (fxcviifv.

Margin, ro nepidapiov.

Mark, t6 a~qpa.ov.

Masculine, t6 dpa-fPiKov.

Master, 6 didda-Kokos.

Mean, to, evvocb, arTjpaivo).

Meaning, fj ewoia, f) a-rjpaeria.

Middle voice, fj peaij (pavrj.

Mistake, t6 a-cpdXfui,

Mode, fj eyicKKTis.

Neuter, ro olberepov.

Next, dK6\ov6o%.

Nominative, 17 ovopaariKf].

Note, make a, (Imp.), arjpdu-

<TOV.

Notebook, t6 (rqpcuopaTdpiov,

Noun, ro ovopa.

Numerals, Cardinal, Ordinal,

01 dpidpoi, dnoXvToi, tok-

riKoi.

Ordinary, koivos.

Page, 17 o-eXi's.

Paragraph, 6 napdypa(f>os.

Participle, fj peroxfj.

Passive, 17 nadrjTiKrj.

Perfect, 6 napaKflpevos.

Person, ri irpoaamov.

Pluperfect, 6 uTrepo-vi'reXtico'f.

Plural, 6 Tv\rj6vvTix6s,

Poetry, 17 noirja-is.

Point of interrogation, ro

(pcoTrjpaTiKov.

Preposition, 17 npddea-is.

Professor, 6 Ka6r)yr)Tr}V.

Pronoun, fj dvTwvvpia,

Prose, 6 neôs Xdyoy.

Pupil, 6 padqrfjs.

Quickly, Tax((os.

Read (Imp.), dvdyvci)(rov.

Repeat (Imp.), inavakaôv.

Rule, 6 Kavau.

Ruler, 6 Kdvatv,

Say, to, Xc'yo).

School, ro axoXuov,

Semicolon, 17 ava reXeta, fj pearj

OTiypf],

Short, ^paxvs.

Singular, 6 iviKos.

Slowly, ^paBecos.

Spelling, 17 opdoypacfy'ia.

Spell (Imp.), 6p66ypayôv, avK-

Xdîaov.

Stop, 17 reXft'a.

Study, to, (TTrouSdfco, piKirm,

Subjunctive, rj inroTaKTtK^.

Substantive, ro oiKnaamKov.

Superlative, t6 vnepSfTiKov,

Syllable, 17 <rvWa^fi.

Syntax, fj avm-aîs.

Teacher, 6 8i8d<TKaXos,

Tell, to, XeV<a.

Tense, 6 xp^vos.

Termination, j] Karakr]^!.!.

Title, 6 rt'rXop.

Tragedy, fj rpaywha.

Translation, ^ i^fiyrjai^.

University, ro TravcjniTTrjpiov.

Vocabulary. 279

Used in conversation, eV xph-

a(i iv StaXd-yo).

Used commonly, Koivris xph'

Used in writing, iv xprtara fh

ypoTTTOV \6yov.

Usual, <rvinjdT]S,

Verb, TO prjfia.

Verbally, irpoôpiKms.

Vocabulary, to \eîX6yiov.

Vocative, 17 *cXf;Tuc^.

Vowel, TO (pavrjfu.

Vulgar, Koivdi, x»^ÔiOS.

THE WEITTEN CHAEACTERGreek handwriting varies as much as English, and is just as

difficult, for a foreigner who has not a thorough knowledge ol

the language, to decipher. The forms given below are those in

ordinary use, written in a clear, bold hand, to aid the beginner.

The abbreviations must be learned by practice.

The Written Character. a8i

PRINTED. WRITTEN.CAPITAL. SMALL.

J^ J^ —o ...

. ... Of^^ i ^.

. - ^^ ^ f

^ ... -^ Xt ... ^ ^y

283

'Ev 'A^^rais, rf} 30rj ÂirpiXCov, 1879.

4>iXTar< Kvpte,

rioXv XvTTOVfiai. OTL €V€K€V UTTpOahoKriTOV KCoAlJ-

[inTos avayKaCofiai, va fxr] Se^^ci) ttjv cvixevrj vn&v i:p6(TKKi]<nv

eis Ti)v CKbpofxriv rrji avpiov. 'EirKûAao-aojixfi'os va iK^paaut

vpXv KoX iTpo(f)opiK(as Tas ivyapi(rrLas p.ov. (ray "napaKoKla va

p.1) irape^riyriariTe rrjv a-novaCav {xov, Koi SiareXw p.6T^ iSiai-

*OAa)? ^Tfxhepoi,

A. T/). K . . . .

Tai 'Aîorijito) Kupfo),

APPEXDIX.

CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIX

sect. pagb

1-14. Inteoduction 287

15-18. I. The Definite Article 295

19-26. II. Pbonodnp . . . : .... 297

27-38. III. The Noon . , 304

39-47. IV. Prepositions 310

48-75. V. The Verb 314

76 84. VI. Faeticles .....*•. 335

APPENDIX.

On the Relation of Modekn to Classical Gbeek,

ESPECIALLY IN BEGAKD TO SyNTAX ^

§ 1. The relation of ancient to modern Greek differs not

only in nearness but in kind from the relation of ancient

Latin to any language of Latin origin. After the fall of

the "Western Empire in the fifth century, popular Latin

finally superseded the Latin of elegant literature. It was the

'lingua romana rustica,'—representing Ennius and Naevius

rather than Cicero and Virgil,—that mainly furnished those

elements which successive phases of alloy at last transmuted

into French and Italian, Spanish and Portuguese. Mean-

while the Eastern Empire, surviving the Western by a thou-

sand years, protected the framework of the Greek language,

and carried it safely into the fifteenth century. Details of

syntax and vocabulary were modified, but the organism was

never dislocated.

§ 2. In ancient Greek, as in ancient Latin, the literary

and the popular idiom had necessarily tended to diverge.

But the literary prose of the Greek classical age had re-

mained in a comparatively close relation with living speech.

It was, in fact, essentially the higher or more cultivated form

' My thanks are due to Professor Michael Constantinides, of the

Hellenic College, London, and to the Rev. H. F. Tozer, Fellow of

Exeter College, Oxford, for their kindness in reading the proof-sheets of

this Appendix, and for some valuable suggestions.

288 Appendix.

of a natural and spontaneous utterance ; it was never arti-

ficial in the same sense as the literary Latin of the later

Eepublic and of the Empire. Thus from the first it was

fitted to exercise a vital influence over the spoken, no less

than the written, Greek of after-times. Two special causes

have contributed to maintain that influence.

(i) From the time when the political liberties of ancient

Greece were extinguished, the sentiment of Hellenic nation-

ality and the pride of Hellenic descent have always recog-

nised their most generally effective symbol in the classical

Greek literature. Hence the power of that literature in

Greek-speaking countries, much as it has fluctuated, has

always been, on the whole, superior to any power which

classical Latin literature could exert over men who felt

that the true distinction of Rome was derived less from

arts or letters than from arms and laws. (2) The Greek

Church, partly through the patristic writings and the liturgic

formularies, partly through the intimate i*elations of the

parochial priesthood with the people, has supplied a per-

petual link between the language of daily life and the

comparatively pure idiom of B^antine prose.

§ 3. That Greek, as distinguished from Latin, has never

been ' dead,' is therefore a correct statement when it is pro-

perly defined.

The tradition of the Greek language, as usually written

by the educated, has been substantially continuous. Sup-

pose a person acquainted with classical Greek, but not

acquainted with post-classical Greek of any period. Place

before him a passage of Greek prose, such as would have

been ordinarily written by a person of fair education at any

period from 300 B, C. to the present day. * Several details

will be new to him, and he may be unable to give a version

exact in every particular; but he will easily follow the

general sense. Take, on the other hand, a person who

knows ancient Latin alone, and try the same experiment

Classical and Modern Greek. 289

in any Romance language : even the general sense will, as

a rule, completely baffle him.

The divergence of colloquial Greek from the classical type

has often been, and in some cases still is, considerably

wider,—the interval varying much, according as the gauge

is a peasant patois or the familiar speech of the educated.

Similarly a knowledge of Italian, available for the literature

from Dante onwards, is not in itself a perfect key to the

dialect of Venice. Yet even the most debased form of

Romaic has still been ancient Greek in another sense from

that in which any Romance dialect is ancient Latin. That

which ancient Greek has in common with a Romaic patois

is not merely a number of reconstituted elements, but a

coherent and organic basis, which has been more or less

thickly overlaid, but never broken up.

§ 4. The classical student is apt to compare modern Greek

directly with such Greek as was written until about 300 b. c.

Departui'es from classical syntax, dilutions of terse classical

phrases, assume in this view the aspect of modern corruptions.

Further inquiry shows, however, that many particular * mo-

dernisms ' can be traced back at least two thousand years.

In many more instances the tendencies which the * modern

'

traits express are discoverable in the earliest records of the

language. Modern Greek has inherited, not only the ancient

literature, but also an oral tradition which preceded that

literature, which co-existed with it, and which has survived

it. If, then, the character of modern Greek is to be esti-

mated aright, it is necessary to take some account of that

historical development which separates the close of the * clas-

sical ' age from the present century.

§ 5. Alexander's conquests made Greek the language of

government and business, as well as of literature and society,

among the populations of Egypt, Syria, and north-western

Asia. Then in the course of the third century B.C. arose the

literary Common Dialect. This meant ' the dialect in general

u

290 Appendix.

use,' as distinguished from the irare Atlic dialect of the stand-

ard Attic classics. The beginning? of a transition can already

be seen in the prose of the non-Athenian Aristotle. The'Common Dialect' was based on the Attic, but admitted

forms, words, and phrases which were not Attic. It is

used, with various modifications, by the later prose-writers

generally, as Polybius (145 b. c), Diodorus Siculus (40 b. c),

Strabo (18 A. D.), Plutarch (90 A. D.), Pausauias (160 A. D.).

In the Augustan age some literary critics, among whomDiouysiuB of Halicarnassus (25 b. c.) was eminent, made an

attempt to revive the feeling for a purer Attic style. Theaim of the ' Atticists ' is best represented by the prose of

Lucian (160 A. r.), which, though artificial and not always

minutely correct, approached the Attic standard morenearly than any that had been written siuce the age of

Demosthenes.

§ 6. Meanwhile a new type of colloquial Greek arose amongthe mixed populations of Asia, Syria, and Egypt. This was

tinged with different colours by different nationalities, but

was always far less pure than the literary 'Common Dia-

lect.' One form of it, that which prevailed in Egypt, was

known as the Dialect of Alexandria. This was used by the

Alexandrian Jews who made the Greek version of the Old

Testament {circ. 283-135 B.C.) It was also the parent of

the dialect used in the New Testament, and (since Scaliger'a

time) usually called Hellenistic, because hellenistes was the

recognized term for a Greek-speaking Jew (Acts vi. i).

The * Hellenistic' Greek of the New Testament is of capital

importance for the Modern language. The diction of the

New Testament had a direct influence in moulding the Greek

ordinarily used by Christians in the succeeding centuries.

Further, this Hellenistic supplies a measure of the Greek

language as then commonly spoken, while the contemporary

profane literature only shows how, in the higher style, it

was written.

§7. The foreign element which is present in the New-

Testament Hellenistic may first be defined and separated. It

is due partly to the ancient Hebrew in which the books of

the Old Testament are written, partly to the ' Aramaic ' or

Syro-Chaldaic form of Hebrew which, at the beginning of

the Christian era, was commonly spoken by the Jews of

Palestine. This Hebraic tinge is seen in many particular

words or phrases, as when o<^6i'X»;/Lta= 'a transgression,* uprov

(^tryfifrr' to take food,* Trpoaamov Xa/x/3di/€H'=' to be a re-

specter of persons;

' and in such constructions as iaOUiv

ano yj/ixio)v (iiistead of the simple genitive), dptaKeiv ivamiov

rivos (instead of the simple rivi), or 8vo dvo (an idiom which

has survived) instead of dva 8vo, 'by twos.' In many

other instances the Hebrew colouring is due to the fact

that the expression of the new spiritual life demanded terms

which the Greek vocabulary of the day could not furnish.

More generally, it may be said that the Hebraic stamp is

seen in two broad traits: (i.) graphic circumstantiality, as

iypa(prj 8ia x*'poy Tivoi instead of vno Tivos : (ii.) simple and

monotonous connection of clauses, without any attempt at

terse and varied peiiods. In this respect the style is to that

of Plutarch much what the dpofifvr] \iiis of Herodotus is

to the KarearTpafxpevr) Xt^is of mature Attic prose. Modern

Greek says ^X^e koI fine rather than e\6a)v fme. This tendency

to forego the use of the participle is already apparent in the

New Testament. Latin influence touches the syntax of the

New Testament only in so far as it had already affected the

* Common Dialect:

' it may be traced in a few uses such as

irapaKokSi tva eX% {praccipio ut veniat), rrpo <| f}p.fpci)p {ante

sex dies), but gives no pervading colour.

§ 8. Apart from these traits, the language of the NewTestament is essentially the later Greek of Alexandria. As

regards diction, the Common Dialect is seen in such Attic

forms as deTo's side by side with un-Attic forms such as

pi)(rau. "Words which in classical Greek were only poetical

u 2

29 3 Appendix.

are now current, as aXaXjjros, Qioarvyr]^, okeKToip. Familiar

words take new forms, as vovdeaia (for vovStrrjais), avdOtîa (for

dvddrjiia); or they have new meanings, as (f)6dveiv='tn arrive,'

7rcpaKaXf'ip=^' to entreat,' senses which Modern Greek retains.

A distinct feature consists in the Christian sense now given

once for all to such terms as nla-Tis, SiKaiova-dai, f/ trdp^, 6 KOfTfioi,

KXrjros, dnoaroXos. New compounds, often clumsy, arise where

the need is felt: thus the Modern liK-qpotôpla ('information')

already occurs, though only as='full assurance,' ' certainty \'

Neuter nouns like ^dnTia-iJia, adjectives like npwivos, and such

verbs as fôvbtvow, opffpl^co, a-ividâ, are formed with especial

facility. The vocabulary of classical Greek is, in this Hel-

lenistic phase, going through a furnace, and being re-cast

by the moulding power of oral use.

§ 9. In syntax, more strikingly than in diction, the ten-

dencies of Hellenistic are those of Modern Greek. For

example : i . The Active Voice of the verb, with the re-

flexive pronoun, is often used instead of the Middle Voice.

2. The Optative Mood is becoming rare, especially in oratio

obliqua. 3. The loss of a correct instinct for the use of the

Moods is seen (e. g.) in the junction of orav and edv with the

Indicative. 4. The Cases of nouns are unclassically used,

as when TrpocrKwelv takes a dative, or ydfo-dai an accusative.

5. Tiie Dual number is disused. 6. Iva with the Subjunc-

tive replaces the classical Infinitive in various contexts.

§ 10. But, while the Greek of the New Testament is

colloquial, it is still the spoken language of the educated, and

is not divided by any impassable gulf from the literary

Common Dialect. It is less pure, less elegant, less various

;

but those who knew only the one could be at no loss to

understand the other. A wider breach between literary

Greek and the spoken language of the people dates from

about 300 A. D. Between 750 and 900 A. d. the ancient

* In such a context as Rom. iv. 21, ir\T]po<popi]6ils oTt , . . Swaros

tan, there is some approximatiou to the Modern use.

Greek traditions were in great measure effaced, chiefly by the

Slavonian immigrations. In the satirical verses of the monk

Theodorus Prodromus (1143-1180 A. D.)— called nokiTiKoX

arixoi because written in the people's dialect— the spoken

idiom has now taken a definite shape, fr.r removed from

that of the literary language. Prodromus, addressing the

Emperor Manuel Comnenus, bewails the depression of lite-

rary pursuits. At Constantinople, he says, it is less profit-

able to make verses than to mend shoes :

—

feiTovav (X<" nfTâirrjV, Taxa \pfvSoTâyyAp^y

ir\fjv fve * Ka\o\povviaTTjs, eve Kal xapoKoiror

vrav yap iSri ttjv aiiyîv rrepixapaaaofievTjv,

Xeyei as ^paarj rd Kpaaiv kcu âXe rd imreptv'

fiiOvi TO ^pdaeiv to Bepfiov \eyei npbs to iraiS'iv tow,

va TO, iraiSiv fiov. dyopaae xop5oKot\a OTapievov,

<pepf Kol BXax^Kou rvplv aWrjv arafxeyapeav,

Kai 56s pie va npoyevaajpiai, Kal Tore va, veTôvca.

' I have a neighbour, a cobbler,—may be a pretender to boot-making

:

now there is an epicure for you,—a very prodigal ! When he sees

the first streak of dawn, he says: "Let the wine be mulled,—put

in the pepper." No sooner is the warm draught ready than he cries

to his slave :" Look here, boy ! buy me a shilling's worth of sausages ;

and bring a shilling's worth of Wallachian cheese, too,—and let mehave some breakfast, and so to my cobbling."

'

§ 11. This modern and popular form of Greek has been

known as Romaic : i. e. the language of the Romaioi.

' Romans,' as the Greek-speaking subjects of the Eastern

Empire called themselves from the 4th century onwards,

while the name 'Hellenes' was reserved for the ancient Greeks

or for adherents of paganism, and the inhabitants of Greece

Proper were called ' Helladikoi.' Just, then, as ' Romaioi

'

were distinguished from 'Hellenes,' so Eomaic, the language

of the people, was distinguished from Hellenic, the language

of the ancient literature.

§ 12 The linguistic reform begun in 1788 by Adamantios

* tv(, a, form still used in some provinces, = tfj'oi = eari.

294 Appendix.

Koraes (born 1748, died 1833) had a strictly practical aim.

Under Turkish rule tlie si)c)ken Romaic had been much bar-

barised. Except at a few centres, it had become little better

than a patois with local forms. In order to establish a

standard medium of communication, KoraSs proposed that,

so far as it could be done without too violent a departure

from actual usage, persons writing Greek should (i.) resume

the classical inflexions of nouns and verbs, (ii.) discard

imported foreign words, and use Greek words instead. Themovement was not an effort of theoretic purism, but a

working compromise.

§ 13. Since the beginning of this century, and especially

since 1832, the general tendency of literary Greek has been

to eliminate elements characteristic of the lower Romaic, and

to approach in some degree to the type of the older CommonDialect, as written (for instance) by Plutarch. A few writers

of the higher style have aimed at a still purer classicism.

Speaking generally, we may say that the Greek of a well-

written newspaper is now, as a rule, far more classical than

the Hellenistic of the New Testament, but decidedly less

classical than the Greek of Plutarch ; being distinguished

from the latter (i.) by the general characteristics of the higher

or written Romaic;

(ii.) by a modern complexion due to the

literal translation into Greek of modern terms, as when ' a

member of the commisssion ' becomes iitKoi rjyj innporrjis.

The spoken language of the lower class is still the vernacular

Romaic : that of the educated varies in purity according to

circumstances. For the sake of being more intelligible, an

educated Greek will use the literary idiom more largely in

conversing with a foreigner than he would with a Greek.

General statements on this subject are therefore to be avoided,

since there is no really accurate gauge. Education and the

influence of good journalism are gradually tending to lessen

the interval between the written and the spoken language.

§ 14. By ' Modern Greek ' is here understood the average

spoken and written idiom of the educated, apart, on the one

hand, from literary ultra-classicism, and, on the other, from

merely local or rustic patois. Thus defining it, I propose to

take in order the principal points in which Modern differs

from classical Attic Greek. It will be found that the dis-

tinctive features of later and Modern Greek can generally

be traced to one of two principal tendencies, or to their

combined action : viz. (i.) the desire of greater expressive-

ness; (ii.) the extension, by false analogy, of a classical

usage.

I. The Definite Article.

§ 15. Position of the Article in the attributive sentence. In

classical Greek, 'the wise man'= (a) 6 ao^os avi)p, or (6)

6 avi]p 6 (ro(p6s, or (c) avr/p 6 <To<f6s. But (c), which really

implies an afterthought,—'a man—I mean, the wise man,'

—

is far the least common in good prose : in the New Testa-

ment it is also rare, except where the attributive is formed

by a clause with preposition or participle : as Acts xxvi.

18, TTioTei Ty els (fit: X. 4I, fidprvffi rots TrpoKf)((ipoTovrip.ivois.

In Modern Greek it is also rare, and usually occurs under

the same condition as in the N. T.

§ 16. The Article with Projyer Names. In classical Greek

this use is less constant than in Motlern. Thus in Xenophon,

Anab. iii. i. 8, KaraXaplSavfi . . np6$(vov Koi Kvpov 18 immediately

followed by npodvpovpevov Se . , ToG lipn^fvov Koi too Kvpov '.

where the art.=' the' Proxenus, 'the' Cyrus, just mentioned.

But the modem Greek translator (Btirdalachos) uses the art.

in both places. Cp. p. 193 above, where iv rpaymbia Tltpaais

(Plutarch) is rendered by tls ttjv rpaycp^iav tovs Uepvas

(Gennadius).

§ 17. The Article prefixed to a whole clause. Modern Greek

can say, to va Xe'-y?; Tis ravra, TTtpUpyov ftvaiy 'the fact of anyone

saying this is strange.' This is essentially classical. Cp.

Herodotus, iv. 127, avTt tow oti dtanorrjs scprjaas fivai ffWSf *ia

2^6 Appendix.

return for your claiming (rrairt rov <^riva[ o-f) to be ray master.'

Plato, Jiepublic p. 327 C, ev n XtwrtTat, to tjv Tttiauifiev vfias, 'one

thing remains, the chance of our persuading you.' So in

N. T. : Luke xxii. 2, f(fiTovv t6 na>s dptXaaiv avTof, 'they were

busy with the question how they might destroy him :' c^l,

ib. i. 62. [Distinguish this usage from that by which the

art. merely introduces a quoted word or phrase, as ro avSpes,

the word avbpes : Galatians v. 14, 6 vofios . . mn'krjpwTai iv t^

' ayaTTijcretff rbv nXrjaiov (Tov.'j

§ 18. A peculiar modern use. In Modern Greek the art. can

be separated from the noun by a relative clause equivalent to

an epithet : as, ra ntp\ i>v \eyofifv irpdyfiara, ' the affairs of

which we speak.' Here the limit of resemblance to old Greek

must be carefully marked. In old Greek the art. can stand

before relative clauses : Plato, Critlas p. 115 b, t6v re ^ijpov

((capTTOJ') . . . Koi rbv oaos ^v\ivos '. Lysias, or. 23. § 8, rov re

'EvBvKpiTov Koi rw os f(f>i] dfanoTrjs tovtov (ivai. Demosthenes,

In Androt. § 64, fiiaflv rovs oloa-nep ovtos, where olovantp is

certainly not right. Platon. JEp. 8. p. 352 e, to)v 8e oaa

yfvoiT av. But probably no example occurs in classical Greek

where such a relative clause, equivalent to an adjective, is

followed hy a substantive agreeing with an article, as if, in

Plato, Critias I. c, we had koi t6v oo-oj ^vXivos Kapnov. See

Xenophon, Ilepl imriKris vii. § 5, ov ttji' uxntep tm rov 8i<ppov

eSpai' (TTUvovpev, dWa ttji' Sycnrep 6p66s hv Sia^e^rjKas fit) rolv

aKeXolv :' we do not recommend that the rider should sit in

the saddle as in a chair, but rather as if he were standing up

with his legs apart.' This sentence accurately illustrates the

classical usage : ebpav, agreeing with rfju, follows the attri-

butive clause Sxnrep <Vt rov dicppov, but does not follow the

relative clause SxTntp 6p66s av dia^f^rjKoos (It] toIv aKt'Kolv. The

reason is evident. The old language felt that in such a

phrase as t6v oa-ot ^vXtfcr the art. rov is really on the border-

land between article and pronoun : hence it refrained from

adding the noun in agreement with the article. Modern


Greek adds the noun, thus obtaining a more precise, but a

harsher, construction.

II. Pronouns.

§ 19. Modern Greek uses rov, t^j, ratv, etc., as shorter

forms for the pronouns of the third person ; as rov e/SXfTra, * I

saw him :

' to flnt, ' he said it.' They are enclitic (i.) when

they follow the verb, as iriix^tTi tovs, ' send them,' napere ra,

' take those things '

:

' (ii.) in the Genitive, after a noun,

when tliey represent the possessive pronoun, as 17 ahj^tj/j ttjs,

'her mother:' 01 0iXot rav, 'their friends.'

It may be asked,—Is this a return to the earliest use of

6, f], TO as a pronoun 1

In Homer the pronominal 6 is commonly emphatic, and,

standing at the beginning of the clause, points a contrast

(a) between different persons or things, or (6) between dif-

ferent acts of the same person ; as II. i. 29, ttjv 8' eya ov \va-a>,

' but her I will not loose :' 189, ixepfxfjpiêv\

ij o yt (pdayavov o^v

fpvaa-afxtvos • . •|Toos fief avaaTrjcrfifP, 6 8' 'ATpfi8r)v evaplôi,

|rje

ôXov iraicreifv :* whether he for his part [o ye—he to whom

both courses were open] . . should make them rise, while he

slew [=and next slay] Atreides,—or should stay his wrath.'

Cp. Aeschylus, Suppl. 443, fj rolcnu tj toIs noXepov atpeaBai, 'to

levy war against these or those.' In Attic the pronominal use

is commonest [a) in the antithesis of 6 ptv, . . 6 8e, 'the one

—

the other:' (b) in the 6 8e which merely continues a narrative.

But we find also (c) such phrases as in Lysias, or. 19. § 59, kcu

poi KoXfi Tov Ka\ Tov, ' now please to call him [that man there],

and him ; ' Demosth. or. 9. § 68, eSet to koX to jtoiô-qi koI to pf)

' The enclitic form sometimes follows the verb when the accented

form has preceded : rci (iStTf ra ;' Did you see those things there V By

a similar colloquial pleonasm, the accented form can follow another pro-

noun, when it stands immediately before the verb : toCto tirpewe va to

tl^tvprfs, 'you ought to have known that.'

298 Appendix.

noiTjaai, * we ought to have done this and that, and not have

done the other thing \'

In Modern Greek, besides the Attic uses (a) and (b), (c)

is also common : uTre to koi t6, ' he said so and so.' Here

there can be no doubt that an ancient colloquialism has

survived, and that t6 is the definite article. Apart from this

idiom, however, the Modern rov, etc., for the pronoun of the

third person, is better regarded as a curtailment of avrov, etc.

This view is confirmed by the following considerations

:

(i.) the enclitic rov, Ttjt, etc., can hardly be otherwise ex-

plained: (ii.) later classical prose exhibits no trace of a

return, beyond the Attic limit, to the earlier pronominal

use of 6, fj, TO : (iii.) Modern analogy shows that an oxytone

or perispomenon dissyllable might lose its first syllable, aa

when is TO becomes oto.

§ 20. The Personal Pronoun auT<Ss. In classical Greek thia

pronoun has two uses, (i.) It is the ordinary pronoun of the

third person when used substantival!y in any Case except the

Nominative: Spas avrov, ^yon see him.' (ii.) It is intensive,

expressing the notion ' self,' when used (a) substantivally in

the Nominative: ain-os 6pas, 'you yourself see i^ (6) adjectivally,

in any Case : Spas airov rbv tivbpa, 'you see the man himself.'

In Modern Greek use (i.) remains, but (ii.) is modified, (a)

In the Nominative, aiiros, meaning ' self,' can take after it the

enclitic genitive of the personal pronoun, and is then col-

loquially shortened to aros : thus :—

rlaio.

avTOS, S} âihwv, waptyivov So;-

Kparti (Kfivr) r^ Vlîpf ?T î (pap-

paicov (irtev iv Ta) SfapaiTrjpicp, ^

dWov rov ijKovaas ;— ouros, Si

'ExficpaTts.

Modem Greek.

dros <rov, Si âiSaiv, inrrjffs tls

rbu 'SajKpaTrjv tKfivriv r^y iipipav

KarcL Tfjv oiroiav (irit to (papfiditt

(Is Tf)v (pvXaKTjV, fj dw^ Kaviva d\-

\ov TO i]Kova(s;—dros |tov, Si 'Ext-

HpaTfs,

' In the N.T. (omittins?, of course, the epic rod ycip ytvos laplv, quoted

from Aratus, in Acts xvii. 28) the pronominal use has much the same

Another form is auros 6 iSios : e. g. * they themselves do it,'

a\iro\ ot tStot TO Kafivovu. And where 'self implies 'alone' or

' unaided,' it can be expressed by fiovos fiou, trou, too, etc.

:

' wlio wrote it? I wrote it myself:' ris to eypaê; novos (jlov

TO typaylra. (6) "When the pronoun is used adjectivally in

other Cases than the Nominative, it is usually no more than

a demonstrative : e. g. Spas alrhv t6v avBpoiTrov, ' you see that

man there:

' while, ' you see the man himself,' would be opus

aVTOV TOP iBiov.

Already in the Greek of N. T. the intensive use of airoi

is fluctuating. The proper force is found (e. g.) in Luke

vi. 42 : TtSts dvvaaai \ty(ii> t<o dS<X<^(» aov . , . auTOS rtjv ev to*

6(p6a\p^ (Tov doKov oi jSXtirav ; On the other hand, see Luke

xix. 2 : Koi I80V, avrjp ovopaTi KfiXovpivos ZnK)â7os, Koi avTos rjv

dpxtT€\a)VT]s, Koi ovros rjv rrXovaios, Here avros cauiiot be ren-

dered, ' he himself;' it is at most an emphasized 'be,'='that same mnn,'—as in the Greek of to-day.

§ 21. 6 1810s ('the very one'), as the modem equivalent for

6 avTos (' the same ') requires notice here. 1810?, from the

pronoun-stem Ff (= Latin suus, se), means properly 'what

belongs to one's self.' In classical Greek iS«os means (i.)

* private ' as opposed to * public,' e. g. ttXovtos iSios ^ brjpoatos: :

(ii.) ' distinctive,' ' peculiar,' e. g. txî IBiav cf^vaw, it has a na-

ture distinct from that of others. From this latter use of

the word to mark individualkt/ the modern Greek use

springs : avros 6 idios, ' he, the very man'i:^' he himself.' ' Is

that the man of whom you spoke ?' tlvat airros 6 avdpconos ntpi

TOV oiroiov fifffTt; 'It is the same,' tlvai 6 ifiioj (= 'the very

man'). The use of liios as an emphatic possessive in the

N. T., which will be noticed presently, illustrates the trans-

ition.

limits as in classical prose : 1. e. it occurs in (a) 6 (xtv . . 6 54, (6) the

narrational 6 5«, (c) as a semi-colloquial demonstrative, e. g. Luke xvii.

24, aarpamovca (k t^j irn oipavov (is t^v iin' oi/pavov, 'flashing from

this to that region.'

300 Appendix.

§ 22. The Bpflexive Pronoun. This is commonly formed ia

Modern Greek by adding the Genitive of the personal pro-

noun, used as a possessive, to (uvtov declined with the

article ; ffkanrH rhv favTov Tou, ' he hurts the self of him'

(= himself), ^Xairrofifv rhv eavrov fias (for even with the plural

fias, aas, rav the singular of eavrov is retained), ' we hurt the

selves of us,' (= ourselves). The origin of this use can be

traced to the classical use of favrov as the reflexive, not only

of the third person, but also of the first and second (a primi-

tive use reasserting itself, as in Sauskrit sva serves for all

three persons) : e.g. (i.) First person. Soph. 0. T. 138, avroi

avTov [=e;:tavroC] tovt aTroa-Kedcb fxvcros '. Plat. Pliaedo p. 78 B,

hfl fj^as dvfpiadai eavTovi^= f]fias ai/Tovs] : (ii.) Second person,

Aeschylus, Agam. mo, d/i0l 6' amas [=<r«auT^f] Bpoeh'.

Demosth. Olynth. I. § 2, tiTrtp a-arriplas avT&v [= ti/i«i/ awrwv]

c})povTi(fT(. In the N. T. these uses are, for the plural, muchmore frequent than in classical Greek : as Acts xxiii. 14,

dufffepaTiaafjifv iavTOvs= fjnai av'^ovs'. Philipp. ii. 12, rfjv iavTutv

^^zvfuav avrav] acorrfpiav Karfpyd^faOf. For the Singular num-

ber the N. T. has no example where the reading is unques-

tioned; see, however, John xviii. 34, Galat. v. 14. In classical

Greek, too, the instances of the singular are usually doubtful

(in prose), e. g. Xen. Mem. i. 4. 9 ; ii. 6. 35 ; where for tavrov

a variant is (jfavTov or a-avrov. This is no accident. In the

singular number it was easy to distinguish the ordinary from

the emphatic reflexive ; e. g. * You hide yourself,' Kpimreis

atavTov :* blame yourself (and not others),' ere alrbv [or avrov

ere] atTtw. But this distinction was less easy with the plural

forms ly/xwv avrwv, vpS>v avrodp. Hence it was convenient, in the

plural number, to use iavroiv for the non-emphatic reflexive

of the first and second persons, reserving ^/xcoji avrav, vpav

avrwv, for the expression of emphasis.

Modern Greek goes one step further. In /3XdjrT« tov iavrov

Tov, ' he hurts the self of him,* we see that the word iavrov

has now come to be used as a noun, expressing the abstract

Classical and Modern Greek, 30

1

idea of 'self,'—the language of daily life thus bearing an

unconscious mark of metaphysical reflection. It is no longer

enough, then, to say, as Plato could say, ipcoranfv eavrovs,

' we ask selves :' it is necessary to be more explicit ; ipcoranev

TOP eavTov fjias, ' we ask tJie selves of us.'

§ 23. Possessive Pronouns. Classical Greek has three forms;

{a) with the genitive of the personal pronoun, where there

is no emphasis, 6 irar^p aov, 'tliy father;' {b) where a slight

emphasis or contrast is implied, 6 a-bs Trarrip, ' thy father' (and

not another's);

(c) for strong emphasis, 6 creavrov (or 6 <t6s

avTov) naTT]p, ' thy oum father,'

The general tendency of later Greek was habitually to

use (a), to drop (6), and to vary (c). In the N. T. «V"?

(most frequently used by St. John) and aos are I'are, except

where there is an emphasis somewhat more distinct than the

classical use necessarily implies ; while ^nertpos, vptrepos,

occur not more than ten times each. The strongly emphatic

possessive (of all three persons) is expressed in the N. T.

by iStos, e.g. I Cor. iv. 12, K07nS)fj.fv, tpya^ofifvoi rais ISlais

[= classical rah rjneTepais avrcov] X^P'^h' with OUT own hands.'

And 1810s, like the adjectival possessive in older Greek, can

be further strengthened by the genitive of the personal

pronoun, 2 Pet. iii. 3, ras I8ias aircbv fTTtdvfiias.

In Modern Greek form (a) is the same, except that instead

of avTov, avTjjv, avrav the enclitics, tov, rrjs, twv, are used ; and

instead of 17/xwi', vp.o>v, the enclitics pm, aai. As regards (6), efios,

aos, fiptrepos, vperepos, a(f)eTepos, have disappeared from all but

the higher literary style. For (c) IdiKos ^ is used, e. g. fj ISikt)

fiov oIkm, ' my own house ;' to IBiku p.ag {a-as, rmv) jStjSX/a, ' our

(your, their) own books.' Like the classical, 6 e/xdj, &c.,

6 IdiKos expresses 'mine,' &c. ; e.g. rivos elvai to /St/SXiW;

* It is hardly necessary to remind the reader that ISik6s (very com-

monly pronounced iSiKos), a form of tlSiKus, ' special' {dSos, species, stem

/^i5), has nothing to do with tSios, 'own' (pronoun-stem fe). The use of

iSiKot Sia=pTO^rius occurs as early as Leo Philosophus (ctVc. 895 A.D.).

3©2 Appendix,

' "Whose is the book V ' It is theirs,' (Ivm to 18ik6v rav. Notethat in later Greek the unemphatic possessive is constantly

added where in classical Greek it is omitted. Thus, 'Layon thy hand' would be sufficiently expressed in classical

Greek by enida rfjv x*'/'"- But in Luke iv. ii we have

eTTi^er r^v x«pa o'ov : and SO in Modern Greek.

§ 24. Relative Pronouns, (i) ooris. In classical Greek,

while the ordinary simple relative is os, oam implies the class

to which the subject belongs. Hence (a) where the antecedent

is indefinite, o(rTjj=' whoever;' (6) where the antecedent is

definite, it has a causal force : ovtos. Sans rovavra (iraBtv, i\iov

iariv li^ios, ' this man deserves pity, seeing that he [lit. ' as

one who'] has suffered so much,' Lat. qui tanta perpessus sit.

In the N. T. oa-ns is rare except in the nominative (though

on, accus. neut., arid etos Stov occur), and never introduces

an indirect question, ris being preferred. And already wesee the tendency to use Sans as the simple relative : no

natural interpretation can make it more in Luke ii. 14, tis

TToKiv Aavfi8, ijris KoXflrai Bij^Xee/x. Modern Greek uses oans

(a) indefinitely: on koi &v 6177.7, 'whatever he may say;'

{b) for OS, chiefly in nom. masc. and fem., but not neut.

:

6 avr]p Sorts, t] yvvr] rJTis, to iraibiov Sntp (not o rt). The dis-

use of Off in common speech is characteristic; so simple a

form ceased to satisfy the desire of em|)hasis.

§ 25. (2) 6 oiroTos. The adoption of this pronoun as an

ordinary relative in Modern Greek evinces a similar loss of

precision. Compare these two forms, (a) tpya a Xeyetr, ' deeds

which you mention,* and [b) tpya onola \eytis, * deeds such as

you mention.' Obviously (b) might serve, in a given case, as

a loose equivalent for (a); e. g. Pausanias, i. xiv. i, to. S« «avTov oiTola Xeytrat ypdi/^w, 7rape\s onoaov (Is Arju'mrjp fx** ^°^'

\6yov, ' I will record such stories as are [actually] told re-

garding him, omitting so much of the story as [=that defi-

nite part which] relates to De'iope.' So far only does old

Gtreek countenance the modern use of owolos. But Neo-Hel-

Classical and Modern Greek, 303

lenic seeks to compensate for laxity by emphasis, and so.

]trcfixiug the article, uses 6 orrolot^.

It is probable that the Modern Greek use of 6 imoio^

as an ordinary relative was encouraged by the analogy of

the Italian il quale. The latter (unlike the French le quel,

when relative) can be used even when no preposition pre-

cedes, merely as a relative of greater precision or emphasis

;

e.g., 'i beni di questa vita, che 1' uomo desidera;' where

i quali {^=Ta onoia) might replace the ambiguous che, if it

was desired to mark that the antecedent is beni and not

vita. Cp. Shakspeare, Richard II. i. i. 90, 'Nobles . . . the

which he hath detained;

' though elsewhere Shakspeare usu-

ally has 'the which' only after a preposition, like le quel.

In 6 onoioi, il quale, le quel, * the which,' the addition of the

article converts an indefinite into a definite relative''.

§ 26. (3.) The popular use of ottou (commonly written

onoii), or even of ttoC, for the relative of both numbers and

all cases, is a curious example of false analogy; e. g. rh xpovia

rrov (iT(pa(T(, ' the years which he has passed;

' tov avbpa ottov

fl8a, ' the man whom I have seen.' The origin of the use

is manifest. Cp. Aristophanes, Aves 1300, j'Soi/ Se . . . ndvTfs

H(\r],I

oiroo xt\i,8(ov ^v ris tfnrtnoiTjfXfvri, * all were singing

songs, whê [^=in which^ a swallow was introduced.' Here

OTTOV= eV oh. Beginning from sentences of this type, the

use of OTTOV would be gradually extended in the vernacular.

* Even for this we can find at least the semblance of a parallel in old

Greek: Dem. De Cor. §146, awiffaivt di avr^ rw itoXiii^ Kparovvri

Tovy httoiovaZriiroff vfifLS (êntfjiiTfTt arpaTrjyovs . . . KOKoiraOfiv, ' it was

his misfortune that, while he was conquering all generals, good or bad,

whom you sent out, he was disabled.' If rovi agrees with dvoiovaSrinoTf

here, then the article is used as in Modem Greek. But it may be

explained as the article followed by a relative clause = roi/s owoiotdTjvoTe

(^rj\6ov arpaTTjyoL See above, on the Definite Article, I. § i6.

* In Winter's Tale, iv. 4. 539, we find 'the' with 'whom:' 'your

mistress, from the whom I see there's no disjunction.' Tliis is as strange

as diro T^j î would be, and, if not unique, is very rare.

3^4 Appendix.

Suppose, e.g., such a phrase as to. npdynaTa onov (VTvxd, 'the

matters in which he prospers.' Here onov might be con-

ceived as representing an accusative of respect, a : and thus

the way would be prepared for its use as a substitute for

the accusative in other contexts also. In English, ' the menas (=whom) he met,' happens to be a lower vulgarism

than the parallel orrov of Modern Greek ; but it shows howpopular use welcomes an unvarying form which saves the

trouble of declining the relative.*

III. The Noun.

Number.

§ 27. The Xoun, like the Verb, has no longer a DualNumber. The Dual is seen most fully developed in the

older Asiatic (or properly 'Aryan') languages of the Indo-

European family. In classical Greek it is already infrequent,

being seldom employed save where the notion of a pair or

pairs is prominent : thus Ismene to Antigone (Sophocles,

Ant. 58), fjiova 8fi va) XeXfifjififpa, (we two, left quite alone)...

yvvaiKe ...oil fiaxovyiiva '. yet even there the verbs are plural.

The plural is indeed constantly combined with the dual

;

op. Pindar, N. x. 64, (^iKtadav Koi . . . ifiria-avro. In the Hel-

lenistic of the N. T. the dual never occurs, either of nounor verb (except in bvo). In Latin it remains only in duo,

ambo : as the oldest Teutonic dialects also have a dual only

in the pronouns of the ist and 2nd persons.

§ 28. Neuter Plurals with Plural Verb.—This, the regular

Modern construction, occurs in classical Greek chiefly (i)

when the neuter noun denotes (a) living creatures, as Thuc.

i. 58, TO. riKt] vTTfa-xovTo, 'the authorities promised;' or (b)

inanimate objects which are personified, as Herod, ii. 96, ra

irXoia . . . dva tov irorafiov oil dvvavrai TtXteiv, ' the boats cannot

* Cp. Shaks. J, G. i. 2. 33, ' That gentleness as I was wont to have;*

Rich. III. ii. I. 33, ' With hate in those where I expect most love.'


make head against the current.' (2) When plurality is em-

phasized, Xen. Anah. i. 7- 17. ^ovfpa ^aav . . . Ixvt) ttoWo. In

Hellenistic the same exceptions hold good ; as (i) Jas. ii. 19,

TO dai/xovia iriaTtvova-t /cat (ppiaaova-i : (2) John xix. 31, iva

Kartayaa-iv ovTuiv to. a-KeXt). On the other hand, the noimal

usage still remains; John xix. 31, tva nfj fxtivr) ra a-afMra.

The influence of Latin must have tended to abolish in later

Greek the peculiarly Hellenic use, which would come to be

felt as ungrammatical ; and thus the exception, never rare,

at last became the rule.

Case.

§ 29. An 'inflectional' (or 'amalgamating') language, like

Greek, expresses different relations of the noun by adding

different endings to an unchanging stem; e.g. stem Trartp,

nomin. irartp-s {narrjp), gen. naHp-os, etc. lu the youth and

prime of a language, these case-endings are still felt to be

so expressive that many special relations can be denoted by

them without further aid. Thus in classical Greek it was

still possible to say, rovrav eyeVfro, 'EXAaSt olKei, meaning, 'he

sprang from these,' ' he lives in Greece.' Even then, how-

ever, it was becoming more usual to say, ex Toirmv iyevtro, iv

'EXAaSt otVei. In post-classical Greek, as the instincts which

first shaped the language lose their freshness, the recourse

to prepositions becomes more frequent.

§ 30. This tendency was most strongly marked in regard

to the Dative, because this case had taken to itself the

lai'gest variety of meanings. The process which finally led

to the almost total disuse of the Dative in Modern Greek

is curious and instructive.

The meanings of the Dative in classical Greek are of

two classes : those which in Sanskrit are expressed by the

Locative or the Instrumental,— cases of which Greek pre-

serves only a few vestiges,—and those which were originally

special to the Dative.

X

3o6 Appendix.

I. The Locative denoted (a) the flace in which, or (h)

the moment when. Greek has the locative suffix in such

a dative as nai8-i, and such an adverb as oIkoi. 2. The

Instrumental denoted (a) that with which a thing is done

—the instrument proper; (6) the thing or person which

accompanies an action. This 'sociative' use may have been

the earlier one, from which the special ' instrumental ' sense

was derived. In Sanskrit the Instrumental has two suffixes,

a (seen in Sfxa, rdx^a), and bhi, (/3i)j-0i, oxfs-(j>i).

The Greek Dative, doing duty for these lost cases, could

express, i. (a) place where; 'EXXa6i, in Greece : {b) point of

time; r^ Trptiri; rjixepa: 2. (a) instrument; Kreivfi Tw ^L(p€i

:

(b) circumstance ; dndaXovTo alro'is ittttois, they perished, with

their very horses,—' horses and all.'

Apart from these locative and instrumental meaBings,

two others were originally special to the Dative.

I. It denoted tfie object to which verbal action passes on/

whether the verb has also an immediate object in the accu-

sative, as 80s TovTo (fio'i, or is ' intransitive,' as jj-eXdfo) noKa,

2. It denoted the person concerned or influenced, as dyadov

(K(iva>, 'good for him:' vikq rois Kpnais, 'he conquers, in the

opinion of the judges.'

§ 31. In the N. T. the Dative is still used for all those

four meanings in which it replaced the Locative and the

Instrumental, i. (a) place ; though this, as in classical Greek,

is very rare : uroixtiv rois ixvfcn, ' in the tracks,' Rom. iv. 12:

(6) time; tj rpLTT] rjntpa, Matth. xx. 19 : 2. (a) instrument;

ifidnTUTfv v8aTi, Acts i. 5 : (6) circumstance; npoaevxpiiivr) ukq-

XirTTTfo Trj Ke({)aXfj, 2 Cor. X. 30.

On the other hand, there is a tendency to use some sub-

stitute for the Dative precisely in those meanings which

were originally peculiar to it. Thus: i. Dative of object

to which the action passes on : for Xeyta Ttvi, Xeyw irpos nva

(frequent); for iroXtpe'iv rivi, noXfuav ptrd nvos, Rev. xii. 7'

2. Dative of person concerned or influenced : iXerjpoavvas

jrotô-a)!/ lis TO (6vos nov, Acts xxiv. 1 7 : ijptaev ivwniov toC

nXridovs, Acts vi. 5 : tvSoKf'iv ftr rn/a, ' to be well pleased in

him/ 2 Pet. i. 17 (cp. tvBoKf'iv rols yiyvofitvois, Polyb. iv. 22).

§ 32. In Modern Greek this tendency is further developed,

until in every relation the classical Dative has been super-

seded. This will be best shown by examples :

—

1. Locative. Classical olKmv (eV) ry 77oX€t=Modern oIko)v us

TTjv iroKiv.

2. Temporal. C rfj TpiTj] ^;iepa= M. t^v rpiTrfv ^ptpav.

3. Instrumental (^proper). C. rvmovrfs toIs Sopao-t^M. ktv-

TTovvTfs Sta TQ>v Sopdrav. Causal. C. e^^dcpdrja-av rfj avapxiq,

'they were injured hy their anarchy '=M. i^\. in. ttjs dvapxias.

4. Circumstantial. C. pia Spfifj, ^ with one impulse '= M.

pera /itas opprjs, Or pe plav opprjv, C eVl npoexî, * he has the

advantage in one thing '= M. «« iv Trpoe'x".

5. Dative of object to which action passes on. C. iiSapi rl

TtciîM. 8i8(t) Tt Trpds Tti/a, or ets rij/a. C. avvfaTadr] Kupo), 'he

was introduced to Cyrus '=M. a-vvfarddr) irpos rov Kvpov, C.

6p6(Tas w'l-v, ' having sworn to us '= M. opoaas els T]pds.

6. Dative of])erson concerned. C. XPW'^H-^^ w'^"^^^ ' XPV'^^'

pov (Is rjpas. C. Koivos 7rafft= M. koivos 81 (or (Is) oXovs. C<Tvp(i)fpei rfi (rTpaTia= ^. avpfpepei 8ia (or fls) ttjv a-Tparidv.

Hence in Modern Greek, as now spoken, the Dative is

rarely heard, except in poi, a-oi, ra, t§, toIs, toIs, and a few

common phrases, such as (vroaovrco ('meanwhile'), e'v Kaipw,

(' in season,') eV 'EXXaSt, etc.

§ 33. The Accusative had already supplanted the Genitive

or Dative after some verbs in Hellenistic Greek : e.g. Korabi-

KdCfu> rivd (for classical nvos), Matth. xii. 7 ' eyeva-aro to vB(op

(for classical tov vSotos), John ii. 9 : TrpotrrdTTfiv nvd (for Tivt),

Act. Apocr. 172. When a fine sense for language is failing,

it is natural to use the direct Accusative to express any

object which verbal action affects, and so to efface the differ-

ence between 'transitive' and 'intransitive' verbs: as in

the English vulgarism, ' he wrote them to expect him,' or

X 2

3o8 Appendix.

the German 'etwas widersprechen.' Thus in Modern Greek

we sometimes find a simple Accusative after imôvXtvco, uko-

XovdS), npoardcTaci), TiapayyiWo) (rtva va Ka^rj rt). And this ia

very common when t6u, tovs (as pronoun) precedes the verb,

e.g. TOP eirra, - 1 said to him :' orav tovs ho6^ itpoaTayi], ' when-

ever the order is given them.'

§ 34. Modern Greek has retained the classical use of the

Genitive to a far greater extent than that of the Dative;

though in many relations a preposition is now added where

the simple Case formerly sufficed. As regards the ordinary

colloquial use, these points may be noted :

—

1. After Comparative Adjectives ano or irapd is used with

the Accusative: see below § 35, and cp. § 41.

2. A noun of number or material can be followed by the

Nominative :' three myriads of soldiers,' rpth iMvpiaSes arpa-

Tiwrui :' a glass of water,* (v Trorfipi vtpo,

3. The Genitive of price can be represented by the Accusa-

tive :' he sold the horse for 500 francs,' inuiKrja-f to aXoyov

nevTOKoaia (f)pdyKa.

4. Words of fulness, etc., can take the Accusative with or

without fif {(itra) :* he fills the glass with wine,' yf/xi'fet t6

noTTjpiov (/if) Kpaai :' a house-full of people,' oiKta yeparr] (/xf)

dv6pa)7rovs. The simple Accusative is Hellenistic: Phil. i. 11,

TTfTrXrjpapfvoi Kapnov 8i.Kaio(rvv7]s I Rev. ^vii. 3, drjpiop ... yt/xov

ofo/xara (v. 1. ouopdravj.

5. The Genitives rod, a-ov, pov, with their enclitic forms, are

sometimes used for the Dative : tov to elna, ' I told him

so :' du>cre pov ^(i>pl, ' give me bread.'

Comparison of Adjectives.

§ 35. The Comparative can be formed with jt\(ov

and the positive, as jrX«oi' ^(êuossrêâtoTtpos. This form

(with /ioXXoi') occurs in old Greek, as Eur. Med. 485, irpd-

dvpos paXXov tj aocpaTipa. The proper Comparative can be

strengthened by nXfov, as irktov ^(^auWtpos. This, too, is

classical; Plato, Laivs 781 A, XadpmoTfpov fxaWop koi iniKKo-

noirepov: and so in Hellenistic, 2 Cor. vii. 13, i:(pt(T<TOT€pas

paWop,

Constructions, (i.) The Genitive is not ordinarily used

after the Comparative in Modern Greek, except in the case

of the enclitic personal pronouns, as (fipopipoiTepoi pov {a-ov,

Tov, pas, (ras, Ta)«'). (ii.) Instead of it, dno is commonly used

with the Accus., as TrXeoj' KaWirepos dno rovs oXXovf, ' better

than the others.' (iii.) Or napd with Accus. ; this last is

classical, Thuc. i. 23, «'KXei>/^fij nvKvortpai irapa to . . . ppijpovtv-

6p,€Pa (more frequent in comparison with anything recorded)

:

and Hellenistic, Heb. ix. 23, Kpurrocn Bva-ian napa ravras. (iv.)

From this easily arose the Romaic and Modern use of irapd

as= the disjunctive rj, especially with a relative clause; thus

in Rom. xiii. 11, (^iyyvrepop fjpaip f) aarripia) ^ ore (TTiarevaapfP,

could be expressed by napa ore (Tnartvaapfp.

§ 36. For the Superlative, the classical form is now used

only when the sense is absolute, e.g. aoipodTaros, 'very wise;'

when it is relative, the Comparative is used with the definite

article, as 6 ao<pOi>T(pos dno BXovs, ' the wisest of all.* The

germ of this use is already seen in Hellenistic, as Matth. xi. 1 1,

6 Be piKpoTfpoi (P Tji /SacrtXei'a tov oiipavov=he who is less (than

the refct)=' the least.' Cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 1 1, ovros Kparup

ibo^tp OS &v pfydko(p(ov6T€pos uvtwi* rj Koi 6paavTepos, * who was

most blatant and brazen among them;' Diogenes Laertius,vi,5,

tp(x)Tr]6t\s tI paKapiu>Tfpov tp dvdpanoiSy * what was the Iiappiest

lot,' (where it would be a false refinement to render, ' com-

paratively happy.')

KUMEBALS.

§ 37. The plassical forms of the cardinal numbers from 1

3

to 19 are, Tpia-KaiSfKa, Te(T(rapeaKai8fKa (rfaaapanaiSfica.), nepjfKal-

htKa, fKKaiheKa, firraKaibtKa, oKTWualdfKa, fpvtaKaideKa, The Mo-

dein forms are, SeKarptlr (neut. -Tpia), htKoriaaapes (neut. -a),

3 TO Appendix.

ieKanfirre, tfKai^, BfKafiTTa, SeKaoKToa, bfKatvvla. Tlie N. T. has

8fKaTf(r(rap(s, btKantvTf, btKa kcii okto). These forms, in post-

classical Mss., may often have been due to transcribers

writing out in full the numbers denoted by letters : but

their frequency in the LXX., and in the Tabulae Heracle-

enses, show that, at least in some dialects, they were cun-ent

much before our era *.

§ 38. The Distributive Numeral can be expressed in Mo-

dern Greek by repeating the cardinal, e. g. nr^yaivow hvo hm,

' they go two by two ' (classical ' ava bio). So in Hellenistic,

Mark vi. 7> rjp^aro avTovs drroarTfXkeip bvo bio : though cp. dva

bio, Luke ix. 3; Kara bio, Ephes. V. 33, etc. As in Mark vi.

39, 40, we have avaKXivai trvniroaia a-vfinocria (by messes), dve~

iTftTov irpacrtai rrpaaial {by companies), so in Modern Greek some

popular phrases are modelled on this distributive form; as

ra^ibdovv yioKb yioKo, ' they voyage along the coasts ' (* coast

coast ').

IV. Prepositions.

§ 39. It is probable that Prepositions were originally noun-

cases, which were first used adverbially and afterwards

joined to nouns. Thus napd may have been a locative case,

meaning 'at the side;' and Trapa toTarai, 'he stands at the

side,' was probably an older type of expression than rrapa

TovTw la-Tarai, ' he stands at the side of this man.' Classical

Greek is remarkable for its precision in the use of prepo-

sitions according as they take the Genitive, the Dative,

or the Accusative. This precision was due, not to inhe-

rent virtues of the preposition itself, but to a fine feeling

for the powers of the several case-endings in combination

* Lightfoot on Galat. i. 18.

* In Aesch. Pen. 981, pvpla ftvpia irtpiraffT&v, I would not render,

* counting by tens of thousands,' as if the repetition had a strictly dis-

tributive force (schol. dvcL pvpiovs), but 'counting by myriads, by

myriads,' a passionate iteration. Cp. fA.tir€i, lAtircs just afterwards.

Classical and Modern Greek. 3 1

1

with it. See, e.g., Herodotus, viii. 99, ovk ovrat 8e irepl tuv

yr\uy a^SofxfPoi ravra oi Ylipcrai iiroUvv, a>s TTCpi auTU —cp^'H5«-

fxaivovTfs' Kal ircpi flepaas fttv rjv ravra rov ivavra utra^v xpovov.

Here Trtpi has a different shade of meaning with each of the

three cases : nep\ tîbv, simply ' about the ships :' nepl avr^

Sfp^r}= ^ close around Xerxes himself (as clothes are put on

TTfpl ra a-oipart), i. 6, (fearing) for the ^êr^^cmaZ safety of

Xerxes : nepl Iltpaas, ' moving around the Persians,' i. e. up

and down their country,= a vague 'in Persia.'

As the Greek language gradually lost a keen sense for the

force of the case-endings it began to lose its old delicacy of

discernment in the uses of the prepositions. Those uses

which in later or Modern Greek diverge from the classical

are mostly instances of extension by false analogy; i.e. the

later use has been suggested by some apparently similar, but

really different, old use.

§ 40. irpo. In ti\6ov npo rpiZv irStv, ' I came three years

ago,' the use of npo is not classical. Herod, vii. 130 has,

indeed, irpo iroWov i(^v\aâvro, ' they were on their guard long

beforehand ;' but no classical writer thus uses Ttpo in nu-

merical statements of time : e.g. the classical equivalent of

npo rpiav iro>v was irporepov rpiaiv erfai. But Latin had ante

centum annos as= centum abhinc annos, '100 years ago;'

ante diem decimum quum rem<= decimo die antequam venit.

Greek writers of the Common Dialect adopted the Latin

construction for irp6: e.g. Plutarch, Mor. i. 475 A, npo bvoiv

rjHtpSiv ^ (rfXfvra : still their Greek instinct comes out in the

addition of a second Genitive, as Plutarch, Mor. ii. 7 1 7 C, npo

pias fiptpas rS)v yfPtffXiwv^pia fjpepa npo rS>v y. : and ?0 in

Hellenistic, John xii. 1, npb 1^ fipfpeHv rov ndaxaê^ rjpepais

npo rov nd(T)(a.

§ 41. Compare a Latinizing use of dir<5 in later (and modem)Greek ; Plutarch, Philopoemen 4, dnb arablatv tlKoai. T^y nokeuis,

'at a distance of 20 stades from the city:' John xi. 18, iyyvs

Tuv 'lepoaoXvfKov ws dno aradiav bfKanevre '. as Livy, xxiv. 46,

312 Appendix.

cum a quingentis fere passibus castra 2)osuisset : the nearest

classical analogue is perhaps a use of «, Xen. Anab. in. 3. 15,

dtuKwi' fK Toôv pv/iaros, * pursuing at the distance of a bow-

shot' (behind).

In Modern Greek ano often stands for xmo of the agent;

this is also Hellenistic, James v. 4, fiia-Oos ... 6 airtarfprjuevos

d(f)* vixa>v, 'kept back 6y you;' or for V7r6 of the motive, as

Matth. xiv. 26, dno tov (f>6ôv (Kpaâv, 'from fear.' Again, cmo

sometimes supplants -napa, as to eXaâ ano rovrmv: this, too,

is Hellenistic, Mark xv. 45, yvovs dnb tov KfVTvpiavos. In

classical Greek, an6 would here= ' on the part of (more

than 'from') : cp. Sophocles, Track. 471, dno ifxov KTrjaet xa/""-

The vulgar Modern use of otto with Accus. was at least as

old as Theoplianes (750-800 A.D.) ; and when (for example)

vuipofiai drto to <f>6pefia expresses Xa/i/Sdi'O/iat tov (popfjixaTOi, ' I

take hold of the coat,' we see the same tendency as in the

N. T. to ufee dno in a periphrasis for the simple Genitive.

§ 42. 8td in Modern Greek supplies curious instances of

false analogy. With the Genitive, in classical Greek, it

denoted the agency/, as Xeyti 8ia npeaêvTov, ' he says by (the

mouth of) an envoy.' In Modern, it also stands for the

instrumental Dativ6 ; see p. 205, where to'is bopaai rCnTovrfs

(Plutarch) becomes Krvncovrfs 8ia t<ov dopdrav (Rangabe) : and

so Ttj TTj^twcp nfpiâXav (Plut. Caes. S)= nfpiKaXv'âs 8ia r^r

Tti^fpvov (Rangab6). In such a phrase as Sophocles, Oed. Col.

470, fit* oarlav x^^P^" Biyav, hid is properly 'between:' but

Hellenistic gives nearer analogies, as 3 John 13, Sta piXavos

Koi KoXap-ov ypdcfieiv.

With Accusative, hid now='for,' replacing the classical

dativus commodi vel incomm/)di, koKov bC r]pds (^= fipiv), 'good

for us.* This came easily from the classical use, as inpdxBr)

Si ^pds, ' it was done on our account.' More strangely,

hid with Accus. of space or place no longer means ' thi-ough,'

but (in another sense) 'for;' e.g. dv€xa>pria-f hia ttjv TaXXlav

means, not ' he started (travelling) through France,' but ' he

Classical and Modern Greek. 3 1

3

started for France.' The former sense would require the

Genitive.

§ 43. //fTa, in its shortened form jie, with Accus., has ac-

quired one new sense ; Koi fxf o\t]v rmv rrjv dvvafiiv, ' notwith-

standing all their power :' /loXoi/oVt (= ê oXov on), ' although :

'

cp. the English, 'for all that they commanded him, he went

not.' In classical Greek irapa with Accus. ('in comparison

with ') most nearly approached this sense.

Note that /le takes the Accusative only, and always means

(in some sense) ' with! The full form (lerd means ' vnth

'

when it governs the Genitive, and ^ after' when it governs

the Accusative, as in classical Greek.

§44. UTTO with Accus. now means 'under:* (a) locally,

even where 'motion' or 'extension' is not implied, the old

use with Dative having ceased: cp. John i. 49, ovra xmh ttjv

<TVK^v. (6) Figuratively: cp. Matth. viii. 9, exo)!/ vtt* ifxavrov

(TTpariiiTas. The figurative use is classical : Xen. Gyr. viii.

8. 5> OTToloi Tivfv yap av ol npoaTarai Sxri, TOioiiroi kuI ol wr'

avTovs . . . yiyvovrai. But it became regular first in later

Greek : cp. Ttrayfjifvos ino toi' âcrikea UToXtfiaiov in inscrip-

tions of third and second century b. c. ^

§ 45. The use of Kaxd with Genitive slightly exceeds the

Attic limit, (a) We have Kara xôpos ofip-ara TT^ât, ' on the

earth,' etc., in Homer ; but in Attic Kara xôôs Kpxmrfiv is

'to hide under ground' (Soph. Ant. 24), and ol kuto. yris are

'the buried' (Xen. Gyr. iv. 6. 5). For ir'nnu> Kara yrjs, 'on

the ground,' a classical writer would have said rather tVl

y^v (Plato, Phaedr. 248 c), or els yfjv, id. Folit. 272 E, Plut.

ii. 187 c: we find also eVi (and irpoi) yrj. (b) In the hostile

sense, 'against,' Kara in good Attic writers is figurative, nut

literal : e. g. X/ym, 8iKdâ> Kara Tivos '. but noXtpoi Tiv'i, ini (or

TTpos) Tiva. Modern idiom would, however, tolerate ndXtpat

Kara, ripoi : as in Clemens Alexandrinus, 871, KaranoXepdv

governs a Genitive instead of the classical Accusative.

* Cp. Journal of Hellenic Studies, i. 29.

3^4 Appendix.

§ 46. trapd in later Greek came to be used with Genitive,

for VIVO, after passive verbs (as a-no also was),—its proper

force, ' from the side of/ ' on the part jof,' being extenuated;

e.g. fypdcf)!] Trap' avrov. In the N. T. there is no strong

example : but cp. Acts xxii. 30, n KaTrj-yopdrm napa rav

""lovhalav, where 'on the part of nearly='hy.' Even on

the title-page of a Greek book (date, i860) we may see

(instead of the ordinary vivo) napa 'laavpov.

§ 47. The use cis with Accus., for classical iv with Dat.,

was first allowed only where motion was clearly implied,

as Xen. Cyr. i. 2. 4, fls rag eavrtov x<^pos Trdpaa-iv. Then,

with the growing tendency to find substitutes for the Dative,

it was extended to instances in which the idea of motion

was at least rather remote. See Mark xiii. 16 \ 6 fh tov

aypov &v, compared with Matth. xxiv. 18, 6 tv ra dyp^:

John i, 18, 6 i>u fls tov koKitov tov irarpos : Acts viii. 40, tvpedrj

fIf "A^Qjroi' : xix. 2 2, (ireaxf XP°*"^^ **'* i^" 'Ao-tW (where surely

we cannot reader \for Asia ') : xxv. 4, rripua-dai t6v UavXov

fls Kai(rdptiav. Arrian (circ. 140 A.D.), Anab. ii. 22. 5, oaoi

aTTOfjuxxoi TJa-av es rrjv 'AXe^dvbpfiav. Already Diodorus Siculus

(40 B.C.) could say (v. 84), Siarpl^av els rds v^(rovs. Cp. the

German ' er ist ins Haus,' the Scottish intill or into, and the

provincial English to=' &t.'

V. The Verb,

Middle Voice.

§ 48. The Aorist was the only tense for which Greek had

a form peculiar to the Middle Voice (as fXva-dfirjv) : in all

other tenses the 'Middle' forms could also be used with a

Passive sense. The Hellenistic Greek of the N. T. retains

* In Mark x. 10, (Is ri^v oliciav is a well-supported v.l. for kv rrj oiKia

imjpuTrjaav,

the distinctively Middle form of the Aorist where it was well

established by familiar use ; as fKOfuffafirjv, jjrrjadfirjv, e<3!)vXa-

^dfirjv. But already in the N. T. there is a marked tendency

to use the Passive form of the ' first ' (or ' weak ') Aorist in a

Middle sense ; as anfKplQr), ' he answered ' (though airiKpivuixriv

also occurs) : diaKpidrjvai, 'to doubt, Matt, xxi, 21 : TanfivaOijvaty

' to humble oneself,' i Pet. v. 6. In Modern Greek this usage

has become fixed, the Passive form of the Aorist being almost

invariably used instead of the Middle : e. g. e(TKf(f)6T], ' he con-

sidered : ' iaroxatrBrj (which now means ' he perceived,' not

'conjectured'): hvkiOj], 'he washed:* tvi^dt}, 'he washed his

hands:' iKpfpaaOr) (not only 'he was hanged' but also) 'he

hanged himself.'

§ 49. As to those forms which the classical Middle Voice

had in common with the Passive, the Middle use has not dis-

appeared, but it has been restricted.

In classical Greek the Middle Voice has three main uses,

(i) The subject acts on himself: as Xoverai, 'he washes him-

self.' This rare use was practically confined to a few verbs

expressing common daily acts. As a rule, the aid of the

reflexive pronoun was needed: e. g. 'he kills himself ' was not

cmoKTfivfTai, but dnoKrdpd eavrov (Plato, Phaed. 6 1 e). Cp.

Xenophon, Cl/r02). iii. I. 25, o* ^e" piirrovPTfs eavrovs, ot 8' dnay-

xdpevoi, oi 8' dnoaipaTTopfvoi, ' some throwing themselves from

heights, some hanging themselves, some cutting their own

throats:' where eavrovs, joined to the Active Participle, also

supplements the force of the Middle Participles. Herodotus,

iii. 119, Tw ^aaiKfi deiKvvaa-i icovTovs, Plato, Rejmhlic 393 c,

(I prjSapov favrov dnoKpimToiTo 6 TioiT]TT]s. In the Hellenistic Greek

of the N. T. a few Middle forms have, as in classical Greek, the

direct reflexive force : so Xovta-dai, KpvirTfdBat, ditdyxfoBai, ' to

wash, hide, hang oneself.' But there is a distinct tendency to

substitute the Active Voice with the reflexive pronoun even in

cases where the Middle Voice could have been used without

a pronoun. It may be allowed that the periphrasis is oftea

3i6 Appendix.

emphatic: thus in John xxi. i8, fftowues (rtavrov is contrasted

with ftXXos o-e fcirret ^ No such emphasis, however, is present

(e. g.) in John xiii. 4, iyeipfrat (K Tov Sfinvov, Koi TiGrfo-i ra ifiaTia'

Koi Xa^wv 'KiVTiov buâaev iavrSv. Cp. xi. 33, fPf^pifXTjaaTo tm

irPfCfiari Koi erapaêv iavTOV.

Modern Greek often makes a similar use of the Active

Voice with the reflexive pronoun. On the other hand, like

Hellenistic, it retains the direct reflexive force in several

Middle forms, as 'Kovopai, vitrrofiai, Kreviôfiai (' to comb the

hair'), x'f^vmovpai (^=KTvirovp.ai=TiiiTTopai), as not only 'lambeaten,' but also:=/crL'7rci) ipavrov, 'I beat myself:' innos Xverai

Koi ipfvyti, 'the horse looses himself (=Xvet tavrov) and runs

away.'

§ 50. (2) A second principal use of the Middle Voice in

classical Gi'eek is where the subject acts, no longer directly

on himself, but in soine way /or himself: as aiVftrat tovto,

' he asks this for himself:' ridtrai. vopovs, 'he makes laws for

himself (as well as for others)^ in distinction from rldria-i

vofiovs, 'he makes laws' (simply). (3) Thirdly, the classical

Middle Voice expresses that the subject acts on a person or

thing belonging to him: as Xixrai cfiiKovs, 'he ransoms his

friends.' Uses (2) and (3) are, of course, very closely akin,

being merely two slightly different phases of the indirect

reflexive force.

Here there are symptoms in later Greek of a tendency to

use the Active Voice instead of, or convertibly with, the

Middle : e. g. James iv. 2, alrdrf koi ov Xan^dverf, SioTi KaKo>i

alrdadf : Luke XV. 6, (TvyKaXfl ras (f>tXovi, as compared with

ver. 9, avyKoKflrai ras (piXasK In Modem Greek we still

* So in Fhilipp. ii. 8, tTairuvwafv eavrov is doubtless more than the

simple Middle Voice (which occurs in the same Epistle, iv. 12, olda Si

rawdvovaOai) : for in v. 9 follows—61^ Kal u @tds avrov vnfpvi//coae. In

Tim. iv. 7, yv/jtva^f Si atavToy irpos (icifiaav, a classical writer could

have used the Middle,'' The weakened feeling for the Middle verb appears in such a phrase

have such forms as avrmoio\)\iai, 'to claim for oneself,' n-fpt-

TTotov/LUM, * to acquire,' iSton-oioii/xat, ' to appropriate,' etc.

But INIodern Greek does not, as a rule, preserve those finer

shades of Middle force which appear in such classical phrases

as Tidfrai voftovs, Xwrat <f>i\ovSf etc. Here the Modern ten-

dency is to use the Active Voice, with a pronoun added

where the sense requires it : e.g. * he saves his kinsmen

'

would be expressed, not by o-w^frai roiis a-vyyevtls, but by

0"<ifft Tovs fTvyyfvtls tov,

§ 51. The causal (or 'dynamic') force which occasionally

belongs to the classical Middle—as in Trotetrat d<Tiri8as, 'he

7ia8 shields made'—is recognised by some in certain expres-

sions which occur in the N. T., as mroypdâaOat, * to have

oneself enrolled ' (Luke ii. 5, where, however, it might be an

ordinary Middle, 'to enrol oneself), dSiKtiaBai, diroaTefne'iaBai

(i Cor. vi. 7), 'to suffer oneself to be wronged, robbed,'—if

these are not rather Passives. This use—always rare, but

so much neater than a periphrasis with euro, have, faire, fare,

lassen, etc.—is lost to Modern Greek. Thus Lucian, Somn.

§ I, 6 5e narfip ((tkottuto yttra Ttov îKav o rt koi SiSdâiTO fie

(' should ?iave me taught '), would now be rendered, 6 de Trarrip

fiov (TvvftTKfTrTfTO fKTa T(i>v <f>t\<i)P tL vd fit ^ciXt] vd, (tdOw (' set

me to learn ').

§ 52. Verbs which in classical Greek had only the Middle

form retain that form in Modern Greek, as ôuXo/zai, ylyvofiai,

de)(onai, bvvafjiai, fpxofMai, and many others in common use.

The same remark applies to verbs, used also in the Active

Voice, of which the Middle has a peculiar derivative sense

;

as, from dnra, 'I fasten,' dnrofiai, 'I take hold of;' from âwtfo),

'1 lend,' bavelCopMi, *I borrow;' from opeyw, 'I extendj*

dpeyopai, ' I desire.'

In a few instances, where the Middle Voice denoted the

action of the subject upon himself, colloquial language began

as SitftepiffavTo iavrois (John xix. 24), while Matth. xxvi. 35 haa Ste/xt/Jt-

ffavTo simply.

3^8 Appendix.

at an early period to tolerate the Active without a reflexive

pronoun: e.g. Mark vi. 6, vrept^ye (for nfpirjytTo) ras Ktafias, 'he

went round the villages:' Acts xxvii. 43, d;To/jpi\/âi/Tff, 'having

thrown (themselves) off:' imarpiâ, avaarpiyô), 'I will return.'

So in Modern Greek nava)=:iT(wofiai, * I cease.' Aristoph. has

nave, 'stop (that)!' as n early =7r«vov,—showing that a ten-

dency to dispense with the Middle Voice in such cases was

not strange to common speech in the best age of the lan-

guage. On the whole it may be said that, in so far as

Modern Greek has ceased to use the Middle Voice, it has

thereby lost only certain finer tones of meaning, which, as

Hellenistic Greek shows, had already begun to be obscuied

two thousand years ago.

Moods.

§ 53. Disuse of the Ojytative. Here also Modern Greek

exhibits the completion of a long process in the history

of the language. The Iliad is the oldest explicit witness

to the use of the Greek Optative. There, in principal

clauses, it expresses wish, or at least willingness, concession

:

in subordinate clauses it expresses that the event is one

which the speaker's agency can in no way affect; thus it

denotes a mere supposition. In classical prose the Optative

retains these general powers; while in subordinate clauses

it has two special functions :

—

(i) As an optional substitute for the Indicative in depen-

dence on a secondary tense : e. g. fprnro) rls tanv, ' I ask whohe is

:

' rjpaTav rls tariv or fir], ' I asked who he was.'

(2) As an optional substitute for the /Subjunctive in depen-

dence on a secondary tense : e. g. ê'vet iva "Siyrj, *he stays that

he may speak:

' tfievev tva X/yj;, ' he remained that he mai/ speak'

(a vivid way of stating his motive), or, ffievfv Hva Xtyoi, ' he re-

mained that he might speak' (the more regular and matter-of-

fact statement).

§ 54. In sentences of type (i), the Hellenistic of the N.T.

seldom employs the Optative, St. Luke has ris fir] (oblique

tU (<TTi), xxii. 23, and in Acts xvii. 11 ft €x<" is the oblique

of (I e;(ft : but such examples are rare. The Indicative is

more commonly retained, as in Mark xv. 44, eVjjpwTijo-ej*. . ft

. . aitfQavtv. There is, indeed, less scope for this use, since

(partly owing to Hebraic influence) there is far more direct

than indirect quotation in the N. T.

As regards type (2), the N. T. has not one certain ^ ex-

ample of the Optative following Iva or ottois after a secondary

tense. The Subjunctive (the classical ' vivid ' form) is already

established as the regular mood: e.g. Mark viii. 6, ibibov .,

Iva irapa8S)<ri. Acts XXV. 1 6, irpiv ^ ?;(ot (oblique of irpiv 7 exjj,

in a negative sentence) is the only example of the Optative

after a particle of time.

A mere supposition is still expressed by ft with Optative :

as el Tv^ot, I Cor. xv. 37 : et ^eXot, i Pet. iii. 17. This was

probably the purpose for which the Optative continued

longest in use : here nothing could precisely replace it.

In later writers the Optative form of oratio obliqua becomes

rarer and rarer. If the absence of that mood in Latin helped

to supersede it in Greek, the analogy was fallacious. TheLatin Subjunctive was of larger compass than the Greek

Subjunctive. The Imperfect of the Latin Subjunctive had

no Greek equivalent in subordinate clauses except the Present

(or, in reference to a monieutary act, the Aorist) of the

Optative,

§ 55. The Modem Greek Subjunctive with vd (Iva) has

become a universal substitute for the classical Infinitive.

A classical writer could expi'ess, * I exhort you to remain,'

by TrapaiceXfvofjial. aroi (l) fieveiv, or (2) ottcos fievfU (fut. indic), Or

(3) ojTwf (av) yxvrfs '. the last means strictly, ' in order that you

* For in Mark ir. 30 ; xiv, 10, yvoi, napaSoi, are probably subjuno

tives formed as if from verbs in -ou (e,g. Sov\oi=Sov\uy).

320 Appendix.

may remain.' The substitution of Iva for ortu>% in (3) was

the origin of the modern usage.

An early example is Odyssey iii. 327, XeVo-fo-ât Sif fxiv

avTos, tva vT]fx(pT(s fvioTTj], where the clause, strictly final, is

almost an object clause. But the development was gradual.

A deposition by witnesses quoted in the speech of Demo-sthenes against Meidias (§ 34) contains the phrase, oi8a/xfi/ dc

Ka\ Mfidiav . . dîovvra Apiarapxôv onus av biaWd^rj avrat ^rjfxo-

o-6tvr]v :' we know, too, that Meidias . . requested A. to reconcile

Demosthenes to him.' Though, however, classical prose might

sometimes use ontos or is (with or without w) with Subjunc-

tive, as a substitute for the Infinitive after a verb of asking,

etc., it certainly would not have so used iva. The example

sometimes quoted as from Demosthenes really occurs in a

Soyfia *An({)tKTv6vcov insei'ted in his speech on the Crown, p. 279.

8, eSo^f . . t6v (TTparrjyov . . Trpea^fvaai rrpos îXinirov . . Koi dîoiiv

iva ôrjBfia-j) tw re AnoXXcovi koi toIs 'Afi(jiiKTvo(nv. It is gener-

ally allowed that the public documents quoted in theDe Corona

are from a later hand ; and this particular decree bears a

further mark of spuriousness in the fact that it misnames

the archon of the year.

But tva probably came in soon after the end of the classical

age. An example of Iva with Subjunctive after imBvufiv occurs

in a fragment of the philosopher Teles (circ. 250 B.C.?) quoted

by Stobaeus 524. 40. And already Dionysius Halic.(2 5 B.C.),

i. 215, can say, bfrjfrfaBat efxeWov iva dydyot, '1 was going to

ask her to bring me..

;* just as Chariton (400 a.d. 1), gives

(iii. i) TrapfKoXft .. Iva npoa-tXdrj, 'invited him to a])2)roach.'

In these, as in most of the similar examples from the later

literary prose, the principal verb expresses the idea of de-

siring, requesting, commanding, etc. Hence there is still

a link with the classical use of iva as= 'in order that:' for

purpose is still expressed.

§ 56. But in the spoken Hellenistic which the N. T. repre-

sents we find a much larger development. "We have not

merely ira^txaKicra iva anoa-Trj (2 Cor. xii. 8)—a case like those

I'ust cited—or 6i\a Iva fioi 8ms (Mark vi. 25), 'I wish thee

to give me/ which, though similar, is stronger—but also

such uses as the following. Luke i. 43, rroBeu /xot tovto,

iva fKdr} f] /irjTrjp . . ;' whence is this to me, that the mother

. . should come V=:t6 fXdelv t^v liTfTtpa : Matth. x. 25, dpKfTov t6»

fiadrjrf] Iva ytvTjrai as 6 8i8d<TKa\os avrov, ' enough for the dieciple

that he should become as iiis master,' =t6 ytveaOai. Arrian

(140 A.D.) has something like this, E2nc'et. i. 10. 8, irparov

fiTTiv iva e'ycl) KOifj.rjdo)-=zTu fpe Koiprjdrivai : John xi. 37, noirjcrai

iva Ka\ ovTos pfj (iTToddpr], * to effect that he should not die,'=wore toZtov pfj dnodavelv. It will be seen that in each of these

cases the fact expressed by tva with the Subjunctive may be

regarded as the fulfilment of an asjnration. Even here, then,

a connection with the classical use of tva can be traced beneath

the unclassical form : and we perceive the analogy with such

a phrase as that in Sophocles [Trach. 1254), rr^v xapiv . . n-poV-

Ofs, cos . . (s TTvpdv pt 6i]s, * add the favour of placing me on the

pyre :' where as 6fis=:T6 6ti>ai.

The practical identity of this Subjunctive with the clas-

sical Infinitive appears from Murk xiv. 12, eToipdawptv ha

(f>uyTjs, compared with Matth. xxvi. 17, iroipda-copfu (jyaydvi

John i. 27, n^ios tva \vcra>, and Acts xiii. 25, a$ios Xvaai. It

need scarcely be added that the several writers of the N". T.

differ considerably in the freedom with which they use iva:

thus, while it occurs but sixteen times in the Acts, andtwenty in the Epistle to the Hebrews, it is found in the

Fourth Gospel more than a hundred and forty times.

§ 57. The Modern Subjunctive with vd has often a quasi-

tmj)erative or a deliberative force : as vd t6 Kdfxrjre, ' mindthat you do it

:' vd to ttna ;

' am I to say it 1' This construc-

tion comes from the elliptical Hellenistic use of tva : as

Mark v. 23, tva fX6a)v tnidrjs rds \flpas ai/rrj, '(I pray thee)

to come,' etc.

§ 58. The Modern construction with Ttplv.—The classical

Y

323 Appendix.

construction is as follows: i. '//« will conquer before he

falls^ viKrjad TTpiv TTfceiv : 2. 'He will NOT conquer before

he falls' ov viKrjaet npiv (&v) ntaj] : 3. 'lie conqvsred (or did

not conquer) before he fell,' {oik) eVi/cijo-e irplv enfo-e. In

(2) and (3) Treo-ftK would also be correct. Now in all three

Modern Greek uses the Subjunctive with Trpiv. This (at

first sight) strange usage is, I think, unquestionably re-

lated to the habitual use of the Subjunctive with vd for

the Infinitive; in (i) and (3) the Modern npiv Ttearj is really

felt to be equivalent to the classical vp\p irtadp. The use

of Trpiv in the N. T. observes the classical rule.

§ 59. Impekative Mood.— i. as(=a^«s, 'permit') is pre-

fixed to the ist and 3rd persons : as Xv.7, 3? Xvwo-t (as 'Kiiovu) :

&s ^var,, as Xvaaai {as \vaow) : p. 72. Similar phrases occur

in classical Greek: Eur. frag. 310 (Nauck, p. 358), irdf?Es\ 2>

OKiepa <f)vXKds, oircpPw Kpj)vai.a vdnt], Cp. ôv\(t . . . Oaipfv ' (Plat.

Gorg. 454 c), 6fk(is p.(ivwp.(v (Soph. El. 80), instead of the

simple deliberative Subjunctive.

In Hellenistic Greek ucjifs is already common : Matth. xii. 4

(and Luke vi. 42), acpes eVâXw : xxvii. 49, acjies tSco/xf i' : also

the plur., Mark xv. 36, a(pfTf iBtopev. Latin influence may

have helped : die veniat, fae cogites, cave facias.

2. Prohibitions. In the N. T. there is no breach* of the

classical rule against using /xij (prohibitive) with the 2ud or

3rd person of the Present Subjunctive. Thus prjKtTi dpapravf,

John V. 14 (general precept) : fir] vopiarjre, Matth. x. 34 (of a

particular act). For the 3rd person, however, the Imperative

mood, not the Subjunctive, is always used in the N. T.

(present, pfj d^tfVcD, i Cor. vii. 1 2 : aorist, prj •yi'WTw, Matth. vi. 3).

In classical Greek the Aorist Subjunctive was here the rule,

and the Aorist Imperative (as Plat. Apol. 17 c, prjMs . . . irpocr-

• d<pir)pu, fco — 'to permit,' takes an Infin. in classical Greek: rots

&a(pa\is ôvfxivots . . d<pii]fit \fyuv. Plat. Laics ii. 672 B.

^ fif) (TKkrjpvvrjTf in Heb. iii. j 5 being the aorist.


ioK^vari^ the exception : the Modern hi yH] XCa-r] is thus moi e

classical than the Hellenistic fif] XuadTco.

Tenses.

§ 60. The Periphrastic Future. In Modern Greek the

Future is formed no longer by a mere inflexion of the verbal

stem, but by a periphrasis : thus the Future of Xvw is not

XiVw, but diXio Xt€t or 6fXa> Xvo-et, 6a \vo) or da \va(t)^. At first

sight such a change might seem to argue a complete loss of

instinct for the native powers of the language. But if we go

back to the early history of the Future form in Greek, it will

appear that there is some justification for this expedient.

Indeed there are few instances in which the later desire for

expressiveness at the cost of terseness has manifefcted itself

with better reason.

§ 61. The Future tense of Greek was originally a Present.

A people of lively temperament readily use the Present for

the Future, 'je vais' in the sense of 'j'irai.' By degrees the

Indo-European Present, when thus used, came to be marked,

in most instances, by some slight difference of form, and this

had happened long before the Greek language had a mature

separate existence. Some Greek Presents, however, con-

tinued to be used as Futures without any such distinction

of form : and these, it may be noticed, are words which

would have been in frequent use. Such are the Homeric

^fiofiai {^eo/xnt, ^lufiai), 'I live,' used as= 'I will live;' S/jco,

as= 'I will find/ /cet'o) (k/w) as= 'I will go to rest;' from

Homer onwards, dfii as= 'I will go;' eSofxai as='I will eat;'

Trloiiat as='I will drink;' the Attic x«*> and ;^eo/ifu as= 'I

will pour/ the post-classical (pdyofiai aE= 'I will eat;' and

dvadpafxofxai (once), as= ' I will run up.'

§ 62. The Greek discrimination of Present from Future

forms was thus neither strong nor constant. Can we, then,

* Popular speech prefers the forms with 6a both in the Future and ia

the Conditional {0a tKvov).

Y 2

324 Appendix.

observe in the classical language any tendency to express the

Future by periphrases similar to those which Modem Greek

has finally adopted ?

The answer must be, I think, that, unless sometimes in

poetry, we find no tendency to use periphrasis for the

ordinary Future ; but that periphrasis occurs under certain

conditions of emphasis, as if it were felt that here the simple

Future failed in strength or precision. We cannot properly

reckon here such a form as tarai noiav, which is not strictly

a mere periphrasis for iroifjo-d (any more tlian is iroitia-wv earl),

but rather a mode, natural to many languages, of expressing

continued action in future time : though, of course, it may be

used in a merely rhetorical way, just as in Ireland one heara

'he will be doing it' as a more impressive 'he will do if

(with the corresponding future-perfect, 'he will be after

doing it'). The truest classical periphrases are those with

fif\\(o and (deXu> : but their use has rather narrow limits.

§ 63. With fjfWa. Plato, Bepublic 567 B, xmeâipfiv

hf) TovTovs ndvTat 8el rov Tvpnvvov, €i p,cXX€i apêiv :' the

tyrant must, then, put all these persons out of the way, if

he is to rule /' and then presently, ms toiKc yap, airr<5, f<\>T},

avdyKT], ciTTcp apêi :* Yes, it seems that he must,

—

if he

is to rule.' So, again, in the Republic 459 e, ft /le'XXet

flvai is followed by et earai as its equivalent. In both places

fiiWei means, not ' intends,' but ' is destined ;' and this sense

defines those cases in which /xeXXw with the Infinitive is most

nearly a true periphrasis for the Future.

§ 64. As to fWXw the case is less simple. Here we must

distinguish two phases of usage :

—

(i) Where the subject is a thing, and ideka denotes that

which is to happen in accordance with some natural law.

Aristotle, HepX ala-ffrja-tus 5 (p. 445 a 21, ed. Berl.), en 8' ovSe

TO vbcop eOeXci airo (lovov ap-iKTov ov rpi^^w, ' again, water will

not nourish of itself, without any admixture.' Plato, Rep.

370 B, ov yap . . lO^Xei to irpaTrofxtvov Trjv rov npaTTOVTOs (r)(<i\^v

Trepifiî/cif, ' the action will not await the leisure of the agent.'

Herodotus, i. 74i ««'fv yap dvayKairjs l(rxvpfjs avfi^datts ovk idi-

Xooai (ruftfiiviiv, ' without powerful constraint, compacts vnll

not be maintained.' Thucydides, ii. 89, rjcraripivuiv 8e dp8pS)i>

OVK cOeXouai^ at yvotpm npbs tovs avroiis Kivdvvovs o/xoiui etkai

:

' risks beiug equal, the minds of the vanquished loill be

less readj' to face them \'

(2) Where the subject is a person. Herod, ix. 89, yvov^ on

«l lOe'Xoi a(pi ndcrav rfjv akrfdritrjv . , eliriiv, Kiv8vvevcrei nnoXtadai :

'(he was silent), aware that if he should tell them the

whole truth, he would be in danger of death.' Here, as

the context shows, tl (dikoi une'iv is not so much *if he

should consent to tell,' as ' if he should take the course of

telling;' i.e. it is little more than a forcible periphrasis for

fi Xfôi. Aristophanes, Wasps 533, opa^ yhp as o-oi peyns

iarrXv &yi>v . . (imp, t pfj ytvoid', ovtos a cOe'Xei Kparriaai :

' You see how grave the crisis is for you, if (which mayHeaven forbid !) this fellow is to worst you.' Here tdeXd

KpaTTJa-ai cannot mean, ' is ready (i. e. willing) to worst you,'

but seems to be nearly =:|xfXXet Kparâm,—tOiXd expressing

that which the nature of the man ordains, and thus approxi-

mating to the first use. I would add here two examples

from Herodotus which seem to me intermediate between

the first and the second use, since the subject is a thln'j,

but is in some measure personified : ii. 11, d u>v hi] eOcXiâei

€KTpcij/ai TO pefdpov 6 NfiXos is tovtov top 'Apaîov koKtiov, ri piv

KoAid . . iKx<x>(T6rivai ] 'if, then, the Nile should turn aside

his stream into this Arabian Gulf, what is there to hinder

it from being silted up ]' el edfXrjaei €K.Tpfy\rai is practically little

more than a vivid d (Kxpfxlrerai : i. 109, et Se eOcXtjaei, tovtov

T(XfVTTj(TaPTos, is Ttjv Gvynripa TavTrjp dpa^qvai tj Tvpappis : ' if, OU

' This use of iOtXai with reference to natural capability might be

illustrated by the use of PovXc/xai with reference to natural tendency ;

as Aristotle, De Aniin. Gen. iv. ad fin., ôvKtrai /itv ovv ^ <pvais {ttnde)

. . OVK uKpiôi df, ' but does not attain a perfect result.'

^26 Appendix.

his demise, tlie royal power should revert to liis daughter.'

Here, again, d e'deXrjad dva^rjvai seems to differ fi-om d ava^rj-

(Ttrai only by suggesting more strongly the idea of destiny.

§ 65. The frequency of this quasi-auxiliary (de\(ji in Horo-

dotus looks as if it was a colloquial idiom in the language

of his day ; and, considering the example just quoted from

Aristophanes, we might conjecture that it was not confined

to the Ionic dialect. But at any rate there is a wide in-

terval between any instance which can be produced from

classical Greek and the ordinary Modern Future (espe-

cially the Passive Future) with 6t\(ja, as to tpyov 6(Xti

npax^rj, ' the deed will be done.' Nor is there anything

in the Hellenistic Greek of the New Testament which dis-

tinctly passes the classical limit of this usage. The habit

of forming the ordinary Future with deXa had doubtless

established itself in the vulgar speech long before it was

admitted in the literary style ; and can hardly have arisen

before the vernacular had begun to diverge very decitledly from

the classical type, i.e. not earlier than about 300 A.D., pos&ibly

much later. In low Latin such forms as cantare habeo for

cantabo became common from the sixth century onwards \

§ 66. The Periphrastic Perfect and Pluperfect.—The Perfect tense of Greek, as of the kindred languages,

grew out of a reduplicated Present. Reduplication sym-

bolises the repetition of the verbal stem, and is intensive

;

thus from verbal stem th/- the simple form is rflva, ' I

stretch ;' the reduplicated form is riTaiva (in which « sym-

bolizes the repetition of rei')= 'I stretch stretch,' expressing

' Brachet, Historical French Grammar, ii. 2. p. 1 20. Habco becoming

ai in Frencli, ho in Italian, he in Spanish, hey in Portuguese, the futures

equivalent to cantare haheo are respectively chanter-ai, canter-(5, canter-^,

canter-ey. Seeing that habco scribere in classical Latin meant the same

thing as tx'" ypaifxtv in classical Greek, it is curious that, while in low

Latin habeo scribere = 'l have to write,' in Modern Greek (xeu fpdif/ti=M

• I have written.'

the same notion with more emphasis. So SiSco/xt (stem 80-)

is literally *I give give :' and so rldrj^i, etc. In many Greek

verbs (especially those which denote an act and not a state)

the Perfect form is still an intensive Present, as KfKpayt, ' he

is crying aloud,' dehopKf, ' he beholds/ Tre^pi/cf, ' he shudder's,*

y(yr)6(, ' he rejoices.'

This intensive Perfect-present became a Perfect-proper, de-

noting & finished act, by some such steps as these :—(i) The

same verb often had both an ordinary Present and an intensive

Perfect-present ; e.g. oXXv/xat *I perish,' oXooXa, 'I perish utterly.'

(2) The ordinary Present then acquired, by contrast, the idea

of incipient or attempted action, while the Perfect-present

came to denote finished action : oWvfiai, ' I am in the wayto perish,' oXo^Xo, ' I have perished.' The Perfect-proper is

not rare in the Homeric poems, and they offer at least one

form, ixffi^XuiKu, which in the Iliad (iv. 11) is a Perfect-

pre-ent, and in the Odyssey (xvii. 190) a Perfect-proper.

A third phaFe followed in many of the cognate languages.

Through the idea of finished action the Perfect tense came

to be associated with past time. Hence the 'historical'

Perfect in Latin, fecit, can mean not only ' he has done it,'

but also simply ' he did it.' The Sanskrit ami the Teutonic

Peifect acquired the same use. But the classical Greek

Perfect did not acquire it, because the Greek Aorist already

served that purpose.

§ 67. In Modern Greek the Perfect of ypd(})a> is no longer

yeypac^o, yeypajXfiai, but ex** W'V''*'^) ^X<" ypa^^rj. This raises

an interesting question. Did the Greek Perfect, like that

of kindred tongues, at length pass into the third phase

just indicated ; and was the new form devised to satisfy

the need for an unmistakable distinction between / vyrote

and / have written 1

In classical Greek the Perfect of finished action is some-

* Or ex** (7«)7paA<>*«'»'oy. Now, M of old, the Aorist often represents

our Perfect.

3^8 Appendix.

times joined with tlie Aorifct : e. g. [Dem.] or. vii. n^pt

'aXowijctov § 29 (by a contemporary of Demosthenes, 342B.C.), Tiji/ x'^pav ^v -oi "EWrjves Koi âaikfvs 6 Uf/jtrcoj/ ei|«'r]4>iaatrro

Koi. bmo\oyr\Ka(Tiv vfifripav dvai, ' decreed, and have acknow-

ledged.' So Lucian, Dial. Beor. 19. I, d(pcj)Tr\ia-as alrov koI

vevUrjKas, ' jou disarmed and have conquered him.' In such

instances it is the Aorist that approximates to the Perfect,

not vice versa. The frequent association of the tenses was

likely, however, to become a source of confusion in the

decadence of the language.

And in fact later Greek shows some clear traces of

a tendency to use the Perfect as an Aorist. See, e.g., Reve-

lation V. 7> Koi T)X0e, Koi ciXr](|>£ to î^Xiov . . . koi ore eXaê to

/3t/3A('oi', TCI T€crcrapa û>a /cat ot (iKoenTtaaapfs TrpeffjSiVepoi tTreaoy :

vli. 13, Koi dircKpiOr] ds . . . koX cipT)Ka avTw . . . Ka\ citt^ fioi ;

Vlli. 4, Koi dke'^T) o KOTTPOS . . . koi 6iXt)<{)€I' 6 ayycXos , . . koi

iyefiicrev . . . koi tâkev. Thucydides, iii. 68, has in historical

narrative tt/v 8e yijv SrjpoaiaiaavTfs dTT(pia6a)(Tav, ' they con-

fiscated the land, and let it out at rent.' Here the Greek

scholiast explains the Aorist anenladwaav by the Perfect : (ir\

pia-da SeSuKao-ic. And more than once this scholiast uses

the Peifect, instead of the Aorist, in his historical notes

on the text: thus on Thuc. i. 20 he writes, iXifiu^c jtotc fj

Attikt], Ka\ Xvcrii Tjv tSjv dtivwv, naiâv acpayi]. Aews ovv ris ras

iavTov Kopas ciTiSeSojKC Koi dTri]XXa^£ tov Atpioi) Trjv noXiv. Again

on Thuc. ii. 95, wj 8e oidiv diroSeSuKC npos alrov 6 UepSiKKas

anep vnfCTXf'o, eaTpdrcuCTC kot avTov.

§ 68. Here, then, we have proof that in later Greek the

Perfect was used, at least sometimes, convertibly with the

Aorist. The examples just cited are all from vei'bs ex-

pressing very common acts,—fiXrjâ, fiprjKa, deSuKa and its

compounds. There can be little doubt, I think, that we mayhere recognise the direct influence of the Latin historical

Perfect on 'the Greek vernacular of daily life in the earlier

centuries of the Empire. The old line, strongly-marked as

it once had been, between the Greek Aorist and the Greek

Perfect was thus insensibly obscured. Thus there may have

arisen by degrees a sense oi practical need for such a form as

eô) ypuyfêi. But we must allow also for rhetorical motive

—

i. e. for the desire of au em2>Jtatic as distinguished from an

ordinary Perfect.

§ 69. Classical Greek shows this in the periphrasis with

€x<» and the Aorist participle. In prose, as a rule, tx.^ is

then more than a mere auxiliary : e. g. Dem. Phllljyp. iii.

§ 12, epay . . . €;^ft /<aTaXa0coi/=not merely, 'he has seized

Pherae,' but, ' he has seized Pherae, and keeps it :' op. Iliad

i. 356, eXd)v yap txfi yfpas avTos dnovpas'. and SO Her. iii. 65,

SdXo) €xov(Ti aiiTrjv (tijv fjy(fiovir]v) KTrjaafitvoi, On the Other hand,

e^w is sometimes a true auxiliary : Herod, vi. 1 2, dvbpl . . .

aXnôvi . . . {TiiTpi\lâvTfs fjpius avTovs (xojjLtv. Plato, Phaedr.

257 C, Tov \6yov 8e aov iraKai davpaaas fp^co (a stronger Tfdav-

paKo). On the border-line are Herod, i. 27, twv . . . 'EX\f)va>v . .

.

rav (by attraction for toxis) <jv bovkaxrai fX"^* *^' 28, rovs aX-

\ovs . . . v^ tojvrw (ix^ KaTaaTpfyJAdpfvos. The frequency of

this periphrasis in the Greek dramatists is due to its me-

trical convenience for the iambic trimeter : e. g. Soph. 0. T.

731, rji^dro yap tovt, oiibe na> XfjâvT fX'h * nor have they yet

ceased' (to be said) : Eur. Med. 33, o? atê vvu drtpxiaas f^*'*-

It is remarkable that the Modern periphrasis joins exw

with the Aorist Infinitive and not with the Aorist Participle.

This is the more curious since the corresponding low Latin

form of perhaps nearly contemporary origin, habeo scribere,

was the periphrasis for the Future. I can only suggest one

explanation. There can be little doubt that the Greek peri-

j>hrastic Future arose before the periphrastic Perfect. The

need for a clear Future form would be constantly felt ; whereas

the reduplication would long serve as a strong mark of dis-

* The idea of this periphrasis is as old as the form of the Perfect

Active Participle ; \(\vKwi, stem \e\vK-0T (where the suffix -or is tlie

San.slvrit vat)=' possessing loosing,' i. e. ' having loosed.'

^ô Appendix.

tinctiou between tlie old Perfect and the historical tenses.

Thus, when people had once become thoroughly accustomed

to say 6tK(i) \vrjii, habit would make it seem more natural to

say ?â) Xuo-fi than rj^m Xi^trar.

§ 70. The Histoeical Tenses op the Indicative in

THE CoNDiTiONAi; SENTENCE. The differences between clas-

sical and modern syntax here concern chiefly those forms of

the conditional sentence which imply that a condition is not,

or was not, fulfilled.

The classical foims are these:— i. d enpnêv, eypny^tv av:

' if he had acted [at some definite past moment], he would

[then] have written-.' 2. ft trrparrfv, fypa(f)fv nv. this form

can mean either of two things, viz. (a) Referring to the

2)ast : ' If he had [then] been acting, he would [then] have

been writing.' (b) Referring to the present : ' If he had

[now] been acting, he would [now] have been writing;'

where it is implied that, as a matter of fact, he is not acting,

and consequently is not writing. The context in each par-

ticular case must decide whether (a) or (b) is intended : (6)

is, however, more frequent than (a).

The double significance of this classical formula, ei (nparTtv,

fypa(f)(v av, is the key to the corresponding formula in Modern

Greek.

In either of the two senses, (a) or (6), Modern Greek can

say, ehv t-npa-rre, da Zypacfx (or ^êXe ypacjxi), using the * First

Conditional' (p. 84).

For the classical form with the Aorist, d tnpaêv, eypayj/fv

av, the most precise Modern equivalent v?ould be fav flê

npaêi, 6a fixe ypd\lêi (Pluperfects). In the ajwdosis, the

'Second Conditional' with Aorist Infin. (p. 84) is, however,

more usual, as ijQ(\i ypa\j/ei. In tl-.e protasis, the Pluperfect is

sometimes used to exclude ambiguity, but is often replaced by

the Imperfect iav firparre ^

* The Aorist Indie, after tl or (av, in Modern Greek, usually concedes

a. fact (like the classical «i or tintp) : e.g. tav ^ Ma^tSovta f\vTp<uOr] icou

Classical and Modern Greek. '^'^ i

But the First Conditional is often used in Modem Greek

where classical Greek would have preferred the Aorists. E. g.,

' If you had come a little sooner, you would have seen him :

'

classical, ft oXiyw nportpov fj\6(Te, dbfTt &v avToi/ : liere Modern

Greek could say, tav ^px«t6( oXlyov npoTTjTepa, 6a Tov f/3Xf7rfTe.

That is : AVhere it is implied that in past time a condition

was not fulfilled, Modern Greek sometimes neglects the

classical distinction between a single and a repeated (or

continued) act.

§ 71. Classical Greek used the Optative mood in abstract

suppositions : «t npatraoi, ypd(f)oi av (or rrpa^fif—ypayjfeie, if

a single occasion is meant) :* Supposing that he were acting,

he would write.' The Hellenistic of the N. T.,—where, as

seen above, the Optative is already rare in oratio obliqua,—retains this use of it, in which, indeed, nothing could

exactly replace it : i Pet. iii. 14, dXX' d Ka\ Traaxoire dm

StKaioa-vmjv, fiaKapioi (a mere supposition) ; cp. Luke vii. 39,

€1 rfv irpo(prjTi]s, tyivcoaKev av (implying that he is not, does not

know).

Modern Greek, having lost the Optative, cannot dis-

tinguish this form from d enpaTTev, typa<piv av, used in

sense (a). Our form, ' If he could, he would,' can similarly

stand for either ; i. e. it may imply that he can not, or

it may imply nothing whatever as to his power. Thus a

modern translator of Xenophon renders oiSfJs av \ii<^6fLr] by

Kavfii 8ev ^6f\f ptivfi (^Anab. iii. I, § 2) : a-adelrj av by ^6fXe

(TUiBri (§ 6): el bwaipfOa (§ 1 7) by fciv Tj8vvdp(da. Sometimes

the Optative with av in apodosis can be rendered by the

Modern Future, or by a periphrasis: as el opmrjv, t\doipi av=.

(av iSo), BiKoi i\dfi (ib. 3, § 2): yivoiro av ^ dpn opti va y(lv>]

can be done, {ib. i, § 38).

Sitfpuyf rrjv oKtOpiav Tvxqv, tovto 6(j>fi\fTat (h t^v iviaiav , , ifivvav

(from the N€o\o7oy, Feb. A^, 1880) :' If Macedonia has been delivered,

and has escaped . . this is due to the united defence.'

3î Appendix.

§ 72. A few examples are subjoined :

—

Classical.

Aorist Indicative.

1. Ei TovTO (fidOfTt, ovK av fa(pd-

XrjTe. ' If you had perceived this,

you would not have tripped.'

2. OvK hv (TToirja'tv, tl rrpofiSe to

diropTjaofitvov. ' He would not have

done it, if he had foreseen the re-

sult.'

Imperfect Indicative.

3. El d\ts eTxe XPV/^'^'*"'> fWf'TO

av. ' If he had money enough [as

he has not], he would buy it.'

4. T(KoTov av T^v, d /ifj t)V fiiapov.

• It would be comic, if it were not

odious.'

Optative.

5. El (Kuae iropfvOftTjv, iSoifit &v

avTov. ' Were I to go there, I

should see him.'

6. El KaKais trapaaxoi tois iv

T(Ku, irpa^fiav tiv tcL avpcpipovra.

' Were the government to have an

opportunity, thej' would take the

proper measurea.*

Modem.

1. 'Eai' ei'x*'''* yvcupifffi [or Iciv

(yvojpi^fTf'^ TOVTO, Sfi' ii6eKfT( a<pa-

\u [or 5iv 6cL (iXfTt cTipaXet'].

2. AtV ^0(\f TO KafMfl [or StP TO

(txf Ka/xei, or even 5iv Oa to (Ka/x-

V(v^, iav irpoiPKfTre t6 diroTiKfa/xa.

3. 'Eav (Txfy apKiTo. x/'WOto,

Cd TO riyopa^f.

4. 0^ ^To 76X01*01', lav [or 6i] St)/

[or /i^] ?jTO fitapov.

5. 'Eiv enriyaivov eKei, 60L tov

f0K(nov.

6. 'Eav napdxfTO ivKaipia th T-qv

Kvl3(pvT)(7iv, i]0(\ov Kafifi to. icaTaK-

\t]Ka fi(Tpa,

Pakticiplk.

§ 73. The abundant and varied use of the Participle in

classical Greek was developed with the growth of a periodic

style (X«|tf KaTfo-Tpafifievr]) in literary prose: see e.g. Isocrates,

or. V. ij^hilipjûs) § 91, aX\* ofKos Tr)\iKavTr]s crifxipopai CTUfiiTC-

orouoTfjs ovT(o cr(f>68pa KaTf<pp6vr](rev 6 jSacriAfvs Trjs iTfpi avTov bvvd-

fifa>s, SiVTi irpoKaXcadp.ci'OS KX/apiôv Koi tovs oKKovs rjyepovas fit

Xoyoj/ {XOelv, Ka\ tovtois piv UTn<Tyyovfi.€vos peyaKas Soopeas Scocreii',

7"ois 8 aXXotf (TrpaTiwTais €vt(\^ tov piaBov dnodovs dnonepêiv,

Toiavrais fKniaiv OTrayaYOfAecos, kqi Tn'oreis Sous toiv tufi vopiô-

lx(vo>v ras p-eyioTas, auXXaPwf avrovs dneKTfive. The natural


tendency of colloquial or popular language, on the contrary,

is rather to use the \i^ii dpo\iivr\, simply tacking clause to

clause; e.g. Matth. vii. 27, »cal Kark^t] 17 ^po\ri Kai r\K^w ol

noTUfjiin Kal iitveucrav oi nvtuoi Kai irpoacKOVj/aK rfj oIkio fKfivu, Kai

CTTCCTCi', Kal riv T} TTTOKTis avTTjs fifyaXf].

The bent of Hebraic (and generally of Oriental) expres-

sion has doubtless, in portions of the N". T., strengthened

the inclination to use finite verbs rather than participial

clauses. But, apart from this, the later tendency of colloquial

Greek itself can be plainly seen (e. g.) in John i. 47, epx"" 'f"'

i8f : vii. 4, ov8f\s (V Kpirrrra ti ttokI koi f'jTei avTos iv Trapprjcnq

(Ivai : Ephes. iv. 26, 6pyi((a6f Koi prj apLapravfre '. and Luke

(whose style is so often comparatively Hellenic) xviii. 33, koi

aiTToi ovbtv Tovrav (rvinJKav, Koi r}v rb pfjfia tovto K(Kpvp,pfvov an

avrav, Kai ovK iylvuxTKOv to. \ey6peva. On the other hand, for a

series of participles thoroughly in the manner of the classical

periodic style, see Acts xii. 25, xxiii. 27.

§ 74. The more analytic character of modern expression has

helped to restrict the old pregnant uses of the Participle;

and it is natural that Modern Greek should use it much more

freely in the literary style than in conversation. The following

points should be noticed:

—

1. Where, in narrative, the classical Participle expresses

a distinct act, and not merely some attendant circumstance

of another act, the Modern tendency is to use the finite verb

and conjunction: see, e.g., above, p. 205, 'ApT€p.ia-ia yvapiaatra

. . . dvrjvtyKev, ' she perceived the body, and brought it up

'

(Plutarch) : dvtyvcopiaev rj 'Aprfpia-ia Kal to ftptptv indva (Ran-

gabe).

2. Where the classical Participle expresses a supposition,

condition, concession, etc., the Modern language prefers

to define this: e.g. above p. 196, -npos . . . tw 'ladfjim o-ofi-

paXXwi' ev TreXayet . . . vavpaxr](Tti.s '.' If yOU give battle at

the Isthmus, you will fight in open waters' (Herod, viii. 60):

ih.v cXOtjs eif x*'P"^ napa tov 'laBpiov, els dyoLKTou TriXayos 6a

334 Appendix.

vuvnaxâ-rjs (Gennadius) : p. 198, oiVoVa . . . PouX«uo|i£Voiai

avOpanouTi ft)? TO in'mav iOiXa ylyv(a6ai, }it) Se oIkotu ôuXcuo-

fieVoiai oiiK t'diXd, k. t. X. (Herod. 1. c.) : ' When men formrational plans, success, as a rule, attends them ; but w/ten their

plans are not such, it does not.' orav fxtv ol avd^jtonoi aKe'irrwi'Tai

Kara ra mSavarfpa, ravra as «rt to irXelarov Ttivovv va nfiaypaTonoi-

ovvrai (tend to be realised)' otoi' 8« /*/) ra mOava SiaôuXcuui/Tai,

b(v OfXei, K. r. X, (Gennadius).

3. AVhere the classical Participle forms a complementary

clause, the Modern idiom commonly resolves it into a clause

with a finite verb. Thus oi8a avrov Xe'yoi/ra, ' I know that he

Bays = flêvpoD on Xtyti ^: aladavopai ifiaprdvuv, ' I perceive

that I err ^ KaTavoS> on ap-apn'tva).

4. After verbs of beginning, continuing, ceasing, being

ashamed, etc., the classical Participle is often rei)laced by vd

with Subjunctive : e. g. biariKei noiwv, ' he continues doing,'

=.8iaTf\€i va Kapvp '. rjpâTO \eya)v= rjpxKJ'e vaXfyrj,

5. The Genitive Absolute, though used in the higher lite-

rary style, is more commonly paraphrased. Hellenistic Greek

had already lost precision in this usage ; thus in the N. T. we

read, Matth. i. 18, fivrjarfvddaTjs Ttjs ynjTpos avrov . . . fiipidrj iv

ya(TTp\ fxoia-a (Gen. Abs. referring to subject of principal verb):

Matth. ix. 1 8, ravra auToC XaXovvros . . . (Is . . . 7rpo<T(Kvv(i auT(i>

(Gen. Abs. referring to object of principal verb). See above

p. 196, 'OXvpiricov Tcov e'<^€|^v ayopivatv, 'When the next Olympian

games were being held' (Plutarch) i — orav ireXeadrjo-av rd npHtra

fierd TaiJTU 'oXi'firrta (Rangabe).

§ 75. Disuse of ilie Future Participle.—In classical Greek

the Future Participle (when not preceded by the definite Art-

icle, or by as) is usually (a) the subject of a verb of going, aa

tpxofuu bpdauv, or (&) the object of a êrb of sending, preparing,

' In the N. T. yivwaicoj is usually construed with ot«, tliough also

with a Participle (Luke viii. 46, etc.) : oiSa never with a Part., but

always with on or Infinitive. A Participle is construed with (patyo/xat

(JIatth. vi. 16), and okovw (Acts viL la).

etc., as nffjLTTa tpdaovra. It is not used as the Latin Future

Participle is used (e.g.) by Pliny, E]). iii. 21, ' dcdit mihi quan-

tum potuit, daturus amplius, si potuisset,' t.e.= ' while ready

to have given.' Even such an example as Aesch. Agam. 66,

^Arpfui TratSaj Ztvs iriynTfi, naKaliryiaTa . . . Gi^awc, is very rare.

In the N. T. the Future Participle is seldom found : where it

occurs, it generally has the Definite Article, as John vi. 64,

6 rrapabojcrav. In Heb. xiii. 1 7 we have dypvirvovaiv a»9 \6yov

dnoSoiaoi'Tfs, ' in the expectation of giving an account.' But

as the simple equivalent for a final clause it occurs only in

the Acts, e.g. xxiv. 11, dve^r]v irpoa-Kwrja-iov. Modern Greek

supplies it by a periphrasis: as ^\6ov 6\lfnpivos avTouj^vnrjya

VI. Particles.

§ 76. I. icai as a substitute/or oxf, when. This colloquial use

occurs in such phrases as t6v (i8a Koi rjpxero, 'I saw him coming;

'

TJKOvtra Ka\ tXeyt, ' I heard him say ; ' poKis f(f)6a(re Koi fint,

' scarcely had he arrived when he said,' etc. This is essentially

a return to the primitive mode of expressing temporal relation,

which is still common in the best classical Greek, as Plato,

Symp. 220 C, rjbri Tjv pear]p^pia koi avdpoinoi ijaOuvovro. It is also

frequent in Hellenistic, as Mark xv. 25. But here, as else-

where, the popular Modern use oversteps the classical limit.

Hence :

—

2. Koi with Indicative, as an equivalent for the Infinitive

:

TTWf flpnopd Koi Tpa)yfi= va Tpoiyj], 'hoW is he able to e&tV rjpxiof

Kcn €K\ai(= ^pxi<re va K\air,, 'he began to cry.' ri fKopf koi uvai

ToiovTos ufdpanos; 'what has he done to be [_=8ia va ^mij such

a man 1' Cp. ' "We will try and do it.'

3. Kai emphatic,= ' even' or 'also,' is regularly prefixed in

Modern Greek to na\iv, avdis, ertpos, aXXos, and similar words :

e. g. ' It will give me much pleasure to see you again,' pfyiarTjv

6a alaOavdS) repyj/iv va eras TSw Kttl Tiakiv. * I am in hopeS of

33^ Appendix.

receiving another letter,' fx<" ^'' e^»ri5oj ou â Xa3<a Kal eT/pai/-

tTriaroXriv. A redundant use of /cm' is not rare in classical

Greek ; e.g. Antiphon, de Caed. Herod. § 23, €^»;mro oiStV Tt

/ioXXoi/ 11776 rwv nXXwi/ ^ Kal iw' </ioO. It suits the love of

emphasis natural to popular speech, and is well marked in

the Hellenistic of the N. T. : as Rom. i. 13, Iva nva Kapnov

(rx& Kal fv vfiiv Ka6a>s Kal «V roij Xonro'n fdvf<riv.

§ 77. idv with the Indicative. While « with the Subjunc-

tive (used by the classical poets, and supported by the MSS,

in Thuc. vi, 21) is common in Hellenistic and Byzantine

writers, the converse solecism also gained ground : in the

N. T. some examples have good authority, as Luke vi. 34,

tap SdffI'êre : I John V. 1 3 [o'ldafiev] : Rom. xiv. 8 {ano6vj](TKOfi(v).

Modern Greek uses iav (contracted av) with Subj. Pies, and

Aor., Ind. Impei'f. and sometimes Aor. : tav epxria-ai {fpxn)—(K6rji—fjpxtao (fipxov)—^\6es : €i is little used except in the

§ 78. ora»' is similarly used with Indicative Present, Markxi. 25 (o-rijKfre): Imperfect, iii. 11 (iOeapfi) : Aorist, Rev. viii. i

(^fojêv). In Modern Greek orav is colloquially used with

the Indicative, as otoi/ tpxerat (îjpxfTo, r)k6e) : but in correct

writing the classical rule is still observed, ore being used with

the Indicative and orav with the Subjunctive ^.

§ 79. vd with Indicative. The classical Iva, as a final particle,

could be used not only with Subjunctive and Optative, but

also with the past tenses of the Indicative. It then implied

that the end had not been attained, because some condition

had not been fulfilled : e. g. (f)ev, <f)fv, to htj to irpayiiar dvOpoinoit

* This later use of orav as = orf, (av (el dv) as = tl, with Indicative,

may be compared with those instances in the old language where dv is

irregularly retained after a relative word before the Optative: e.g.

Herod, viii. 13, (iroUfTS re irav . . okojs Slv iîawOdr), k.t.\. (and so i. 75,

99) ; Xen. Anab. iii. 3. § la, tv(dptvoi, . . oiroaovs fi.v KaraKavoitv . .

,

Toaavrai x'A'O'pfly KaraOvanv. The principle is the same ; viz. that dv

has come to be regarded as forming one word with oVcus, etc.

?;^*ii»I

<f)eavfip, Iv rjfrav fiJ}biv oi Stivol Xoyot (Eur. frag. 442,

Nauck) :' alas, that facts have not a voice for men, so tluit

subtle words might be as nothing !' Here Iv âav differs from

iv ojat by expressing that (since facts have no voice) subtle

words are something.

It has been seen how Modern Greek extends the use of vd

with Subjunctive : it extends in an analogous manner the

uê with Indicative.

(i) vd with Aorist Indicative= classical Infinitive where

the reference is to that which must have or ought to have

occurred : nptnft va fTeXdwaav = XPl" (^^tovs TeXeiaxrat, * they

ought to have finished :' 8fv ylvfrai va /^^ t6 dxav Kdixfi,ôvK

((TTiv avTovs y.T] irtTTOLrjKevai (ovK tariv ottus ovk (noirjaav^j ' they

must have done it.' (f)ai(Tai va tnaSe jToXXd, ' it seems that

he must have suffered much.'

(2) vd with the Pluperf., Aorist, or Imperfect Indicative=classical uxrirfp d with the same tenses : a>s va dx^v ipvdpidan

8m ToiovTov flei-y/xa piKpoyf/vxâs, (Trpoxa)pr]crt 6appa\€a>s '. * as if he

had blushed for such a sign of pusillanimity, he advanced,' &c.

as va prj flxa Kiipd, 'as if I had not done it.' With the Im-

perfect it can thus express a wish : va ^[ir]v vov\l, * oh, that I

were a bird !'=(16' tjv opvis.

§ 80. Certain Adverbs exemplify the later tendency to sub-

etitute more emphatic words for those used in classical Greek.

(i) Instead of dei, Modern Greek commonly employs

irdv'TOTe, an un-Attic word used by writers of the CommonDialect, as by Dionysius of Halicarnassus (25 B.C.), Plutarch

(90 A. D.), etc., and often in the Hellenistic of the N. T.

Indeed, the N. T. has dd only in eight places, one of which

(Heb. iii. 10) is a quotation from the LXX, and another (Tit.

i. 1 2) from Epimenides.

(2) Instead of €Tt, 'yet,' 'still,' Modern Greek uses okojitj

(^=dKpT]v). For the classical use see Xen. Anab. iii. 3. 26,

6 o^Xos aKpTjv Suâive, ' was just crossing.' But already in

Theocritus (270 b. c.) a question asked with «rt (is be still

z

^$S Appendix.

. . .X) is answered by aKiiAv ye, ' yes, slill ' (iv. 60). So in

Hellenistic: Matth. XV. 16, aK)xr]v kcu. vfult aavvtroi (are, 'are

ye, too, still without understanding 1

'

(3) Instead of yap, Modern Greek uses Siori (or cireiSi]).

In the N. T. Stdn seems to be never merely= ' for,' but='because:' such passages as i Thess. ii. 8, Galat. ii. 16, serve,

however, to illustrate the ease of the colloquial transition.

(4) Instead of ovt>, Modern Greek uses XonrcJc {ceterum, du

reste). Already in Plato an almost illative use of to Xomov

may be seen : Gorg. 458 D, alcrxpov 8t) t6 Xomov yiyverai . , . (fie

y€ fifj fdeXeip^. For the Hellenistic use, which often differs

little from the Modern, see Acts xxvii. 20, prjTe 8f fjXlov, prire

aoTpcov (TrKpaiiiovToov, k. t. X., . . . Xonrou (' then,' ' accordingly,')

ntpir^pfiTo naaa (Kiris. Cp. 2 Cor. xiii. II. In I Thess. iv. I

it is combined with ow.

(5) Instead of vvv, colloquial Modern Greek uses rwpa

(sometimes written rt)pn),= Tg topa, ' at the hour' (which nowis). Here, as in the case of del, it might seem strange that a

comparatively cumbrous substitute should have displaced

a word so thoroughly established in familiar use; yet it is

not more strange than that nunc should have been supplanted

by maintenant. Cp. Ital. ora, Fr. tout a Vheure.

(6) Instead of ivBabe or ivravda, ' here,' Modern Greek uses

cSw. The derivation from Ibov ('behold !

') is supported by

the cc^xistence of the forms (biKoi and tSi/co? (see § 23). It is,

I think, further recommended by the analogy of the French

id from ecee hie.

§ 81. a&v, contracted for wj uv, 'as,' 'like:* e<o/uf ahv npo86-

TT]s Trjs irarpidos, ' he has acted like a traitor to his country.*

Colloquially, adv is often followed by the Accusative, loh&n

the noun lias tJie article (but not otherwise) : e. g. depvovrai ahv

Toiig irereivovs, 'they maul each other like fighting-cocks.'

* In Prptag. 321 C, \oivdv Sfj dieoaprjTov (ti avrw ^v , . rh tuiv dvOpii-

TTjui' ytvos, I should not take it (with Ast) as = iam, but simply as -»

velicimm erat.

111 classical prose, d was almost always added to iy av : e. g.

Plato, Gorgias 479 A, (poôvfifiot u<nrcp &v el ttois, ' timorous

as a cliild,' i.e. ôjiovjxfvo^ Sxnztp hv [ô/SoTto tisJ, 6i n-mr [*'»?]•

Isocrates, Panegyricus § 148, hitnoptvdriaav uairep iiv [Stfjroptii-

^»;(rai/] ci Trpontpiroufvoi ^8ifnopfv6T](Tav\, * they traversed the

country as safely as if the enemy had been their escort:' ib.

§ 69, opLoias Sif(j)6apr]<Tav ucTTTcp Af €i np6s ajravras dvdpuirovs

t7To\fpr](Tavy ' they were crushed as utterly as if they had been

warring against all mankind.' (Here the verb belonging to

tl is not understood, as usual, but expressed.)

The form used in Modern Greek, which omits d, is also very

old : Polybins (145 B.C.), i. 46, (rvpâivd 8e tov AiXvâiov TOVTOV

an(\(t.v TOV Tonov ws 0.V (kutov koI UKoat arabia, * it IS found that

this place is distant from Lilybaeum about 120 stadia.' And.

so in Hellenistic, 2 Cor. x. 9, wa pfj 86^<a &s &v fK(f)o^fiv vpas,

'that I may not appear as it were to terrify you,' is

fchort for Iva prj fid^w rrotaira TrotcifJ its au \p6âip4, TTOitlv, d8d|at/xt] (Kôêiv vpas. The inherited instinct of the language

is curiously shown by the fact that now, just as in classical

Greek, as av or crav is most frequently used where the com-

parison implied is unfavourable or scornful.

§ 82. The Negative Particles %iv and ^r\.—%iv (short for

ovbiv), the Modern equivalent for ov, is regularly used in the

protasis of a conditional sentence, alike with the Indicative

and with the Subjunctive Mood : e.g. (hv hiv dxov bwapeis avta-

Tfpas, rj6f\ov viKTjdrjj ' If they had not had superior forces, they

would have been conquered.' av biv poi doiarj Xoyov dnoxpS)VTa,

dev 6a fixapiaTri6S>, ' If he does not give me an adequate ac-

count, I shall not be satisfied.*

The progress of this use can be traced. Where in classical

Greek ov (and not the normal n^} follows «t or idv, it affects

a 2)articular word, and not, as pt} does, the whole protasis

:

Plat. Apol. 25 B, (dv T€ ov-(})r]Te fdv re <^^Te, ' wheiher you deny or

admit it:' Lysias, Agor. § 62, tl ov-ttoXXoI (zroXiyoi) âav.

But in later Greek the admission of ov is less restricted,

z 2

340 Appendix.

In the Hellenistic of the N. T. ov reguhirly follows d with

the Indicative, where this expresses fact : e.g. John v. 47,

ft 8« . . . ov Tri(TTti(re : Luke xi. 8, (I Koi ov daxrei, ' though (it

is the fact that) he will not give;

' Heb. xii. 25, « yap fKfhoi

ovK ftpvyov, ' If (as we know) they did not escape.' Where,

however, tl with a past tense of tlie Indicative expresses

hypothesis, the negative is always, in the N. T., /H17 : as John

Xviii. 30, ft fir) ^v ovTos KaKOTTOios, OVK av <toi napfdooKciixfV avrov. In

the N. T. iav always takes pr], never ov.

The Modern use of Mv in protasis marks, then, a later stage

than the Hellenistic, with a less true tact for the forms of the

conditional sentence, and with a less fine instinct for the

moods : d p.f] rjv is no longer discriminated from d ovk ^v :

and one can say even iav Sew ?/.

§ 83. \i.-f\, never SeV, is the negative prefixed to the Participle

in Modern Greek. Here the classical distinction was plain, ov

stated a negative /aci ;/X17, a negative conception. Hence (i)

OVK fiScbf, ov (pqcriv dde'vai, ' not knowing, [a simple statement of

the fact,] he says that he does not know :*(2) pf] etStoy, ov (prjatv

ftSeVat, 'if {or when) he does not know, he says that he does not

know :* where /X17 d8ois-=:d (or ort) ixf) ol8f, ' if (or when) he does

not know.' So with the Infinitive : (Prjaiv olx ovras ex**") ' ^^^

Bays that it is not so :' 8d pfj KKenrfiv, 'it is right not to steal.*

In later Greek, fifj tended to usurp the place of ov

:

(l) being used more freely with the relative, as tyi) 6s fxf)

dfit, ' qui non sim,^ instead of ovk dpi, ' non sum

:

'(2) in

oTt (if), as Lucian (160 A. D.), Nigrinus § 24, ayavaKTUi on ^r\

. . . pLtTaKafi^avoviTi, ' I am vexed that they do not adopt (the

dress) : ' (3) in causal clauses, Lucian, Hermotimus § 20,

(nfn\r]^t . . . SioVt fir) . . . eiroufofv, ' reproved him because lie

had not made :' (4) especially with Infinitive and Participle.

Infinitive, as Lucian, Peregrinus § 44, e0>? • • . f^T) dovvai, ' said

that he had not given.' Participle: id. Philojiseudes § 12,

fXdrrfTO ds bpaKwv, TraXator, vno y^p(os, oipai, (^(pnvaui p,Y)

tvvap.(voi ; i&. § 1 9, 6 6e irapfp^fTM, [iTjSew (vo)(Kr](Tas tovs IduvTOi,

1

And so often in the Hellenistic of the N. T. : IJark v. 26,

iroXXfi nadoixra . . . koi \iii]ikv w(f)f\r]df~iaa dWa fiaWov ds to x^^po"

iKdovcra . . . rjylraro : Acts ix. 7, fiar^Ktia-av iveo'i, aKovovres fiiv rrjf

wviis, iir\hiva 6e dfcapovirres. Here classical Greek would require

oil, ovbfv, ovBtva.

§ 84. Two principal causes contributed to this extension

in the use of /ixij.

(i) Classical Greek furnishes many examples of ov with the

Participle where fir/ is admissible, and might even seem more

natural: as Herod, viii. 129, ol [lev 817 vteiv avrmv ouk iwurrd-

fxevoi 8i€(pBetpovTo :' Those, then, of them who did not know

how to swim were drowned,' =5'Mt natare nonpoterant (certain

definite persons): where oJ fit) eVtoTd^efot would have meant,

*8uch as did not know,'= 5'wi natare r^on x>ossent. First came

the habit of preferring /x»; to ow whei-e the choice was thus

open : the next step was to use /ii7 where ov alone was correct.

(2) lit} with Infinitive is classical after some verbs of be-

lieving, 2>Totesting, &c., where, as the stress is on a fact, ov

would have been natural; as Dem. In Ifid. § 221, irfniarTfvKe

. . . fiTjSeVa fXIfti/, ' he is confident that no one will drag

him.' [Dem.] or. 40 Adv. Boeotum de dote [probably by a con-

temporary of Demosthenes], § 47, aiiros eavrov KaTafJUipTvpel fiT]

f^ fKfivov yfyeyrjaOaiy * he testifies against himself, that he is

not that man's son.* Here pr) has a force similar to that of a

command or an oath :' let no one suppose that,' ' may I not

prosper if it is otherwise:' just as it is used in a statement

of negative fact with the Infinitive when the principal verb

is Imjierative: Aeschylus, Fers. 435, (v vvv toS" ictGi, p,T]S€ir

ptaovv KOKov. The sense that pfj, in such contexts, was more

forcible than oi helped to recommend it in other contexts also;

thus illustrating by another example that straining after em-

phasis which attends on the decay of a fine instinct for the

powers of language.

R. C. JEBB.

PRINTED IN ENGLANDAT THE OXFOKU UNIVERSITY PKESS

6ir

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

PA D'Abernon, Edgar Vincent1058 1st viscountD25 A handbook to modern1919 Greek 2d ed., rev. and

enl.

(9

A handbook to modern Greek - Archive

Documents

Transcript of A handbook to modern Greek - Archive